Home

HP 3577a User's Manual

1. B AP Figure 2 26 Gali Compression of an Amplifier Compression Range UDF RDI REF LEVEL OIV OFFSET 17 208 MKA 39 000d8 8 00008 MAG UDF g 9048dBR R TARG ARR L TARO HARKER TARGET START 40 0dBm STOP Oo OdBm FREG 100 000 000 000Hz 2 29 MAKING MEASUREMENTS MKR OFST ON OFF Figure 2 27 3 dB Compression Level 2 30 AMPLIFIER Softkey used to turn the OFFSET MARKER off The marker informa tion block will change from OFFSET to MARKER information The MARKER magnitude is the input level at which the amplifier has a gain compression of 3 dB See Figure 2927 f REF LEVEL ZAIN MARKER 920 0d amp 8m 35 90008 5 0004 MAG UDF 20 550d amp 5 OFF ZERO HARKER MKR OF ST ON OFF MARKER OFFSET fet ml eS ask TT START 40 0d amp m STOP O0 0d8m FREG 100 000 9000 000Hz This test may be run again at other frequencies for more thorough testing of the amplifier LOW PASS FILTER MAKING MEASUREMENTS OW PASS FILTER Connect the HP 35677A B S Parameter Test Set to the HP 3577A Network Analyzer and connect the low pass filter to be tested to the HP 35677A B as shown in Figure 2e28 The low pass filter used in this example has a 3 dB frequency of 50 MHz but the methods used to measure its characterist
2. Dv SH D at MEME n Ti wegen euer tinea nd H emp dn ham DZ za aec a Musa qa eae Si Ee NU sanos p Pa e9 51 339uuo5sip t joyeo18 yo e Ap Ss yeu sitodde euBis e uot n s ayi WO jndjno Sy JODULOISIP PIM yey ANTA uot 2910id SBPYOMAAD SEU jndjno e 4nos eui Andino unos y KEE MA e Ia Besson SuuEN E dos ii T pue Rtg ar ag oi i uoneuuiojut afem 3841 sones uonipuoo siyi AA LL pasaka jou 90p jnq ap OZ spoo xe u ije u de indu ap puorag fen jeusis eu i Sud jor OARS ivis S Lamaen anws ERES EER EE ANGHNEREESNI SHEN and yore 103 na mm 8 nu t MEIS ZH 001 ZH L HJOILAAGN VS NOLLNTOSIN EES EC Arpa dua asnos Jemp i m ro aanindwv di wgp g 0 ugp p daams py uo njose daams azis days Joeren J9juss weds Asuenbay Hauss dojs 4483 SAMSTEG SEA ddams nasi 403 ueds s 669 03 ueds sur OOL SHAILE dS penued ETE snonunti GON dadas umopj n opa ip danas MD saan pio p poem Aouanbaj po AL di3 NS 32ZDUNOS M RA RAIN T a BUG SHOE 3591 JO SIOIDBUUOD APPO N 9dA1 7 GZ Seg oun iruri di ununxeur Od 1s9j 9g UO posh oie suo129Uu00 Nod o 0s A paseulep Ajpeors d 9q Apu SIOJIAUUOD asa OAM pur Oe apott q 044 KA edd a9 uh 40 SW Kate depen A Juanba e er 35 mere gt A A wee ma are Pd E Ht KIELEN 0 app
3. M REMOTE OPERATION ABORT key pressed Clears the message Turn the menu back on Sent as 16 bit binary words MSB first The commands for the HP 1345A Digital Display are binary commands When the ENG command is used the HP 3577A will pass these commands to the display section Appendix B is a quick reference programming guide for the HP 1345A The JUMP command is not allowed The carriage return character will be translated into a left arrow Memory capacity is 924 com mands End Or Identify will be sent with the last data byte to indicate the end of the sequence n UN Pa TUTE RN Urna nmn a Clear state and annotation Turn the display ON Example 1000 1010 Use of Enter Graphics 1020 1030 COM INTEGER Cmnd array 0 20 Array indx Disp adrs Array length Adrs 1040 INTEGER Plotx Movey Ploty Set__cmnd Text 1 5 Es 1050 INTEGER K 1060 Array length 20 1070 Array indx 1 1080 Disp adrs 0 1090 Adrs 711 1100 ASSIGN Adrs TO Adrs 1110 1120 OUTPUT QAdrs IPR ANC 1130 OUTPUT QAdrs AN1 1140 OUTPUT Adrs TR1 DFO GRO CHO 1150 1160 Define the annotation commands 1170 1180 The PLOT command for the display 000y pddd dddd dddd 1190 1200 Where y 0 for x definition 1 for y definition 1210 1 p 0 for pen up 1 for pen down 1220 1 d location in range O to 2047 3 27 REMOTE OPERATION 3 26 1230 1240 1250 1260 1270 1280 1290 1300 1
4. 2A Junk Enter the register data in data format FM2 i i ASSIGN ENa FORMAT OFF FORMAT must be OFF to ENTER QNa Real array2 use data format FM2 ASSIGN Na FORMAT ON Real array2 now contains the real and imaginary parts of 51 complex numbers Load this data into register D2 OUTPUT QNa LD2 1 Last prevents CR LF ASSIGN Na FORMAT OFF Binary data must be OUTPUT Na Real__array2 preceded by HI ASSIGN Na FORMAT ON Register D2 now contains the data from Real array2 OUTPUT QNa TR2 ID2 ASL Display data in D2 PAUSE r RRR KAKA AREER RR RRA RR RAR RARER RK RAR ER KR RK RR ER KK KEKE RK ERR RAK RARE RRA RARA REMOTE OPERATION 570 FM3 32 bit floating point binary used by the HP 3577A 580 internal processor There are 4 bytes per real number in 5900 data format 3 Next take a measurement and store to D1 600 610 OUTPUT QNa RSA TRT IBR TKM SDT ASLE 620 630 Now Dump D1 in data format FM3 640 650 OUTPUT Na FM3 DD 660 670 Enter the leading bytes I into an unused string 680 then enter the data 690 700 ENTER Na USING 2A junk 710 ENTER Na USING W Integer__array 401x2x4 bytes 720 730 Integer array now contains the real and imaginary parts 750 760 770 OUTPUT Na LDI 41 740 of 401 complex numbers each part filling a pair of Series 200 Integers Load this data into r
5. DEFINITIONS OPERATING HINTS 1 It is good practice to start a measurement setup by pressing INSTRUMENT PRESET This is a quick way to set all parameters to known values the PRESET state and is used as the common starting point in this manual For a listing of the PRESET state parameter values see INSTRU MENT PRESET in the REFERENCE section NOTE The PRESET state depends on whether an HP 35677 A B S Parameter Test Set is connected to the HP 3577A If the connection is made without turning off power to the HP 3577A Network Analyzer it is recommended that the INSTR PRESET hardkey be pressed to update the starting parameter values 2 The recommended sequence for setting up a measurement is 1 INPUT 2 DISPLAY FCTN 3 FREQ 4 AMPTD This sequence is a good general start for setting up an instrument state and should be easy to remember See the circled numbers in Figure 1 1 j RATO can SO kd A c E OA w it Fale gei HER O O SWEEP f sweep MODE Wt d H A MANU of MARKER O entire C SSES INSTRUMENT STATE GREENE Figure 1 1 Setup Sequence 3 The HP 35774 is a menu driven instrument The hard keys all keys with a function stenciled on them are used to display the various menus If the menu displayed is not what you wanted press another hardkey to display another menu If you decide not to make a data entry after beginning the entry on the numeric keypad you may press another hardkey to
6. Figure 4 47B HP IB ADDRESS is a softkey used to view and change the address of the HP 3577A on the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus This address is set at the factory to 11 and may be set to any whole number from 0 to 30 in clusive INSTR PRESET does not change this value nor does cycling power This number cannot be changed via the HP IB it can only be changed manually To modify the HP IB address 1 Press the SPCL FCTN hardkey to display the first menu 2 Press the HP IB ADDRESS softkey 3 Enter the new address with the numeric key pag 4 Press the ENTER softkey e TALK ONLY ONJOFF is a push push toggle type bie that changes the HP IB configuration to TALK ONLY ON for driving a plotter TALK ONLY should be turned OFF when the HP 35774 is controlled via HP IB CONFIDENCE TEST is used to check each receiver chan nel for general pass fail status A screen message re quests the user to put a cable between the source out put and the receiver to be tested Nine tests are run and the status of each pass fail is displayed on the screen as the results are determined Any test that fails stops the test and highlights the screen message specifying the failure The test may be continued from a failed test by pressing the softkey CONTINUE TEST The S parameter test set should not be be connected to the receiver being tested during the CONFIDENCE TEST In the case of a test failure refer the problem to a serv ice repair facil
7. REFERENCE TRIGGER MODE SWP _ MODE MANUAL Figure 4253 TRIGGER MODE is a hardkey in the SOURCE section of the front panel used to display the menu of softkeys shown above These softkeys may be used to select the type of triggering used by the HP 35774 to initiate meas urement sweeps FREE RUN is a softkey that is the default TRIGGER MODE selection In FREE RUN the HP 35774 triggers a new sweep as soon as the previous sweep ends and the source settles settling is indicated by an LED in the SOURCE section If the SWEEP MODE is SINGLE the next sweep does not begin until the user presses the TRIG RESET hardkey LINE is a softkey that selects the power line as the trig ger source This results in the power line starting the sweep after the settling is complete If SWEEP MODE is SINGLE the next sweep does not begin until the user presses the TRIG RESET hardkey and the line trigger occurs EXTERNAL is a softkey used to select the external trig ger input on the back panel as the trigger source The 4 36 trigger occurs after settling is complete and if SWEEP MODE SINGLE the TRIGGER RESET hardkey is pressed The HP 3577A triggers a sweep on the high to low transition of a TTL logic signal or a switch closure to ground When the HP 3577A is ready to be triggered the WAIT TRIG LED in the SOURCE section of the front panel is illuminated If a trigger signal occurs when the WAIT TRIG LED is not illuminated the tri
8. The eight keys with no stenciling next to the menu area of the screen are called SOFTKEYS The lettered keys are referred to as HARDKEYS Most hardkeys only func tion is to display a menu of softkey labels Exceptions are the keys in the DATA ENTRY section of the front panel and the INSTR PRESET LCL and TRIG RESET hardkeys See Figure 4945 SOURCE The SOURCE section of the front panel contains the hardkeys that display menus of softkeys which control the parameters of the source These parameters include SWEEP TYPE linear alternate log amplitude or CW SWEEP MODE continuous single or manual SWEEP TIME FREQUENCY AMPLITUDE TRIGGER MODE 4 29 REFERENCE free run line and external and TRIGGER RESET For more information on individual functions refer to the hardkey of interest O UH a SWEEP SETTLE SWEEP TYPE Figure 4 46 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS The SPECIAL FUNCTIONS hardkey in the INSTRU MENT STATE front panel section contains the softkey menus for viewing and modifying the HP IB address running a CONFIDENCE TEST turning the beeper on or off and many service diagnostics HDP IB i LEVELING DISPLAY ADORESS ON Gee MEM TEST TALKONLY DISPLAY ON OFF gue HP IB CONF Y G HP T6 TEST ON Ge SIG ANAL BEEPER TEST SOFTWARE ON GFF PATTERN REVISION SERVICE E EE TRACE MEM S PARMS ON GFF deis FAST BUS ZNT TEST AG TURN MORE Figure 4 47A 4 30
9. Alameda Rio Negro 750 ALPHAVILLE 06400 Barueri SP Tei 421 1311 Telex 011 23602 HPBR BR Cable HEWPACK Sao Paulo ACM CFE MS Hewlett Packard do Brasi Le C Ltda Avenida Epitacio Pessoa 4664 22471 RIO DE JANEIRO RJ Tel 286 0237 Telex 021 21805 HPBR BR Cabie HEWPACK Rio de Janeiro A CM E MS P BURUNDI Typomeca S P RL B P 553 BUJUMBURA Tel 2659 P CANADA Alberta Hewlett Packard Canada Ltd 2 10 7220 Fisher Street S E CALGARY Alberia T2H 2H8 Tel 403 253 27 13 Telex 610 82 1 6 14 1 A CM OP ETMS PO Hewlett Packard Canada Ltd 116204 168th Street EDMONTON Alberta T5M 379 Tel 403 452 3670 Telex 610 831 2431 ACM CP EMS P British Columbia Hewlett Packard Canada Ltd 10691 Shellbridge Way RICHMOND British Columbia VEX 2W7 Tel 604 270 2277 Telex 610 922 5059 A CM CP E MSP Manitoba Hewlett Packard Canada Ltd 380 550 Century Street WINNIPEG Manitoba R3H OY 1 Tel 204 786 6701 A CM CS F MS P Nova Scotia Hewlett Packard Canada Ltd P O Box 931 300 Windmill Road DARTMOUTH Nova Scotia B2Y 326 Tel 802 469 7820 Telex 610 27 1 4482 CM CP E MS P CR alonabetically by eeng Ontario Hewlett Packard Canada Lid 552 Newbold Stree LONDON Ontario NGE 285 Tei 519 686 9181 Telex 510 352 1201 A CM CS E Mt Hewlett Packard Canada Ltd 6877 Goreway Drive MISSISSAUGA Ontario LAV 1M8 Tel 416 678 9430 Telex 510 492 4246 A CM
10. E Hardware failure E HP IB Use of the HP 1345 display module command is illegal when entering graphics E Hardware failure E Hardware failure W During MEASR CAL sweeps and CAL processing the oniy key to which the HP 3577A responds besides INSTR PRESET is ABORT CAL E Amplitude sweep operate in the CONTINUOUS SWEEP MODE for five minutes before changing to SINGLE to prevent excessive wear on the output relays See AMPLITUDE SWEEP TYPE W If AVERAGE is on and ALTERNATE SWEEP TYPE is selected this message appears It is not possible to use averaging with ALTERNATE SWEEP E One or more of the confidence tests do not pass Hardware failure M All confidence tests passed E HP IB Continue CAL not allowed unless in the MEASR CAL sequence E Both traces should be on to COPY SCALE This message appeared because one is inactive E HP IB User entered data may cause data errors when involved in trace arithmetic This message may also in dicate a hardware failure E HP IB Data transfer to the HP 3577A has stopped E HP IB Data transfer from the HP 3577A has stopped W Delay aperture is increased automatically when necessary as the sweep resolution is decreased This message appears when the display function is delay aperture is small and the user selects a reduced sweep resolution C 1 APPENDIX C C 2 MESSAGE DISPLAY MEMORY TEST FAILED DISPLAY MEMORY TEST PASSED ENTRY SET TO 0 0 ENTRY TOO LONG ENTRY UNDEFI
11. Legaspi Village Makati DO Box 1510 Metro MANILA Tet 85 35 81 85 34 91 85 32 21 Telex 3274 ONLINE l ACEM Electronic Specialists and Proponents inc 690 B Epifanio de los Santos Avenue Cubao QUEZON CITY P O Box 2649 Manila Tel 98 96 81 98 96 82 98 96 83 Telex 742 40287 P POLAND Buro Informasji Technicznej Hewlett Packard Ul Stawki 2 6P PLOO 950 WARSZAWA fet 39 59 62 39 67 43 Telex 812453 hepa pl a t Arranged Ga ed Die by Gare PORTUGAL Telectra Empresa T cnica de Equipmentos El ctricos Sarl Rua Rodrigo da Fonseca 103 P O Box 2531 P LISBON 1 Tel 18 68 60 72 Telex 12598 ACEP Mundinter intercambio Mundial de Com rcio Sard HO Box 2761 Avenida Antonio Augusto de Aguiar 138 P LISBON Te 19 53 21 31 53 2 1 37 Telex 16691 munter p M PUERTO RICO Hewlett Packard Puerto Rico P O Box 4407 CAROLINA Puerto Rico 00630 Calle 272 Edificio 203 Urb Country Ciub RIO PIEDRAS Puerto Rico 00924 Tek 809 762 7255 Teiex 345 0514 ACP QATAR Nasser Trading Contracting DO Box 1563 DOHA Tel 22170 Telex 4439 NASSER M Scitecharabia DO Box 2750 DOHA Tei 329515 Telex 4806 CMPARB P ROMANIA Hewlett Packard Reprezentanta Boulevard Nicolae Balcescu 16 BUCURESTI Tet 130725 Telex 10440 SAUDI ARABIA Modern Electronic Establishment DO Box 193 AL KHOBAR Tel 44 678 44 813 Telex 670 136 Cable ELECTA AL KHOBAR CEMP
12. Oldfrea 1 E 4 6 MHz Y Y dB Pass Pass 1 END LOOP END This program demonstrates the fastest possible 5 point group delay measurements possible on the HP 3577A Data can be dumped by moving the marker or dumping the trace OPTION BASE 0 DIM Mkr 5 Array holding the 5 marker values for the filter to be tested DIM Trace 100 Array holding the 100 trace data points ASSIGN Na TO 711 ASSIGN QNa nofmt TO 711 FORMAT OFF Ready bit 16 Meas complete 4 Pass 0 Answer M INPUT Dump Trace T or Dump Marker M Answer IF Answer 1 1 T OR AnswerS 1 1 t THEN PRINT Will use Dump Trace Dump trace 1 ELSE PRINT Will use Marker Dump Dump__trace 0 END IF Startuptime TIMEDATE CLEAR Na OUTPUT Na IPR Preset the instrument Turn off characters and bus diagnostics for greater speed OUTPUT QNa CHO BDO IF Dump trace THEN OUTPUT QNa FM2 Use 64 bit binary data format ELSE OUTPUT QNa FMIT o The marker will be dumped in ASCH END IF Select single linear sweep and delay display fctn 1 3 35 REMOTE OPERATION 3 36 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 OUTPUT QNa SM2Z STT TRT DF1 OUTPUT QNa SAM 0 DBM TR1 BW4 UDI B R Measurement set up
13. the active trace The softkey label varys depending on which trace is selected If trace 1 is selected it reads COPY SCALE 2 1 if trace 2 is selected it reads COPY SCALE 1 2 AUTO SCALE is a softkey used to quickly scale the trace so that it fills the graticule without clipping the trace To use this feaure press the SCALE hardkey and then the AUTO SCALE softkey PHASE SLOPE is a softkey that appears in the menu when the DISPLAY FUNCTION is PHASE or a function of phase like delay This softkey is used to add or sub tract a phase shift term to the defined input PHASE SLOPE units are degrees SPAN or radians SPAN This is somewhat like the LENGTH for use with a trace in stead of individual receiver inputs and may be used as a phase flattener Note that changes in frequency span require modification of PHASE SLOPE if it is to have the same effect on the new span The value of PHASE SLOPE may be changed in the same manner as shown for REFERENCE LEVEL One important difference between LENGTH and PHASE SLOPE is that LENGTH values are used to process in coming data when a measurement is being taken and affects values stored in trace memory PHASE SLOPE processing uses data stored in trace memory to create a new trace for the screen and so does not affect stored data or require a measurement sweep when new PHASE SLOPE values are entered PHASE SLOPE ONJOFF is a softkey used to turn the PHASE SLOPE feature off and back on This is a p
14. 300 E 26 50 Adrs 711 60 ASSIGN Adrs TO 711 70 80 l POLAR DISPLAY FUNCTION 90 100 OUTPUT Adrs IPR ST1 TR1 DF4 TKM DMS 110 ENTER Adrs X Y Z E 120 130 140 OUTPUT QAdrs ASL 150 WAIT 1 160 170 GOSUB Get characters 180 3 22 Auto scale the screen display Allow time to update picture 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 Result PRINT Full scale Bfr 1 PRINT Phase Reference Bfr 2 PRINT Reference position Bfr 3 PRINT PRINT Marker frequency Bfr 5 PRINT Marker amplitude Bfr 6 PRINT Marker phase Bfr 7 PRINT PRINT Start frequency Bfr 9 PRINT Stop frequency Bfr 10 PRINT Source amplitude Bfr 13 STOP Get characters OUTPUT QAdrs DCH ENTER Adrs U FOR 1 1 TO 15 IF POS US 7 THEN Bfr USD POS vu US US POS US 1 ELSE Bfr US END IF NEXT I RETURN END Full scale FULL SCALE 2 5000 Phase reference PHASE REF 0 0deg Reference position REF POSN O 0deg Marker frequency MARKER 100 050 000 000Hz Marker amplitude MAG S21 646 58E 3 Marker phase PHASE S21 45 208deg Start frequency START 100 000 000Hz Stop frequency STOP 200 000 000 000Hz Source amplitude AMPTD 15 0dBm REMOTE OPERATION 3 23 REMOTE OPERATION DUMP PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION ID The HP 3577A responds with the
15. 401 linear frequency 51 101 201 401 CW frequency 1 Measure No of Steps per Sweep Logarithmic Amplitude Sweep 5 10 20 GO 100 200 400 Display Resolution Horizontal and vertical Rectangular 1600 points Polar 1200 points Capability Hemote programming is via the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP 1B for all 3577A front panel control functions ex cept the ac iine switch display intensity entry knob HP IB address and talk oniy on off The 35677A B S Parameter Test Sets are programmable through the 3577A interface only Interface Functions SH1 AH1 T5 TEB LA LEO SRT RLT PP1 DCT DT T C ET Output Data Transfer Time 401 data points single parameter can be transferred directly to an HP 200 series computer in Basic language as follows ASCII Mode Typically 1500 ms Binary Floating Point Mode Typically 160 ms Graphics Capabilities Alphanumeric Characters 12 lines of text with 40 characters per line can be displayed Character set includes alphanumerics special characters and line vectors Vector Display Trace lines can be drawn on the display between any two points with a resolution of 2048 points along the horizontal and vertical axes HP 1B is Hewlett Packard s implementation of IEEE Standard 488 1978 input RECEIVER t CHARACTERISTIC Characteristics CROSSTALK MAGNITUDE UNCERT AINTY Frequency Range 5 Hz to 200 MHz inputs Three receiver inputs A B and RJ input im
16. 5 10 Network Frequency Response Specifications apply when inputs are driven from a 50 Q source impedance Absolute fA B RI Frequency o error AAA 50 Q 1 MQ Input Input 20 Hz to 20MHz 3dBpp 5dBpp 5 Hz to 200 MHz 6 dB pp ao 5b Hz to 20 MHz 1 dB pp J S Frequency Hz Ratio A R B R A B 20 Hz to 20 MHz 5 Hz to 200 MHz A dB pp 4 dB pp 5 Hz to 20 MHz 1 BR Hl 3 e E ES SCH im d AI tiem wa ikt and Ry j HIER a re ET A iim uma EHE i 8 10 190 tk 1M 10M 100M Fraquency ir T TTT 02 an k S Hs METEO ll M ee NIR ged I Sas z V HAS d 4 BE INE fen Gap Hh rock or US E did n DE ER All d Had rH HUE QR TERM s tb 190 1k 3DK 100x 1M 20 Frequency Hz ee ger E z Anal yzer Dynamic Accuracy Specifications For unequai 50 Q input attenuation add 0 15 dB pp 20 Hz to 20 MHz 0 3 dB pp 5 Hz to 200 MHz For unequal 1 MQ input attenuation add 0 2 dB pp 20 Hz to 20 MHz 0 4 dB pp 5 Hz to 20 MHz Reference Level Range 207 dBm to 33 dBm 220 dBV to 20 dBV log absolute 400 dB to 400 dB log ratio O V to 10 V linear absolute O to 10 linear ratio Resolution 0 001 dB log 5 digits linear Stability Temperature Typically lt x 0 02 dB C Time Typically lt x 0 05 dB hour at 26 C Characteristics A R B R A B Range 180 de
17. A R and B R are the S parameters 11 21 12 and S22 When the USER DEFINED INPUT is ac tive the softkey label TEST SET FWD REV appears at the bottom of the menu er j i of the active trace to be identical to the other trace IN i PUT The softkey label is COPY INPUT 2 1 when j H i d f COPY Tre n m is a softkey used to define the INPUT DATA REGISTER is a softkey used to select a trace stored in a data register as the displayed trace Press ing this softkey changes the menu to a list of the four data registers D1 D4 Pressing one of these softkeys ac complishes the selection of that data register as the trace INPUT Be aware that the sweep parameters of the stored trace may be entirely different from those in effect now SCALE parameters are the only values that affect the trace when the INPUT is defined to be a data register USER DEFINED INPUT is a softkey used to create an equation to define a trace INPUT that is more com plicated than the common ones offered at the top of the menu The user may use 1 the three receiver inputs 2 three user defined complex constants 3 four data registers and 4 five user defined functions as terms in this equation To make a USER DEFINED INPUT 1 Press the INPUT hardkey to display the menu 2 Press the USER DEF INPUT softkey if label is not bright 3 Press the softkey corresponding to a math term 4 Press the softkey corresponding to a math
18. Aperture 16 of span Return INPUT Input R Input A input B Input A R Input BR Input Di input D2 input D3 input Lu Return User Defined input input S input Input S Input is Copy Input Test Set Forward lest Set Reverse SCALE Autoscale Reference Level entry Scale DIV entry Reference Position entry Reference Line Off Reference Line On Copy Scale Phase Slope entry Phase Slope Off HPHB code Phase Slope On c m Polar Full Scale entry Polar Phase Ref entry TR2 Smith Chart Off Smith Chart On TRI DSF DET MARKER DF6 Marker Position fentry DES Marker Off DEI Marker On DA Zero Marker DF Marker Offset Off DF1 Marker Offset On DFO Marker Offset entry DAP Marker Offset Freq entry AP1 Marker Offset Amp entry AP2 Marker Coupling Off AP3 Marker Coupling On AP4 Polar Mag Offset entry APS Polar Phase Offset entry APG Polar Real Offset entry RET Polar Imag Offset entry Polar Marker Units Re im INP gt Polar Marker Units Mg Ph INR l INA MARKER INB MKR Reference Level IAR MKR Start Frequency IBR MKR Stop Frequency ID1 MKR Center Frequency ID2 MKR Offset Span ID3 MKR Max TR MKR Min UDI MKR Target Value entry 11 MKR Right for Target 124 MKR Left for Target n2 Return 122 MKR Full Scale CPI MKR Polar Phase Ref I STORE DATA Store in register 1 SCH Store in register D2 ASL Store in register
19. B1 Data available BO Data transfer complete BYTE 2 B7 Power on B6 Source tripped B5 Reference unlocked B4 No external reference B3 Input A overload lt B2 Input B overload B1 Input R overload BO Input tripped BYTE 3 B7 Settling Bo Waiting for trigger TRG B5 Waiting for external trigger or line sync B4 Sweeping ean ks HB lesen B3 End of sweep has occurred B2 Not used B1 Not used BO Not used ASCIE STRING A 26 character string containing an error warning 3 20 I UE OA or general information screen message The error reporting mode selected will determine the level of message none error only warning and error or all that will appear here Refer to MASKING THE STATUS BYTE for more on error reporting modes and to Appendix D for a complete listing of these messages Bits 0 1 2 3 5 and 6 of byte two will cause error messages when they become set If the error bit is un masked and more than one of these conditions exist the first to occur will be the only message dumped If the error bit is masked DMS will dump the most recent message The following example program was run im mediately after having preset the HP 3577A and press ed a numeric key in the DATA ENTRY section Example 10 DIM AS 100 20 OUTPUT 711 DMS 30 ENTER 711 A 40 DISP Response to DMS command is A 50 END Response to DMS command is 16 0 16 ENTRY UNDEFINED Dumping status wil
20. CLEAR TRIP Press ing CLEAR TRIP resets closes the relay in the source output If the trip condition still exists the source trips again START AMPLITUDE is a softkey in the AMPTD menu when the SWEEP TYPE is AMPLITUDE SWEEP used to change the value of the sweep parameter START AMPLITUDE The default value for start amplitude is 40dBm The allowable range is the same as the range of the source output amplitude 49 dBm to 15 dBm The value of start amplitude may be larger than the stop amplitude Units used for data entry of new values for start and stop amplitude may be linear volts but the sweep is always logarithmic To view the menu shown in Figure 481 1 Press the SWEEP TYPE hardkey 2 Press the AMPTD SWEEP softkey 3 Press the AMPTD hardkey To change the value of START AMPLITUDE 1 Press the START AMPTD softkey if the label is not bright 2 Modify the value with the knob or arrow keys OR 2 Enter a new value with the numeric key pad 3 Select units from the menu press softkey STOP AMPLITUDE is a softkey label in the AMPTD menu when the SWEEP TYPE is AMPLITUDE SWEEP used to change the value of the sweep parameter STOP AMPLITUDE The default value for stop amplitude is 0 0 dBm if no test set is connected to the HP 35774 With a test set the default value is 4 15 dBm The allowable range is the same as that of the source out put amplitude 49 dBm to 15 dBm The value of stop amplitude value may
21. E INDONESIA BERCA indonesia P T P O Box 496 Jkt Jin Abdul Murs 62 JAKARTA Tel 373009 Telex 31146 BERSAL lA Cable BERSAL JAKARTA A C E M P BERCA indonesia P T P O Box 174 Sby JL Kutei No 11 SUBAEE SURABA YA Tei 68172 Telex 31146 BERSAL SD Cable BERSAL SURABAYA A EMP IRAQ Hewlett Packard Trading S A Mansoor City 98 3 7 BAGHDAD Tel 551 49 73 Telex 2455 HEPAIRAQ IK CP IRELAND Hewlett Packard Ireland Lid Kestrel House Clanwilliam Court Lower Mount Street DUBLIN 2 Fire Tel 580424 680426 Telex 30439 A C CME M F Cardiac Services Lid Kilmore Road Artane DUBLIN 5 Eire Tei 01 351820 Telex 30439 M ISRAEL Electronics Engineering Division Motorola Israel Ltd 16 Kremenetski Street DO Box 25016 TEL AVIV 67899 Tet 338973 Telex 33569 Moti 8 Cable BASTEL Zei Aviv ACM C EMP ITALY Hewlett Packard italiana S p A Traversa 99 Giulio Petrone 19 i 70124 BARI Tek 080 41 07 44 M Hewtelt Packard Haliana S p A Via Marlin Luther King 38 111 I 40132 BOLOGNA Tel 051 402394 Telex 511630 CM CS E MS Hewlett Packard Italiana S p A Via Principe Nicola 43G C 95126 CATANIA Tel 095 37 10 87 Telex 970291 CP Hewlett Packard italiana S p A Via G Di Vittorio 9 20063 CERNUSCO SUL NAVLIGLIO Tet 2 903691 Telex 334632 A CM CP E MPP Hewlett Packard italiana S p A NM Na Nuova san Rocco Capodimonte 62 A 80131
22. FOR 1 1 TO 4 CALL Add cmnd Text D Es NUM Message 1st character wi Es asserted define the start of characters FOR 1 2 TO LEN Message CALL Add cmnd Text I NUM Message fJ NEXT NEXT I IF Array indx gt 1 THEN CALL Transfer cmnd transfer if necessary Array indx 1 reinitialize buffer Cmnd array 0 100 use address 100 for this buffer CALL Add cmnd 1500 Plotx define starting position for CALL Add cmnd 1500 Movey loop CALL Add cmnd Text 5 Es 1 character 1 is HP logo OUTPUT Adrs ENG 1 OUTPUT Adrs USING W Cmnd array END The following steps will update the two commands which define the starting location of the HP logo It demonstrates changing selected commands on the fly LOOP Cmnd__array 1 INT 1500 RND Plotx Update new starting Cmnd__array 2 INT 1900 RND Movey position for logo OUTPUT Adrs ENG 41 Update new x y 3 29 REMOTE OPERATION OUTPUT Adrs USING 4 W W W Cmnd array 0 Cmnd array 1 COM INTEGER Cmnd array Array indx X Array length Adrs Send ENG and fl ump Clear out Cmnd__array Redefine display memory address for next transfer a nm 2320 Cmnd__arrayQ END 2330 WAIT 1 2340 END LOOP 2350 2360 STOP 2370 2380 END 2390 i 2400 The following subroutine adds 1345A Display commands to 2410 Cmnd array until it contains 20 Array
23. Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey used to move the marker to the point on the trace that has the largest value Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey used to move the OFFSET MARKER change the values of its position parameters to the same position as the regular marker Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey used to move the marker to the point on the trace that has the smallest value The magnitude information in the MARKER Block for trace two is now indicating the measured passband ripple for this filter REF LEVEL 0 000dB 8 000d amp m CENTER MA CENTER 70 00 000 000H2 BPAN 7 325 000 z SEARCH PASSBAND INSERTION PHASE The next measurement will be phase in the passband To do this the SWEEP TYPE will be returned to LINEAR the default type so that the frequency span of trace two is the same as that of trace one KEY DESCRIPTION DIV OFFSET 18 280 000Hzx BKA e 40 000d8 MAG UDF 4 82808 REF LVL 0 100d8 OFFSET 4 876 128Hz2 KKA START MKA gt STOP MKA CENTER MKA OF ST SPAN MRR gt HAX HKR MIN SPAM 100 RKER Hardkey in the SOURCE section BANDPASS FILTER MAKING MEASUREMENTS LIN FRQ Softkey used to select linear frequency sweep SWEEP Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey used to copy the INPUT definition for trace one into trace two This normalizes trace two Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey used to
24. Modern Electronic Establishment PO Box 1228 Baghdadiah Street JEDDAH Tel 27 798 Telex 401035 Cable ELECTA JEDDAH CEMP Modern Electronic Establishment DO Box 2728 RIYADH Tel 62 596 66 232 Telex 202049 CEMP SCOTLAND Hewlett Packard Ltd Royal Bank Buildings Swan Streel BRECHIN Angus Scotland Tek 3101 3102 EMOS Hewlett Packard Ltd SOUTH QUEENSFERRY West Lothian EH30 STG GB Scotiand Tel 631 3311000 Telex 72682 ACM EM SINGAPORE Hewlet Packard Singapore IPty j Ltd DO Box 58 Alexandra Pos Office SINGAPORE 9115 6th Floor inchcape House 450 452 Alexandra Road SINGAPORE 05 1 1 Tet 631788 Telex HPSGSO RS 34209 Cable HEWPACK Singapore A CP E MS P SOUTH AFRICA Hewlelt Packard South Africa Ply Lid PO Box 120 Howard Place Pine Park Center Forest Drive Pinelands CAPE PROVINCE 7450 Tel 53 7955 53 7956 53 7957 Telex 57 0006 A CM CS E MS P Hewlett Packard South Africa Pty Ltd HO Box 37066 Overport DURBAN 4067 Tei 28 4178 28 4179 28 4110 CM CS Hewlett Packard South Africa Pty Ltd PO Box 33345 Glenstantia 0010 TRANSVAAL 1s Floor East Constantia Park Ridge Shopping Centre Constantia Park PRETORIA Tel 98 1126 or 98 1220 Telex 32163 GE Hewlett Packard Soulh Africa Pty Ltd Daphny Stree Private Bag Wendywood SANDTON 2144 Tel 802 5111 802 5125 Telex 89 84782 Cable HEWPACK Johannesburg CM CP E MS P SPAIN
25. OUTPUT QNa RS2 Reduced sweep res improves speed HP 3577A will change its delay aperature to 2 of span and beep Set up the freq definition for a 10 7 MHz bandpass filter OUTPUT QNa FRC 10 7 MHZ FRS 45 KHZ STM 0 1 SEC OUTPUT QNa TKM ASL Sweep and autoscale for onlookers REPEAT Wait for end of measurement Stat SPOLL 711 UNTIL BINAND Stat Ready bit OUTPUT QNa TKM Starttime TIMEDATE PRINT Initialization time INT CFIMEDATE Startuptime 1000 msec LOOP REPEAT Wait for end of measurement Stat SPOLL 711 UNTIL BINAND Stat Ready bit Swptime TIMEDATE Now the data is taken and a new filter may be selected for testing This selection may occur while this data is being dumped l F Dump trace THEN Dump the entire trace Assume that the program processes the data during the Donemkr interval that currently displays how long this took OUTPUT QNa DT1 TKM dump trace amp take new meas ENTER Na USING 96 2A unk Gets the JI ENTER ha nofmt Trace Gets the trace data The Take Measurement command in line 720 is executed as soon as the Dump Trace is complete when the computer has entered it i e now ELSE Send the commands to dump data at 5 marker postions Then enter them one at a time i OUTPUT QNa MKP 23 DM1 MKP 33 DM1 MKP 50 DMT MKP 67 DMT MKP 77 DMT TKM 850 860 870 880 890 900 ENTER QNa Mkr 1
26. SWITZERLAND Hewlett Packard S A 7 Rue du Bois du Lan CH 12 47 MEYRIN 2 Switzertand Tel 022 83 81 11 Telex 27835 hpse Cable HEWPACKSA Geneve EAST EUROPEAN AREAS NOT LISTED CONTACT AUSTRIA Hewlett Packard Ges m b h Wehlstasse 29 PO Box 7 A 1205 VIENNA Tet 222 25 16 2 10 Telex 1256237135066 MEDITERRANEAN AND MIDDLE EAST AREAS NOT LISTED CONTACT GREECE Hewiett Packard S A Mediterranean amp Middle East Operations 35 Kolokoveni Street Platia Kefaliariou GR Kilissia ATHENS Greece Tel 868 0359 808 0429 Telex 21 6588 Cabie HEWPACKSA Athens INTERNATIONAL AREAS NOT LISTED CONTACT OTHER AREAS Hewlett Packard Co intercontinental Headquarters 3495 Deer Creek Road PALO ALTO CA 94304 Tel 415 837 1501 Telex 034 8300 Cable HEWPACK 4 20 81
27. be easier to align this using a dot on the screen press INSTR PRESET and use one of the decimal points in the alphanumerics HP IB CONNECTIONS The HP 3577A Network Analyzer is designed for use with the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP IB NOTE The HP IB is Hewlett Packard s implementa tion of IEEE standard 448 1978 Standard g Digital interface for programmable E Instrumentation The HP 3577A is connected to the HP IB by connecting an HP IB interface cable to the HP IB connector on the rear panel Figure 5e4illustrates a typical HP IB system interconnection HP IB PIGGYBACK CONNECTORS Figure 5e4 A typical HP IB system Interconnection 5 6 With the HP IB system up to 15 HP IB compatible in struments can be interconnected The HP 10833 HP 1B cables have identical piggy back connectors on each end so that several cables can be connected to a single source without special adapters or switch boxes System components and devices can be connected in virtually any configuration as long as a path exists between each device and the controller As a practical matter avoid stacking more than three or four cables on any one con nector If the stack gets too long force on the stack can produce sufficient leverage to damage the connec tor mounting Be sure that each connector is firmly screwed in place to keep it from working loose during use The HP 3577A uses all the available HP IB lines therefore damage to any c
28. fasten the HP 3577 A s Rack Mount Flanges to the front of the instrument rack To rack mount with slides the following items are required Quantity Description to avoid person Front Panel Connections 4 Figure 5 3 Front panel cable installation The HP 3577A may be rack mounted in either of two ways with or without slides Both mountings may be utilized for maximum strength and safety To rack mount without slides a Remove the pastic trim and front handles if so equipped b Remove the plastic feet from the bottom of the HP 3577A c Install the flange kit with or without handles ac cording to instructions included with the kit Rack Flange Kit no handles Option 908 HP P N 5061 0079 Rack Flange amp Front Handle Kit Option 909 HP PN 5061 0085 d install an Instrument Support Rail on each side of the instrument rack The Instrument Support Rails used to support the weight of the instru ment are included with HP rack mount cabinets 1 The weight of the HP 3577A must be sup ported by Instrument Support Rails inside the instrument rack Do not under any cir cumstances attempt to rack mount the HP 3577A using only the front flanges 2 The HP 35774 is heavy approximately 62 Ibs 28 kg Use extreme care when lifting it 1 Rack Flange Kit Option 908 HP 5061 0079 OR Rack Flange amp Handle Kit Option 909 HP 5061 0085 1 Heavy Duty Slide Kit HP Part Number 149
29. litudes for each trace Each of the four resolution bandwidths has a settling time associated with it Settling time is the time the source stays at the start frequency or amplitude before beginning a sweep The following table lists the default values of settling time Values other than these may be entered only through the use of the HP IB and a com puter controller For more information on entering new values for settling time refer to the section on remote operation Res BW Settling time 1 kHz 22 ms 100 Hz 55 ms 10 Hz 370 ms 1 Hz 3 707 s Figure 4640 The HP 35677A B is an S parameter test set built for use with the HP 3577A Network Analyzer The A model has 50 Q ports and the B model has 75 Q ports Frequency response for the test set is from 100 kHz to 200 MHz For complete specifications see the General Informa tion section 4 26 S PARAMETER TEST SET The test set has no internal power supply or HP IB in terface it is powered and controlled by the HP 35774 The two are connected together by an interconnection cable between the two instruments rear panels and by four RF cables between the front panels The rear panel cable supplies power and ground control of the test set s coaxial switch and a sense line to indicate when the test set is connected to the analyzer this changes the INPUT menu When the HP 35677A B S parameter test set is con nected to the HP 3577A Network Analyzer the INPUT menu consi
30. 1 second if the SWEEP TYPE is changed to AMPTD SWEEP the default TIME STEP is 0 050 seconds and the total sweep time depends upon the STEPS SWEEP found in the AMPTD menu If the SWEEP MODE is changed to MANUAL the default SAMPLE TIME is 0 050 seconds In a frequency sweep the sweep dot appears if the sweep time is 1 second or more In an amplitude sweep the sweep dot appears if the time step is 0 010 seconds or more When the sweep type is ALTERNATE SWEEP different sweep times may be selected for each of two traces For more informa tion see ALTERNATE SWEEP listed under SWEEP TYPE When the sweep type is LOG SWEEP the sweep time may appear to be greater than the value entered for sweep time due to overhead time The device under test is swept at an effective rate equal to the value of sweep time To change the value of SWEEP TIME 1 Press the SWEEP TIME hardkey 2 Modify the value with the knob or the arrow keys OR 2 Enter a new value with the numeric keypad 3 Select units from the menu press a softkey Sweep time may be limited by the math processing load When this occurs the screen message SWEEP TIME INCREASED appears and the sweep time increases automatically Refer to Appendix A for more informa tion on HP 3577A data processing and sweep time Optimization 4 33 REFERENCE imer EEP TYPE LIN FREG SWEEP ALTEANTE SWEEP LOG FREG SWEEP AMPTD SWEEP CN SWP DIR UP DOWN F
31. 48 Hz to 440 Hz 230V 195V to 253V at 48 Hz to 66 Hz To avoid serious injury be sure that the ac power cord is disconnected before removing or installing the ac line fuse 2 Verify that the proper line fuse is installed in the rear panel FUSE holder Voltage Selector Fuse Type HP Part No 115V 7A 250V Normal Blo 2110 0614 230V 4A 250V Normal Blo 2110 0055 1 1 GETTING STARTED RNING To protect operating personnel the 3577A chassis and cabinet must be grounded The HP 3577A is equipped with a three wire power cord which when plugged into an appropriate receptacle grounds the in strument To preserve this protection feature the power plug should only be inserted in a three terminal receptacle having a protective earth ground contact The protective action must not be negated by the use of an extension cord or adapter that does not have the required earth ground connection Grounding one conductor of a two conductor outlet is not sufficient protection Ensure that all devices connected to the HP 3577A are also connected to the protective earth ground B Set the front panel power switch to the OFF position C Connect the ac power cord to the rear panel LINE connector Plug the other end of the power cord into a three terminal grounded power outlet D Turn on the power to the instrument by pressing the LINE switch on the front panel to the ON position Verify that all front panel LED s illuminate simultaneously s
32. 8 characters or less a single line key label will appear centered on the key If the text is 9 to 16 characters the text will be divided into 2 lines with 8 characters on the first line and the re mainder on the second line the 2 lines will be centered on the key A carriage return character is not acceptable and will be translated to a left arrow Double quote marks may be included as characters by sending a pair of double quotes to the HP 35774 Note that the computer may require four quote marks be entered to get two in its pro gram line resulting in one on the HP 35774 screen eg Closing quote mark delim gt This delimiter may be the characters CR LF space or the act of pulling lt EOI gt on the handshake of the last byte transferred Whenever the instrument returns to LOCAL mode and the front panel is enabled the user defined menu will be overwritten with the present system definition of the softkeys For an example program using ENM refer to ENTER ANNOTATION Additional functions to control the menu display memory Menu off MNO Menu on MN Menu clear MNC 3 25 REMOTE OPERATION ENTER ANNOTATION ENA This command allows the 1 12 The display line number on which the user to provide text strings and to specify on which of twelve lines it will appear These lines are located in annotation is to be displayed lf the first character is not numeric line 1 the graticule area four near the
33. Aliowable LO Feedthrough lt 33 dB below maximum input level AC Line and Fan Related Spurious Signals 100 dBm below 1 kHz input frequency GENERAL INFORMATION Electrical Length Reference Plane Extension Provides equivalent electrical line length or delay at inputs A B and R Range 3x 10 m to 4 3x 10 m or 1 sto 1s Resolution 5 digits or 0 1 cm 3 3 ps whichever is greater Accuracy Q0 cm or 10 02 whichever is greater Characteristics Range Maximum Input Level to Sensitivity Resolution Marker 0 001 dB tlogl 5 digits linear Display 0 01 dB div to 20 dB div log absolute 0 01 dB div to 200 dB div log ratio 0 1 nV div to 10 V div linear absolute 10 div to 10 div linear ratio Display Units dB dBm dBV V and linear ratio Accuracy at 100 kHz 25 C and Max imum input Level Absolute A B R 10 2 dB Ratio A R B R A B 0 15 dB 50 Q 0 2 dB 1 MQ Accuracy and frequency response errors and effects of different input attenuation can be calibrated out with normalization Dynamic Accuracy Input Level Relative to Maximum Allowable O dB to 10 dB to 50 dB to 60 dB to 80 d8 to de aie Mx 14 Ky ertha ondwidts UNCERTAINTY E Li G 26 40 0 36 190 Input Level in dB Relative to Maximum Aliowabie Fr UNCERTAINTY 80 B0 186 Input Lavet in dB Relativa to Maximum Allowable GENERAL INFORMATION
34. BW 1 kHz 22 ms Res BW 100 Hz 55 ms Res BW 10 Hz 370 ms Res BW 1 Hz 3 707 To enter a new value for the settling time parameter select the resolution bandwidth before entering the new settling time Settling time values may range from one millisecond to 16 383 seconds For zero settling time turn settling time off SEO The current value of the set if bus diagnostics mode one is used as follows Example OUTPUT 711 BW3 BD1 STE 3 SEC DUMP LOAD REGISTER The receiver input registers R A and B and the storage registers D1 D2 D3 and D4 contain twice as many numbers as there are points in the active sweep resolution Each point on the trace is derived from a register bin containing a complex number represented by two real numbers In the default sweep resolution of 401 points per sweep there will be 401 complex numbers The HP 35774 will dump 401 real and 401 imaginary numbers in the form real bin one imaginary bin one real bin two imaginary bin two The same methods apply for the number of steps sweep resolution used in amplitude sweeps Register 1 O may use any of the three data formats FM FM2 or FM3 The example that follows shows how register data may be dumped to the computer controlier formats array of 401x4 elements Na Network Analyzer Example 10 20 Dump and Load Registers using all 3 data transfer formats 30 40 REAL Real_array1 0 801 Real__array2 0 101 50 INTEGER In
35. CM CP E MP Hewlett Packard Co 205 Bitly Mitchell Road SAN ANTONIO TX 78226 Tel 512 434 8241 OM CS E MS Utah Hewiett Packard Co 3530 W 2100 South Street SALT LAKE CITY UT 84119 Tek 801 974 1706 ACM CP E MS Virginia Hewlett Packard Co P C Box 9669 2914 Hungary Spring Road RICHMOND VA 23228 Tel 804 285 3431 A CM CP EMS Hewler Packard Co PO Box 4756 3110 Peters Creek Road NW ROANOKE VA 24015 Ter 703 564 2205 CM CS E Hewlett Packard Co PO Box 12775 5700 Thurston Avenue Suite 111 VIRGINIA BEACH V 23455 Tet 804 460 247 4 CMCS MS Washington Hewlett Packard Co 15815 SE 37ih Street BELLEVUE WA 98006 Tel 206 643 4006 ACM CP E MP Hewlett Packard Co Suite A 708 North Argonne Road SPOKANE WA 539206 Tet 1509 922 7600 CM CS West Virginia Hewlett Packard Co 4604 MacCorkle Ave SE CHARLESTON WV 25304 Tel 364 925 0492 A CMMS Wisconsin Hewiett Packard Co 150 S Sunny Slope Road BROOKFIELD Wi 53005 Tei 414 784 8800 ACM CSE MP URUGUAY Pablo Ferrando S AC el Avenida Hala 2877 Casilla de Correo 370 MONTEVIDEO Tel 403 102 Telex 901 Public Booth Para Pablo Ferrando 919520 Cable RADIUM Montevideo ACME M Guillermo Kraft del Uruguay S A Avda Libertador Brig Gral Lavilleaa 2083 MONTEVIDEO Fel 234588 234808 208830 Telex 6245 ACTOUR UY p U S S R Hewlett Packard Co Representative Office Pokrov
36. D3 REF Store in register D4 DIV Store and Display RPS User defined store R10 Store to D1 RU Store to D2 CPS Store to D3 Store to D4 Use not required The only function of this code is to display a menu Of bus diagnostics are on APPENDIX D PSL PSO PS PFS PPR GTO Gh MKR MKP MRO MRI ZMK MOO MO1 MKO MOF MOA COO cot PMO PPO PRO PIO MRI MMP MKG MTR MTA MTB MTC MOS MTX MIN MSM MTV MRT MET RET MTP MPF STO SD1 D2 D3 SD4 STD UDS TD1 1D2 TD3 UK APPENDIX D MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION CAL SOURCE Normalize NRM PEN Normalize Short NRS f Calibrate Partial CPR Function HPB code Calibrate Full CFL DX PLN Continue Calibration CGO SWEEP TYPE STY Linear Sweep ST1 DEFINE MATH DEN Alternate Sweep 12 Constant K1 Real KR1 Log Sweep ST3 Constant K1 Imaginary Kit Amplitude Sweep ST4 Constant K2 Real KR2 CW ST5 Constant K2 imaginary KI2 Sweep Direction Up SUP Constant K3 Real KR3 Sweep Direction Down SDN Constant K3 Imaginary SU Define Function DFC SWEEP MODE SMD Function F1 UF1 Continuaus SM1 SR ne So sma Function F4 UF4 Manual Sweep SM3 Function F5 UES Manual Frequency entry MER Math term for input R R Manual Amplitude entry MAM Math term for input A A Arab deser E EE MIM Math term for input B B Math term for storage reg D SWEEP TIME STM Math term for constant K Sweep Time entry SWT Math term for function F Step Ti Inte SMT Math bracket x di du
37. DIB D9 D8 OF D6 DS D4 03 D2 Dt Dg COMMAND COMMAND MODIFIERS 1345A COMMANDS Set Condition Plot Command Graph Command Text Command e mm Set Condition Command Set Condition Command MSB D14 DI3 DI2 011 Dig D9 08 D 06 05 D4 O3 D2 Dt D emgeet ANEN i tik KS di uo X We OW X X X Note Bi 6 D6 must be zero Command Rodiflers a To Set Line Intensity Dm aif Brightness Ful Brightness fs g Di 1 1 b To Set Line Type Li Intensity Blank i Solid Line intensitied End Points on Solid Line Long Dashes g 1 1 Short Dashes c To Set Writing Speed Wi Speed 5 05 in per ys 2 10 in per us 015 in per ys 9 20 in per us Plot Command Plot Command MSB LSB 014 D13 D Dit DIS 09 D8 D7 D D O4 D3 02 D oe e M o A MM MEME HR g g XY PC De De Ds Dr Oe Ds Ds D De D De Ie DAT A M d Command Modifiers a XY information D123 8 1 X coordinate 8 2047 specified by De Dis Y coordinate 08 2047 specified by De Dra b PC Beam Control intormation D11 6 Beam OFF move Beam ON draw Programming Command Ranges PROGHAMMING COMMAND RANGES OF THE 13454 amieta ru 13454 Command Octal Range Hexadecimal Range a Piot X 20000 07777 0000 OFFF Y beam off 10000 13777 1000 17FF Y beam on 14000 17777 1806 1FFF b Graph Set Deita
38. Data entry Softkey used to select units for the data entry BANDPASS FILTER MAKING MEASUREMENTS PER Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section used to display a menu MEASR Ee kd listing the 3577A calibration features USER Replace the Device Under Test with a BNC barrel BNC f to BNC f ACTION adapter and wait for a complete sweep this softkey stores the active trace in a data register D1 for trace one and D2 for trace two and then redefines the INPUT to be the previous INPUT definition divided by the data register that was just used Now the INPUT for trace one is B R D1 press the INPUT hardkey to see it in the ENTRY BLOCK See Figure 2 16 Softkey command used to normalize the measurement When pressed NORMLIZE USER Replace the BNC barrel with the bandpass filter ACTION Figure 2 16 Normalized AGF LEVEL DIV MARKER 88 885 500 000Hz Bandpass Fliter 0 000dB 10 000d8 MAS UDE 5 985508 To EE Response NORMI ZE SHORT UDF B R D1 ONE PORT PART CAL ONE PORT FULL CAL od Mu CENTER 70 000 0900 000HMz SPAN 100 O00 000H AMPTS 0 09g 8m Now the set up is complete and measurements can be taken Most measurements are taken using the MARKER This small circle may be moved along the trace in a number of ways some of which will be demonstrated in the following steps 2 17 MAKING MEASUREMENTS 2 18 BANDPASS FILTER BANDWIDTH MEASUREMENTS KEY ZERO MARKER MARKER OFFSET Figu
39. ENTER QNa Mkr 2 ENTER QNa Mkr 3 ENTER Na Mkr 4 ENTER Na Mkr 5 END IF REMOTE OPERATION 910 Donemkr A 920 Stoptime TIMEDATE M 930 Time to sweep INT Swptime Starttime 1000 B 940 Time to dump INT Stoptime Swptime 1000 950 Time total INT Stoptime Starttime 1000 960 DISP PASS Pass SWEEP TIME Time To sweep msec Dump Time To dump msec TOTAL Time total msec 970 Pass Pass 1 980 Starttime Stoptime 990 END LOOP 995 END 3 37 3 38 wn P REFERENCE This section of the manual is an alphabetical listing of the hardkeys and their menus the front panel sections and some of the terms used throughout this manual It is assumed that the operator is an experienced user and is referring to this section for details A START AMPTO BTOP AMPTD STEPS SWEEP SWEEP AMPTD SWEEP m AMPTD TYPE SWEEP TYPE SWEEP Figure 4 1 AMPLITUDE is a hardkey in the SOURCE section of the front panel used to display either menu of softkey labels shown above These softkeys may be used to change the signal level of the source output The HP 3577A source amplitude range is 49 dBm to 15 dBm in 1 dBm steps the default value at power on is 10 dBm without a test set and 15 dBm with a test set AMPLITUDE is also a softkey in the AMPLITUDE menu used to change the value of source AMPLITUDE After power turn on or INSTRUMENT PRESET t
40. HP 11170A Qty 1 BNC tee Tim HP 1250 0781 Qty 1 BNC f to BNC f adapter HP 1250 0080 Qty 1 2 foot BNC cable HP 11170B HP 1250 0781 ANC T HP 11170 A 4 FOOT BNE CABLES LENGTH NOT IMPORTANT Figure Zei Circuit Configuratlon This measurement exercise is designed to show 1 How to set up the instrument state to make a measurement 2 How to use the markers to make measurements 3 How to STORE trace data 4 How to SAVE an instrument state dta entries require t ps press a hardkey to display a menu press a softkey if not already e or i bright to Deen the parameter for data entry enter data with the numeric key pad and press a softkey to select units If the knob or arrow keys are used unit selection is not necessary since existing values are modified units do not change Any of the three receiver inputs may be used for this example If the operator wishes to use an input other than R the default INPUT definition connection should be made to that input and the corresponding selection should be made in the INPUT menu Note that receiver input refers to front panel connections R A and B while INPUT capitalized refers to the definition of the screen trace under the INPUT hardkey This measurement set up begins after INSTRUMENT PRESET by defining INPUT DISPLAY FUNC TION FREQUENCY and AMPLITUDE 2 3 MAKING MEASUREMENTS TUNED STUB NOTCH FILTER MEASUREMENT SET UP KEY DESCRIPTIO
41. HP 3577A Network Analyzer and HP 35677A B S Parameter Test Set are demonstrated For details on operating features see the REFERENCE section A Soft key Index is on page 4 38 The listing of the hardkeys in the REFERENCE section is alphabetical 2 1 MAKING MEASUREMENTS 2 2 As you read this section press the keys on the HP 35774 listed at the left of each page Even if nothing is connected to be tested references to menus and data entry exercises will help you learn to operate the HP 3577A Network Analyzer It is important to start each topic at the beginning i e at INSTRUMENT PRESET Use the foldout pictorial for locating hardkeys This page may be wrapped around the back of the manual so that it lays to the right face up while the rest of the manuai is read Note that most hardkeys are used only to display a menu of softkey labels If a mistake is made in data entry or feature selection for data entry such as forgetting to select CENTER FREQ before beginning to enter it pressing the hardkey again will display the original menu SOME EE r At Ge A MN TUNED STUB NOTCH FILTER MAKING MEASUREMENTS STUB NOTCH TETEN Connect the cables and adapters as shown in Figure 281 This configuration should result in a notch filter whose center frequency is related to the length of the open ended cable The notch filter is constructed from the following parts Qty 2 N m to BNC f adapters HP 1250 0780 Qty 2 1 foot BNC cable
42. If MARKER COUPLING is turned OFF turn ing the knob moves only the marker on the active trace When the DISPLAY FUNCTION is POLAR only one trace is active so there is only one active marker This marker has three values associated with it frequency magnitude and phase or frequency real and im aginary With the POLAR DISPLAY FUNCTION the MKR menu appears as shown in Figure 4e23B The following discussion of softkey features assumes that the active display function is POLAR The top four soft key labels operate in the POLAR DISPLAY FUNCTION the same as they do in a rectangular display function MAGNITUDE OFFSET is a softkey used to enter or modify the value of magnitude for the offset marker The default value of magnitude offset is 0 0 V without a test set and 0 0 units with a test set Pressing the ZERO MARKER softkey resets this value to the current mag nitude value of the regular marker This softkey label changes to read REAL OFFSET when the selected units are changed with the MARKER M P R I softkey To change the value of this parameter 1 Press DSPLY FCTN hardkey to display a menu 2 Press the POLAR softkey if label is not bright 3 Press the MKR hardkey to display a menu 4 16 4 Press the MAG OFFSET softkey if label is not bright 5 Modify the value with the knob or the arrow keys OR 5 Enter a new value for MAG OFFSET with the numeric key pad 6 Select units from menu press a softkey PHASE OFFSET is a
43. LAUDERDALE FL 33309 Tel 305 973 2600 CM CP E MP Hewlett Packard Co 4080 Woodcock Drive 132 Brownet Building JACKSONVILLE Fi 32207 Tei 804 398 0663 CAL EMS Hewiett Packard Co P O Box 13910 6177 Lake Edenor Brive ORLANDO Fi 32800 Tek 305 859 2900 CM CPE MS Hewlett Packard Co 5425 N Pensacola Bivd Suite 4 Building PENSACOLA FL 32575 Tel 864 476 8422 ACM MS Hewlett Packard Co 116 South Hoover Suite 120 Vanguard Bldg TAMPA FL 33609 Tet 813 872 0990 A CM CS E Mi Georgia Hewlett Packard Co PO Box 165605 2000 South Park Place ATLANTA GA 30339 Tel 404 955 1500 Telex 810 766 4890 A CM CP EMP Hewlett Packard Co Executive Park Suite 306 PO Box 816 AUGUSTA GA 30907 Tet 404 736 0592 CMMS Hewlet Packard Co P O Box 2103 1172 N Davis Drive WARNER ROBINS GA 31098 Tel 912 922 0449 CM E Haw ail Hewlett Packard Co Kawaiahao Plaza Suite 190 567 South King Street HONOLULU HI 96813 Tel 808 526 555 AOM CS EMS idaho Hewlett Packard Co 11311 Chinden Boulevard BOISE ID 83707 Tel 208 376 6000 CM CS M IHinois Hewlett Packard Co 211 Prospect Road BLOOMINGTON iL 61701 Tet 309 663 0383 CMCS MS Hewiett Packard Co 1100 31st Streel DOWNERS GROVE IL 80515 ie Jet 312 960 5760 CMP Hewlett Packard Co 5201 Tofview Drive ROLLING MEADOWS H 60008 Tel 312 255 9800 A CM CP E MP Indians Hewietl Packard Co P
44. MARKER so that accidental rota tion of the knob does not modify whatever entry cur rently appears in the menu Also note that when MARKER POSITION in the MKR menu is bright the knob moves the marker in either MARKER or ENTRY mode the entry would be MARKER POSITION The INCREMENT DECREMENT keys are used to incre ment up arrow or decrement Gown arrow data for the selected bright softkey if it is an item that allows data entry you can increment a sweep time but not a sweep type The message ENTRY UNDEFINED appears if you try to modify a softkey for which data entry is not appropriate If held down for more than 1 second the up down keys auto repeat The amount of change is de termined by the step size of the parameter to be modi fied and may be a data entry itself Refer to the par ticular parameter in this section for more information on its STEP SIZE DATA REGISTER EDISELAY FORMAT ur Figure 4 6 There are four registers used to STORE trace DATA They are called D1 D2 D3 and D4 Stored data is in the same form complex created by the receivers and stored in trace memory Therefore any data register information may be recreated in any of the DISPLAY FUNCTION formats LOG MAG PHASE GROUP DELAY etc Refer to Appendix A for more informa tion on DATA PROCESSING AND STRUCTURE DEFINE MAT REFERENCE The data stored in any of the data registers may be dis played by specifying the data register
45. O Box 50807 7303 No Shadeland Avenue INDIANAPOLIS IN 46250 Tet 317 842 1000 A CM CS E MS lowa Hewiett Packard Co 2415 Heinz Road IOWA CITY 1A 52240 Tek 319 351 1020 CM CS E MS SALES Arranged alphabetically by country Kansas Hewlett Packard Co 1644 S Rock WICHITA KA 67207 Tet 316 265 5200 UMCS Kentucky Hewleti Packard Co 16 176 Linn Station Road Suite 525 LOUISVILLE KY 40223 Tek 502 426 0100 A CM CS MS Louisiana Hewlett Packard Co P O Box 1449 3229 Williams Boulevard KENNER LA 70062 Tel 504 443 6201 AOM COSEMS Maryland Hewlett Packard Co 7121 Standard Drive HANOVER MD 21076 Tel 301 796 7700 ACM CP EMS Hewiett Packard Co 2 Choke Cherry Road ROCKVILLE MD 20850 Tet 301 948 6370 Telex 7 10 828 9685 A CM CP EMP Massachusotis Hewlett Packard Co 32 Harlwall Avenue LEXINGTON MA 92173 Tel 6 17 861 8960 A CM CP E MP Michigan Hewleti Packard Co 23855 Research Drive FARRINGTON HILLS MI 48024 Tel 313 476 5400 ACM CP EMP Hewlett Packard Co 4326 Cascade Road S E GRANO RAPIDS MI 49506 Tei 616 957 1970 OM CS MS Minnesota Hewlett Packard Co 2025 W Larpenteur Ave ST PAUL MN 55113 Tet 612 644 1100 A CM CP E MP Mississippi Hewiet Packard Co P O Box 5028 322 N Man Plaza JACKSON MS 39216 Tet 1601 982 9363 CM MS Missouri Hewlett Packard Co 11131 Colorado Avenue KANSAS CITY MO 64137 Tel 816 763 8000 Telex 9
46. REE KARE REP deck Ko dece Ao Ae ose EEE MERA KARE E e deco dec KEK KEKE RR ERRA RAR RRR ER FM3 32 bit floating point binary used by the HP 3577A internal processor There are 4 bytes per real number data format 3 Next take a measurement and dump trace 1 OUTPUT QNa RSA TKM FMXiDTT Enter the ZI as before then the data ENTER Na USING 2A Junk ENTER Na USING 96 W 5Integer array f integer array now contains 401 real numbers from trace one each real number 32 bits filling a pair of Series 200 Integers 16 bits END DUMP MARKER DM1 amp DM2 Except for the polar display function this is Y axis information for one bin The units will match those of the trace dumps shown in the table on Page 3 20 if the display function is two numbers will be output when a marker is dumped These two numbers will be real and imaginary or Example Non polar display function ad 10 OUTPUT 71T IPR TKMG FMT DMT 20 ENTER 711 Marker amp 30 DISP Magnitude Marker amp AQ END Example Polar display function 10 OUTPUT 71TT IPR DFA TEAMEAM DM 20 ENTER 711 Marker amp Marker phase 30 DISP Magnitude Marker amp 40 DISP Phase Marker phase 50 END REMOTE OPERATION magnitude and phase respectively depending on units selected for the marker Any of the three data formats FM1 FM2 or FM3 may be used The example that follows shows how a marker may be dumped
47. S HKA DEST MKR OF ST OFFSET i SPAN SPAN MKR e MKF e MAX REF MKA MKA MIN MAX MARKER SEARCH be calculated by measuring the change in phase be tween 90 and 110 Hz Therefore no data is calculated for the endpoints of the trace If you had specified a start frequency of 90 Hz 100 Hz would be the first point with group delay data This results in a trace that does not extend to the edges of the screen more noticeable as the delay aperture is made larger The unit of measure for group delay is time The readings are in seconds or fractions of seconds from 0 01 ns to 1000 0 seconds Larger apertures yield finer resolution of units because ze group delay Ad with fixed phase resolution divided by Af The larger the aperture Af the smaller rg is When the display function is group delay or any phase dependent function the scale menu includes PHASE SLOPE Initially this feature is on and the default value is O deg span DELAY APERTURE is a softkey label that is created in the DISPLAY FUNCTION menu when DELAY is select ed Delay aperture is the frequency span over which the HP 35774 evaluates phase and calculate group delay This frequency span is in percent of span the selections include 596 196 296 496 896 and 1696 The selected aperture appears below the lower right corner of the graticule in Hertz when the active trace is group delay See Figure 4811 To find and or modify DELAY APERTURE press DSP
48. STOP 50 000 000 000Hz AMPTD 14 0d Now the measurement set up is complete Next we begin to take measurements 2 6 TUNED STUB NOTCH FILTER MAKING MEASUREMENTS MAKING MEASUREMENTS _ KEY DESCRIPTION The knob in the DATA ENTRY section should be in the MARKER mode indicated by the LEDs above the knob and changed to modify data in the ENTRY mode with the key next to the LEDs Turn the knob and notice the markers move along the traces and the change in informa tion in the marker information block Position the markers at the ex treme left of the graticule Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section used to display the MARKER menu MARKER MARKER OFFSET which is a magnitude in this case and FREQ OFF SET values to those of the regular marker Note that a triangular marker appears on top of the circular marker on trace one This OFFSET MARKER is now the reference for measurements taken with the marker on trace one Note the change in the marker information block for trace one from MARKER to OFFSET ZERO Softkey used to turn on the OFFSET MARKER feature and set the Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section used to display the MARKER GOES INTO menu These keys may be used to make data entries with the marker after positioning it with the knob or to move the marker to maximum or minimum points on the trace Softkey used to display the MARKER SEARCH menu which is a second level menu Note that MARKER TARGET is the
49. TR1 RLO and TR2 RLO 3 Annotation 4 Menu TAKE MEASUREMENT TKM When this command is received the HP 3577A settles and takes a measurement before processing the next bus command TKM followed by a dump command guarantees that the measurement will be completed before data transfer begins For faster measurements RST and TRG may be used as shown previously REMOTE OPERATION DN INSTRUMEN The HP 3577A responds to the instrument preset IPR command configuring its parameters as defined in the following table PRESET CONDITION FUNCTION Without test set With test set ANAL PNATTPTTTTETETETTTTTTTETTETTPETTE HT d A Made MAMMA a A M A i e A EE ET Active same TRACE 2 Off same DISPLAY FUNCTION Log magnitude same INPUT def both traces R 21 B R test set fwd user defined input F3 same SCALE log mag Reference level 00 dBm 00 dB DIV 100 dB same Reference position 100 same Reference line On same SCALE linear mag Reference level 00 Volts 0 0 units DIV 100 mV 100E 3 units Reference position 00 same Reference line On same SCALE phase Reference level 0 09 0 09 DIV 45 degrees same l Reference position 50 same Reference line On same Phase slope Tre 1 amp 2 On 0 0 span same SCALE polar Full scale 1 0 Voits 10 units Phase reference 0 09 same Reference position 0 09 same Reference line On same Phase slope Trc 1 amp 2 On 0 0 span same SCALE real amp imaginary Reference level 0
50. The following are Hewlett Packard publications HP Publication 01345 90902 1345A Digital Display Module Designer s Manual HP Publication 45952 9270 Vector Measurements of High Frequency Networks HP Application Note 95 1 S Parameter Techniques for Faster More Accurate Network Design HP Application Note 154 S Parameter Design HP Product Note 3577A 1 Users Guide to the HP 3577A Network Analyzer m DN m d i n PT Eo wwe dU qub v ur Be B wit of E wee r ee A7 nid P A A Mee Ze EI KMS D UP PN d A WC DOS DENS e Se Jy E d w EN i Fin v E S d H X EN z d paz SEA efit e fe Qnem 7 A 3 tS A MP 7 Pega A d d 2 M a det A gt ZE je Duy kat sory v SIT ee Eu j d E A La i i Ka H fe H Jn A E 1 E 2 acr m T e tem PLI UM uis Bi E S External Reference Frequency Input Frequency 10 MHz N IN is an integer from 1 to 100 Level O dBm 10 dB nominal Impedance 50 Q nominal Connector BNC female rear panel Reference Frequency Output Frequency 10 MHz Level Typically O dBm impedance 50 2 nominal Connector BNC female rear panel External Trigger Triggers on negative TTL transition or contact closure to ground Minimum Pulse Width Typically 1 ys Impedance 50 Q nominal Connector BNC female rear panel Plotter Control Directiy compatible with HP IB graphics plotters that use Hewlett Packard Graphic
51. They were taken such that the controller was not a limiting factor SEM Data format one is the default data format When FM1 is active the HP 3577A transfers data using the ASCII format Using this format the HP 3577A can dump a trace of 401 points in approx imately 1 6 seconds This format has the slowest data transfer rate of the three M32 Data format two is the 64 bit floating point binary specified in the IEEE draft standard P754 The data rate for this format is faster than that of FM1 but slower than that of FM3 FM2 has the advantage of being the same format used by HP Series 200 98 6 computers Using this format the HP 3577A can dump a trace of 401 points in approximately 0 16 seconds EM3 Data format three is the 32 bit floating point binary used by the HP 3577A fast processor FM3 has the fastest data transfer rate of the three data for mats Using FM3 the HP 3577A can dump a trace of 401 points inapproximately 0 04 seconds When this format is active the HP3577A does not have to con vert data formats and requires half as many transfers per data value as FM2 This format may beused for data that is not processed outside the HP 35774 DIRECT PLOTTING The HP 3577A can provide a hardcopy of the CRT screen without using a computer It does this by direct ly controlling a digital plotter connected to the HP 3577A s HP IB port located on the rear panel The plot ter such as the HP 7470A must acc
52. X 20000 27717 2000 2FFF Y beam oft 30000 33777 3000 37FF Y bem oni 34000 37777 3800 3FFF c Tex 40000 57777 4000 5FFF Set Condition 60000 77777 epp EES Graph Command Graph Command MSB f LSB O14 D13 D DHIE DS oe OF oe D5 D4 DI D2 DI Dg 0000 a dun B 1 XY PC Dis De Os D De Ds De Ds Qo D De P Command Modiflers a XY information D121 2 Set Deita X increment spected by Os Die for all subsequent Y coordinates 1 Set Y coordinate specihed by De Die The beam is to be moved to Ihis Y it conjunction with the Deita X increment PC Beam Control information D t Beam OFF imove i Beam ON draw APPENDIX B MEMORY BOARD COMMANDS Text Command Text Command Vector Memory Word A MSB Len ot 1 312 1 DE i S Do d 23 e m M2 Mi MB pis ng Di gg Do De DP c 09 uv Dn DE PLA RIEN AA 15 S Sa F1 He ES UC Ce Ur Ce C3 C C Cn A Bu 8a Bye Bn he Fe 7 E E 3 B 8e CHARACTER Mal ISEE DATA BIT DEFINITIONS FOR 13454 COMMANDS c d Moditle IMAN o T8 For Ca C see maditied ASCII conversion tabie a ES Establish Size of Character An internal jump does not affect the Vector Memory address pointer a Use previous see and rotation 1 Establish new size and rotation according to Si Se A and Re MtS M14 M13 MIZ Mit MID MS MB M7 M6 MS M4 M M2 Mi MZ As As Ae An A Au Ab b Rotate Character COW X DON T CARE M15 1 M 4 8 Internat jump to Vector Memory add
53. a sweep note the screen message INSTALL SHORT ON PORT 1 Install a shorted termination on the input cable where the device under test has been connected Softkey After a complete sweep and some calculation time note the screen message INSTALL REFERENCE LOAD ON PORT 1 Replace the short termination with a reference load Softkey After a complete sweep and some more calculation time note the screen message CALIBRATION COMPLETE INPUT F2 CALIBRATED REFLECTION This message to the user says that the INPUT definition has been chang ed to the user defined function F2 See MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION in the REFERENCE section for more details Connect the cable back to the input of the device Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey described previously 2 47 MAKING MEASUREMENTS AMPLIFIER S PARAMETERS Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Note that the SCALE menu is still displayed and selections made from it will affect trace two TRACE 2 Hardkey described previously Softkey described previously Hardkey described previously Softkey described previously Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey used to search for the minimum magnitude in this case max imum RETURN LOSS or best impedance match The display is now input return loss magnitude trace one and phase trace two Measurements may be made with the markers by turning the knob to
54. active bright softkey label and that its default value is 3 000dB MARKER SEARCH Softkey used to SEARCH RIGHT FOR TARGET value Note that the regular marker on trace two moves right until it reaches the first point on the trace where it is three dB below the OFFSET MARKER gu Hardkey described previously ZERO Softkey described previously Note that the OFFSET MARKER moves MARKER B to the position of the regular marker Hardkey described previously MARKER Softkey described previously SEARCH Data entry for a new MARKER TARGET value MAKING MEASUREMENTS dB MKR R TARG LL Figure 295 3dB Bandwidth TUNED STUB NOTCH FILTER Softkey selection of units for the new MARKER TARGET value Softkey used to SEARCH RIGHT FOR TARGET value The MARKER in formation block now shows the 3 dB width of the notch filter as shown in Figure 295 REF LEVEL DIV OFFSET Bi 092 500 000Hz 40 000dRm D 000d8 9 AJ 0 028dB c 0deg 45 000deg MARKER 100 068 000 000Hz H 97 384S3degp RT 4 000 000 000H STOP 150 000 000 000Hx AMPTO 4t 008m STOTT ee eerreeewerrvererverererrerverrrrersrrrrererrrrererrrrererrererererrererrererreererereerererecrvererererrvrerverererertrrerveterertwetreetrertereurtrevrrererrrrerreweewwure A AI MKR OFST ON OFF Figure 2 6 Notch Center Frequency Center freg rejection
55. ail Plot trace 1 Plot trace 2 Plot graticule Plot characters Plot trace 1 marker Plot trace 2 marker Contigure Plot menu Trace 1 linetype entry Trace 2 linetype entry Trace 1 pen number entry Trace 2 pen number entry Graticule pen no entry Pen speed fast max Pen speed slow Set plot config to default Return Use not required The only function of this code is to display a menu if bus diagnostics are on HP iB Code SPC SLF STR STA STB RET BPO BP1 SDG SLO SL SEO SET SVO SY1 DTP TMT FPT PRT MOR DST SRV RET SPO SP1 SAV SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4 SV5 RCL RLS RC1 RC2 RC3 RC4 RC5 IPR PLM PLA PET PL2 PLG PLC PMI PM2 CPT TIL T2L TIP T2P PGP PNM PNS PLD RET PLOTTING VIA HP iB HP IB PLOT commands are a special programming case To control a plotter directly the HP 3577A must become a talker Only one talker is allowed on the bus at a time so the controller must be programmed to release the bus The HP 3577A must be manually con figured with TALK ONLY OFF as with any remote con trol operation The following examples execute a PLOT ALL command They assume that the analyzer s address is eleven and the plotter s address is thirty Example for the HP Series 200 computers 10 SEND 7 UNL MTA LISTEN 11 DATA PLA UNL MTA TALK 11 LISTEN 30 DATA Example for the HP Series 80 computers 10 SEND 7 UNL MTA LISTEN 11 DATA PLA UNL MTA TALK 11 LISTE
56. and displayed DM1 Dump Marker one DEA polar A AA PAA AAAA AAA A A A TAIANA ARANA ANTI ACT rrErrrrrrrrrrrrr donde ended Ea a AAA MED EE EE d MARKER POSITION MP1 MP2 dumps X axis infor mation for the appropriate trace marker Any of the three data formats FM1 FM2 or FM3 may be used The information units are LIN SWP Frequency LOG SWP Frequency ALT SWP Frequency AMP SWP Source amplitude CW Frequency Note If the frequency span is 0 Hz and the sweep time is less than 1000 seconds the marker position is in units of time Example 10 OUTPUT 711 IPR TKM MPT1 20 ENTER 711 Mkr freq 30 DISP Marker frequency Mkr freq Hz 40 END F DUMP AND LOAD INSTRUMENT STATE LMO learn mode out dumps the instrument state out in binary to be stored by the computer 1100 bytes will always be dumped including the first two bytes which are always 1 fl is used to indicate that binary data is to follow LMI learn mode in loads instrument state in binary It is used to configure the HP 35774 to a specific im strument state This state should be configured on the HP 3577A and dumped to the controller using LMO Data dumped with LMO should not be changed out side the HP 35774 It is not possible to configure the instrument state with a computer LMI can be used to speed up reconfiguration if a large status change is necessary between tests o It is recommended that the entire 1100 bytes incl
57. be smaller than the start amplitude To change the value of STOP AMPLITUDE 1 Press the STOP AMPTD softkey 2 Modify the value with the knob or arrow keys OR 2 Enter a new value with the numeric key pad 3 Select units from the menu press softkey STEPSISWEEP is a softkey used to change the number of amplitude data point measurements taken and plot ted on the screen The value may be changed by soft key selection only When STEPS SWEEP softkey is pressed a menu appears that contains all possible selec tions They are 5 10 20 50 100 200 and 400 The default number is 100 A large number of STEP SWEEP makes the trace smooth while small number lowers the required SWEEP TIME ATTENUATION n menm LL x emi E d ATTEN R Od ROAR ATTEN A 048 2048 ATTEN B oda 2048 iMPED A 500 160 IMPER A 502 ima IMPER B 506 1M Figure 4 2 ATTENUATION is a hardkey in the RECEIVER section of the front panel used to display the menu shown above These softkeys may be used to select the input attenuation and input impedance for each of the three receiver channels Also the CLEAR TRIP for the receivers is included in this menu Each input channel has two possible input impedances 500 or 1MQ and two possible input attenuations OdB or 20dB When the instrument is PRESET all channels revert to the default values 500 input impedance and 20dB input attenuation All of the attenuatio
58. be used to define the active trace in terms of 1 receiver inputs 2 data registers con tain stored traces 3 user defined functions and 4 user defined complex constants Connecting an HP 35677A B S parameter Test Set to the HP 3577A changes this menu as shown in Figure 4e17B If the test set is used the S parameters may be turned off with a softkey found under the SPCL FCTN hardkey When the 5 parameters are turned off the INPUT menu changes to that shown in Figure 4917A Without the test set the default selection for INPUT is the R input When the INPUT definition is R A or B the trace appears as a display function of the signal at the selected input The three inputs are identical If A R or DIR are selected as the INPUT then the trace com sists of the data at the A or B input divided by the data at R This may be used to remove the response of the source from the trace by using a power splitter as shown in Figure 4817C The DATA REG softkey may be used to select one of the four data registers as the INPUT definition The USER DEFINED INPUT softkey may be used to con struct an equation using constants data registers in puts and previously defined functions as terms The user may also copy the INPUT definition for the other trace into the definition of the active trace using the COPY TRACE softkey With the S parameter test set the INPUT menu has most of the same features In place of the selections for in puts R A B
59. being PRESET the HP 3577A s knob is in the MARKER position mode The marker small circle may be moved to any part of the trace with the knob and the data for that point appears in the MARKER BLOCK above the right half of the graticule Note that the MARKER information is valid even though the trace may be clip ped by the upper or lower edges of the graticule The arrow keys may also be used to move the marker across the trace If the frequency span is 0 Hz and the sweep time is less than 1000 seconds the marker position reads out in units of time REFERENCE MARKER ON OFF ZERO MARKER ZERO MARKER MKR OFST MKA OFST ON OFF ON OFF MARKER OFFSET FREG OFFSET MKR CPL ON OFF 4923B Polar 4923A Rectangular Figure 4e23 MARKER POSITION is a softkey which must be select ed when the arrow keys are used to move the marker Note that when MARKER POSITION is bright the knob moves the marker in either the MARKER or ENTRY modes MARKER ONJOFF is a push push toggle type softkey used to turn the marker and the MARKER BLOCK off and back on The default condition is on If the marker is off pressing the MKR hardkey turns it on ZERO MARKER is a softkey which turns on the OFF SET MARKER and sets its X Y coordinates OFFSET values to those of the regular marker This marker ap pears as a small triangle on top of the regular marker which is a small circle When ZERO MARKER is ac tivate
60. devices or twenty meters whichever is less with a maximum of three meters seperating any two devices Message Transfer Scheme Byte serial eight bit parallel asynchronous data transfer using a three wire handshake Data Rate One megabyte per second maximum over limited distances actual data rate depends upon the capability of the slowest device involved in the transmission Address Capability Primary addresses 31 talk 31 listen A maximum of one talker and fourteen listeners at one time Multiple controller capability In systems with more than one controller only one can be active at a time The active controller can pass control to another controller but only the system controller can assume unconditional con trol Only one system controller is allowed The system controller is hard wired to assume bus con trol after a power failure 3 1 REMOTE OPERATION BUS STRUCTURE DEVICE A EXT Able to talk listen amp control Date Bua 8 signal linea DEVI CE B EE Able to talk _ amp listen HANDSHAKE LINES 3 signal lineas a CROCO wpe ee he Se ES NR A Ze ven ei CH LR RR 5 EENS EN EaE LN PL ne Cell cee e De ee D LCD 8 se ete oe REENEN he deM wt wd wl RSR ENNEN KENNEN AR RE Able to listen only CONTROL LINES 4 Genera Interface 4 Management 5 signsi lines M Ni NR RS MN RR mee ee na IN tena enee deu Wiele S i A Deel vn Belle D
61. following ASCII character string HP3577A TESTSET or NULL gt Software revision gt The TESTSET string is present if the HP 356774 or HP 35677B S Parameter Test Sets are connected to the HP 3577A BUS DIAGNOSTIC MODES There are three bus diagnostic modes They are 1 BDO Bus Diagnostics Off used for best programming speed 2 BD1 Bus Diagnostics On Fast menus appear bus codes appear on screen for three seconds after an error is detected 3 BD2 Bus Diagnostics On Slow menus appear bus codes appear and are decoded at the rate of one per second BD1 and BD2 are useful for debugging pro grams written to control the HP 3577A When on this mode will sequence through all menus and update the display as if the HP 3577A were being operated from the front panel DATA FORMATS The HP 35774 offers three data for mats used to transfer certain types of data on the bus The data types that make use of all three formats are trace data register data marker data and marker position Po eU AN das d d d FM1 is the ASCII data format The ASCII floating point format will always transfer fifteen characters in the form 12 3456789E 03 for each number i e leading spaces or zeros are not suppressed In FM1 data dumps the HP 3577A outputs ASCII data points separated by commas and carriage return line feed CR LF indicates the end of record When transferring data the complete set of data is referred to as a re
62. is plotted next to it If the marker is near one of the edges of the graticule the marker information is moved such that it all appears on the graticule Infor mation blocks may overwrite each other if the markers are close See Figure 4836 To use this feature 1 Move the marker to the point of interest on the trace 2 Press the PLOT hardkey to display the menu 3 Press the PLOT MARKER __ softkey 1 trace 1 2 trace 2 REF LEVEL DIV MARKER 10 700 pal 000Hz 0 00078 10 000d amp 8 Baan MAG 521 B Lu L ll SE DE MELIA e e E A E WEE WEE ee SENTANTE Cl rer NE BN und ge ziii mall EE e s UN SSUN UNE SN NEL EI RS ER MEN START 10 680 000 000Hz STOP 40 750 000 000Hz AMPTO 15 04Am ILLA A AT te Figure 4 36 CONFIGURE PLOT is a softkey used to select pens line types and pen velocity Pressing this softkey changes the menu listing as shown in Figure 4e35B These para meters are not affected by use of the INSTR PRESET 4 23 REFERENCE hardkey and are not saved with instrument state See DEFAULT SETUP later in this discussion TRACE 1 LINETYPE is a softkey used to select the plot ter line type solid dashes dots etc for trace 1 The line type available is dependent on the plotter The de fault value is 7 a solid line and the range is 0 7 To select a line type 1 Press the PLOT harkey to display the menu 2 Press the CONFIGURE PLOT softkey 3 Press the TRACE 1 LINETY
63. is too small the trace skews to the left or right depending on sweep direction and the dot does not retrace its path Increment the SWEEP TIME and try again 3 Let the HP 3577A sweep once and then select MANUAL FREQUENCY SWEEP MODE Move the marker to the steepest part of the response and press the MER MANUAL softkey If the marker is not on the trace the SWEEP TIME is too small A 3 A 4 T TRIG RESET is a hardkey in the SOURCE section of the front panel that is used by the operator to either TRIC GER or RESET in preparation for a measurement This is one of three hardkeys that do not display a menu It executes its function immediately when pressed When the SWEEP MODE is CONTINUOUS the TRIG GER RESET hardkey stops the current sweep and in itiates a new sweep The new sweep starts as soon as settling is complete When the SWEEP MODE is SINGLE the TRIGGER RESET triggers the measurement if the WAIT TRIG LED REFERENCE is illuminated If a sweep is in progress pressing TRIG GER RESET resets or stops the sweep resets to the start frequency or amplitude if SWEEP TYPE is AMPTD and then settles After settling the WAIT TRIG LED il luminates and pressing TRIGGER RESET triggers the HP 35774 When the SWEEP MODE is MANUAL and the TRIGGER MODE is IMMED the TRIGGER RESET hardkey is used to take each measurement See TRIGGER MODE IM MEDIATE for more information SOFTKEY d TTD T AL
64. left Changing sweep direction during a frequency sweep is useful for determining whether the sweep time is large enough for the selected resolution bandwidth If you change the sweep direction while the sweep dot is on a steep part of the response and the dot does not ex actly retrace its path the sweep time should be increas ed See Optimizing Sweep Time in Appendix A The SWEEP DIRECTION selection is not offered in the CW sweep type TRACE 1 TRACE 2 Figure 4 52 TRACE 1 and TRACE 2 are two hardkeys in the DISPLAY FORMAT front panel section that are used to select the active trace The active trace is indicated by the il luminated LED over either the TRACE 1 or TRACE 2 key and by a bright trace and marker information block on the screen Hardkeys in the DISPLAY FORMAT front panel section are used for data entry or mode selec tion for one of the two traces If SWEEP TYPE is ALTER NATE SWEEP in the SOURCE section then FREQ AMPTD SWP TIME and RES BW data is also trace de pendent For these hardkeys the data entered or mode selected affects only the selected trace When the HP 35774 is preset or turned on trace one is LOG MAGNITUDE and active and trace two is off To turn on trace 2 press TRACE 2 hardkey DSPLY FCTN hardkey and press one of the softkeys other than OFF Trace two and charaters related to it REF DIV and marker information apppear brighter than trace one when the TRACE 2 LED is illuminated 4 35
65. length 4 14 STEPS SWEEP 4 2 STOP AMP FD gestori Boh od 4 2 STOP TREO auto canela 4 10 STORE amp DISPLAY rre 4 32 STORE REG asii Rx 4 31 SWEEP RESOEUTRN Lua Lots 4 10 SWEEF TIME len REX 4 33 SWP DIR UP DOWN 4 35 SYN DIAG ON OFF xii arsar 4 31 TALKONLY ON OFF 4 30 TEST PATTERN iii 4 31 TEST SET FWD REV 4 13 TIMESTEP acosada 4 33 TRACE LINELPYPE 0 TL 4 24 TRACE PENN ociosa aa 4 24 TRCE MEM TEST 4 31 USER DEF INPUT as dida ad 4 13 USER DEF STORE 4 32 ZERO MARKER 415 4 38 This chapter contains instructions for installing and interfacing the HP 3577A Network Analyzer and the HP 35677A B S parameter Test Set Included are initial inspection procedures power and grounding require ments operating environment available accessories and options installation instructions HP IB interfacing procedures and instructions for repacking and ship ment This instrument was carefully inspected both mechani cally and electrically before shipment It should be free of mars and scratches and in perfect electrical order upon receipt To confirm this inspect the instrument for physical damage incurred in transit inventory the supplied accessories listed in Table 522 and test the electrical performance using the Confidence Test listed in the section on Getting Started If there is physical damage if the contents are incomplete or if the ins
66. message to INSTALL REFERENCE LOAD ON PORT 1 of the HP 35677A B S parameter test set Y Quan d 4 19 REFERENCE 8 Install a calibrated load of characteristic im pedance on PORT 1 of the HP 35677A B S parameter test set 9 Press the CONTINUE CAL softkey 10 Wait for the message CALIBRATION COMPLETE 11 Reconnect the device to be tested to PORT 1 When calibration is complete the INPUT is the user de fined function F2 CALIBRATED REFLECTION To dis play the NORMALIZED IMPEDANCE FUNCTION select INPUT F3 as follows 1 Press the INPUT hardkey to display the menu 2 Press the USER DEF INPUT softkey 3 Press the F__ softkey 4 Press the 3 softkey or 3 in the numeric key pad 5 Press the ENTER softkey To display the definition of F3 1 Press the DEFINE MATH hardkey 2 Press the DEFINE FUNCTION softkey 3 Press the F3 softkey and read K1 F2I K1 F2Y in the entry block portion of the screen The error model expression is Mmeas D F Mactual where D is the directivity error term and F is the fre quency response error term When calibrated the HP 3577A displays Manz Mmeas D1J F To solve for Ma the HP 3577A stores A R measured with an open termination into D4 Then it stores the directivity error term D with the standard load in D3 and redefines D4 to be D4 D3 the frequency response error term F The user defined function F2 is now the calibrated reflection function used to solve for Mactuai F2 A R D3JD
67. of interest as an INPUT Press the INPUT hardkey and the softkey label ed DATA REG then select the data register of interest from the menu Refer to STORE DATA DEFINE F4 Ka imag DEF INE FUNCTION Figure 4 7 DEFINE MATH is a hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section of the front panel used to display the menu shown above left These softkeys may be used to define three complex constants and five functions Con stants and functions may be used as terms in USER DEFINED INPUTs or USER DEFINED STOREs The constants are displayed in the menu as soon as the DEFINE MATH key is pressed Each component real and imaginary of each constant K1 through K3 may be defined by pressing the appropriate softkey and mak ing a data entry with the numeric keypad The entry ap pears in the entry block on the screen as it is entered To correct entry errors use the backspace key in the DATA ENTRY section REFERENCE The functions may be defined by pressing the DEFINE FUNCTION softkey This displays a new menu contain ing 1 the 5 user definable functions F1 through F5 2 a command to DEFINE E and 3 RETURN which dis plays the previous menu Also displaved is an entry mes sage on the screen showing the current definition of the bright function This message changes to show the new entry as it is entered One of the F__ softkey labels is bright and appears in the DEFINE F softkey label Selecting another F changes the DEFINE E comm
68. on the dashed line To use this feature 1 Move the marker to the point on the trace that you wish to be the new phase reference 2 Press the MKR hardkey to display the menu 3 Press the MKR REF softkey MARKER MAX is a softkey that works the same in polar as rectangular display formats MARKER MIN is a softkey that works the same in polar as rectangular display formats X MESH A NORME IZE NORME IZE SHORT ONE PORT PART CAL ONE PORT FULL CAL M 1 JL en SR RE his o E 7 AS W d dE SE NE XXE RON Figure 4925 MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION is a hardkey in the DIS PLAY FORMAT section of the front panel used to display the menu of softkeys shown in the figure above Items in the MEASR CAL menu help the user calibrate out the effects of measurement hardware imperfec tions None of these softkey functions are operable if the active sweep type is ALTERNATE SWEEP NORMALIZE is a softkey that is used to remove cable lengths and imperfections in the source flatness from simple measurements To use this feature 1 Set up the measurement Replace the device under test with a through barrel adapter Wait for a full sweep update of the trace Press the MEASR CAL hardkey to display the menu Press the NORMLIZE softkey Replace the barrel with the test device No SU db La Figure 4 26 To normalize the HP 3577A uses the INPUT as it is orig inally defined to store the trace in re
69. or the knob in the ENTRY mode when this softkey label is bright Hardkey in the INSTRUMENT STATE section used to display the SAVE STATE menu MARKER SEARCH MER L TARG Figure 2 18 Marker Search Offset Marker Measurement Marker ZERO MARKER MARKER SEARCH BANDPASS FILTER MAKING MEASUREMENTS Softkey used to save the current instrument state in the first of five registers This state will be recalled to begin another measurement later in this exercise Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section used to make data entries using the position of the marker Also MAX MIN and MARKER SEARCH will move the marker to points of interest on the active trace Softkey that displays a second level menu of softkeys used to search for specific values Note that MARKER TARGET is active Data entry Softkey used to select units for MARKER TARGET Softkey used to search left for the user defined MARKER TARGET value See Figure 2818 REF LEVEL DIV OFFSET 33 500 000Hz MKR a 0 0008 10 000d8 MAG UOF 58 785048 A TARG TTT Z A pas AA HAY NF MNA NM BENE De SE Ee AS NEE E AN E c pus a ks Ik Be ee UAM WER SES EEN CENTER 70 000 000 000Hz SPAN su AES AMPTD O 0d amp m Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey moves the OFFSET MARKER to the new marker position This is in preparation for another MARKER SEARCH for a magnitude equal to the level at this mar
70. or AVERAGE are changed a new measurement sweep must be taken and data stored in trace memory before the screen can be up dated Any math processing that occurs after data has been stored in trace memory registers R A and B operates on this complex data Next the operating system executes a store if it been requested If a STORE is executed source sweep and receiver measurements are interrupted while a memory sweep of trace memory occurs If a simple STORE REG D is executed i e not USER DEF STORE then the STORE math is the same as the INPUT math the trace is stored using the current INPUT definition If a USER DEF STORE command is given the user defines the math done and the data stored is not displayed Changes in display function do not change what is stored The data in trace memory may be processed by any display function and displayed as MAGNITUDE PHASE DELAY etc information After the STORE math is complete the data is stored in the register specified by the user D1 D4 Next unless this was the last bin the operating system continues the memory sweep repeating this process for each bin The displayed trace is not affected unless the INPUT definition is a function of the storage register used If a STORE is not requested the next step is to do the math defined by the INPUT function Then if PHASE SLOPE is on and the value is non zero the PHASE SLOPE math is done Complex numbers are the result of all pro
71. regular ZERO dapi MARKER marker Note that the information in the marker block for trace one has changed from MARKER to OFFSET Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey used to move the marker to the point on the active trace with the largest value The information in the marker block is now total amplifier ripple See Figure 2938 2 43 MAKING MEASUREMENTS El Figure 2 38 Measuring Amplifier Ripple S REVERSE LOSS KEY 2 44 AMPLIFIER S PARAMETERS AAA AAA A A EEN AEF LEVEL IV OFFSET 78 BOO 000 000Hz MKA 18 00048 0 0048 MAG UF 0 298088 REF LYL 12358 000de6g 15 000dsg MARKER 100 250 060 006Hz PHASE UDF 430 40Bdeg MKR A START MKA gt STOP AKA gt CENTER MKS OFST SPAN HKR MAX HRA KIN START Bop 066 000Hz STOP 200 000 000 000Hz HARKER AMP TD O 0d amp Rm SEARCH DESCRIPTION Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey selection of a new INPUT definition This causes the test set to change to the REVERSE configuration See Figure 2839 BRIDGES S19 A R So2 B R REVERSE Figure 2 39 S Parameter Test Set Reverse Configuration The screen message INCOMP TESTSET POSITIONS Trc2 chgd to agree with 1 will appear This message incomplete test set positions trace two chang ed to agree with number one is caused by the change of INPUT for trace one The old trace two INPUT definition had the test set configured FORWARD Since the test set ca
72. softkey which aliows data entry of the phase data to place the OFFSET MARKER as a ref erence for the regular marker This parameter value may be entered or modified in the same manner as described previously for MAGNITUDE OFFSET The OFFSET MARKER may be on or off when this is done Pressing the ZERO MARKER softkey resets this data to the cur rent phase of the regular marker The softkey label changes to IMAGINARY OFFSET when the units are changed with the softkey at the bottom of the menu from magnitude amp phase to real amp imaginary This is described later in this discussion FREQUENCY OFFSET is a softkey that operates the same in the POLAR as in a rectangular display func tion Note that in polar display function changing this value does not change the screen position of the off set marker The value of this parameter may be modi fied to offset the frequency readout in the marker in formation block MARKER M P RI is a push push toggle type softkey which changes the units of the marker information from magnitude amp phase to real amp imaginary The default set ting is magnitude and phase units To change the units to real and imaginary press the MARKER M P R l soft key once Pressing it a second time returns the units to magnitude and phase The selected unit type is in dicated by bright letters M P for magnitude and phase or bright letters R I for real and imaginary MKA MKR gt REF ivt R TARG FULL S
73. the frequen cy position of the marker To use this feature 1 Move the marker to the point on the trace that you wish to be the new stop frequency 2 Press the MKR hardkey to display the menu 3 Press the MKR STOP softkey REFERENCE MARKER CENTER FREQ is a softkey that allows the present frequency of the marker to be entered into the CENTER FREQUENCY value To use this feature 1 Move the marker to the point on the trace that you wish to be the new center frequency 2 Press the MKR hardkey to display the menu 3 Press the MKR CENTER softkey MARKER OFFSET SPAN is a softkey used to select new START and STOP frequencies i e frequency span The start and stop frequencies are selected by position ing the reference and regular markers To use this feature 1 Move the marker to the point on the trace that you wish to be one of the end frequencies 2 Press the MKR hardkey to display a menu 3 Press the ZERO MARKER softkey to turn on the OFFSET MARKER 4 Move the marker to the point on the trace that you wish to be the other end frequency 5 Press the MKR hardkey to display the menu 6 Press the MKR OFST SPAN softkey MARKER MAX is a softkey used to move the marker to the bin containing the largest value To use this feature 1 Press the MKR hardkey to display the menu 2 Press the MKR MAX softkey MARKER MIN is a softkey used to move the marker to the bin containing the
74. to select group delay as the DISPLAY FUNCTION Note DELAY that the softkey labeled DELAY changes to DELAY APERTURE Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey used to set the SCALE parameters such that the trace appears AUTO l i ie l as large as possible without clipping the upper and lower boundaries of the graticule Hardkey used to recall the menu containing DELAY APERTURE Softkey used to display the menu of selections for group delay aper DELAY l l i APERTURE ture the change in frequency over which the change in phase is measured Softkey used to select a different delay aperture DELAY APERTURE information shown below the graticule changes when different percent of span selections are made The DELAY APER information will appear only when the trace whose display function is DELAY is selected See Figure 2923 296 OF SPAN Figure 2 23 Bandpass REF LEVEL DIV OFFSET 18 250 00042 Magnitude and 0 00045 10 00005 MAR UDF X 21 648dB 0 08 6 100 00SEC MARKER 70 013 000 000Hz Group Delay DELAY UDF 27 884p8EC An LL Ss NE LN Eege EG SU ECH n CENTER 70 000 000 ooon SPAN 100 000 000Hz E AMPTO o Ga e DELAY APER 2 000kHz Group Delay 7 A9 where Af Delay 360 x Af Aperture 2 26 AMPLIFIER MAKING MEASUREMENTS GAIN COMPRESSION Connect the amplifier to the HP 3577A Network Analyzer as shown in Figure 2924 The receiver inputs will begin to overload when the i
75. under CON FIGURE PLOT ABORT PLOT allows the user to inter rupt the plot and the origional menu returns After a plot is aborted it cannot be restarted where it stopped While the plot is in progress ABORT PLOT is the only softkey label in the menu area All other front panel keys except INSTR PRESET are ignored ABORT PLOT may not stop the plot immediately The delay depends on the time required for the plotter to execute the last command sent to it by the HP 35774 PLOT TRACE 1 is a softkey used to plot only TRACE 1 When pressed trace 1 and any active markers on it are plotted The plot may be interrupted by using the ABORT PLOT softkey as described in PLOT ALL PLOT TRACE 2 is a softkey that plots TRACE 2 exactly as described above for PLOT TRACE 1 PLOT GRATICULE is a softkey used to plot the active graticule and reference lines The reference lines are plotted using the pen number selected for plotting its associated trace Pressing ABORT PLOT interrupts the REFERENCE plot If you don t want to plot the reference lines turn them off with softkeys in the SCALE menu PLOT CHARACTERS is a softkey that plots the alpha numerics above and below the graticule Pressing ABORT PLOT interrupts the plot PLOT MARKER 1 or 2 are softkeys used to plot multi ple markers This allows the user to mark many points of interest on the plot The extra markers appear as a cross hair on the trace and the marker block infor mation
76. was created when trace one was normalized This copying of INPUT definition normalizes trace two Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey previously described See Figure 2937 Figure 2 37 RF Amplifier REF LEVEL DIY MARKER 100 250 900 000Hz Magnitude and 18 000dB 0 500dB MAG UDF 15 48708 495 000dag i8 000deg MARKER 100 250 000 000Hz Phase of 2 PHASE UDF 180 888deg ge LEVEL Magnitude nmo beier Phase eB ENS Ld su HH S wl EISE EE ES ER REF POSN Ew REF LINE COPY SG 1e2 PHASE START BOG 000 000Hz AMPTD 0 CdBm ON OFF 2 42 AMPLIFIER S PARAMETERS MAKING MEASUREMENTS S FORWARD GAIN AND PHASE The display as shown in Figure 2837 is the forward gain and phase of the amplifier under test The markers may be used to make exact measurements at points along the traces and to make offset measurements KEY DESCRIPTION Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section MKR CPL Softkey that toggles marker coupling between the ON and OFF condi ON OFF a tions This key press should leave OFF bright Turning the knob with marker coupling off will move only the marker on the active trace Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section TRACE 1 Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section SN Softkey used to move the marker to the point on the active trace with MIN the lowest value Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey used to initialize the offset marker at the position of the
77. whenever a hardkey is pressed or if a menu is more than one level deep when certain soft keys are pressed see Figure 4931 Hardkevs are the stenciled keys on the front panel that do not change definition Hardkeys excluding the DATA ENTRY section are used to display menus of soft key labels Three hardkeys that do not display a menu are INSTR PRESET LCL and TRIG RESET MENU al SE 0000 Saa lt 5 0000 b000 REFERENCE HKA e i FARR MARKER TAROET Figure 4e31 MESSAGE BLOCK The MESSAGE BLOCK is the area within the graticule in which messages appear See Figure 4832 These messages may be warning error or general information messages For a listing of these messages see Appendix Figure 4932 The OUTPUT of the HP 3577A is the signal source It is located at the lower center position on the front panel 4 21 REFERENCE and is the left most of the four type N connectors ar ranged along the bottom The OUTPUT signal is con trolled by the keys in the SOURCE section of the front panel The characters across the bottom of the CRT show the status of the frequency and amplitude of the source In LOG and ALTERNATE sweep types the amp litude information does not appear on the screen gl aeaojcoao E OO LOS SS CENTER 10 700 09 GC AMPTD 18 0dBm Figure 4 33 Output Signal Information The OUTPUT has protection circuitry that opens the output path if a signal level
78. which shows the revision status of the Operating system STORE DATA STORE REG Di STORE REG He STORE REG 03 STORE REG Da USER DEF STORE STORE amp DISPLAY Figure 4 48 STORE DATA is a hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT front panel section used to display the menu of softkeys shown above These softkeys may be used to store a trace as it s specified by the INPUT definition store a trace defined by the user or store and compare The trace stored is independent of the active display func tion The data stored is complex trace data identical to what is stored in trace memory registers R A and B when a measurement is taken The HP 3577A does not remember the instrument state such as INPUT definition or start and stop 4 31 REFERENCE frequencies active when the data was stored If the stored information is used in a user defined equation care should be taken that the parameters of all terms are compatible For example for a user defined INPUT of R D1 where D1 is data register one R and D1 should both have the same start and stop frequencies amp litude and sweep type The user may SAVE instrument state at the same time that data is STOREd to be able to recall the state used to store data To use this feature 1 Press the STORE DATA hardkey to display the menu 2 Press the softkey corresponding to the register you wish the active trace to be stored in USER DEFINED STORE
79. 0 CS MOROCCO Dolbeau 81 rue Karatchi CASABLANCA Tet 304 1 82 3068 38 Telex 23051 22822 E Gerep 2 rue d Agadit Boite Postale 155 CASABLANCA Tel 272093 272095 lTeiex 23 739 D NETHERLANDS Hewlett Packard Nederland B V Van Heuven Goedhartlaan 121 NL 1181KK AMSTELVEEN P O Box 667 NE 1080 AR AMSTELVEEN Tel 20 47 20 21 Teiex 13 216 A CM CP E MP P Hewlett Packard Nederland B V Bongerd 2 NL 2906VK CAPPELLE A D ljesse PO Box 41 NL2900 AA CAPELLE ssel Tet 10 51 64 44 Telex 21261 HEPAC NL ACM CP NEW ZEALAND Hewlett Packard N Z itd 169 Manukau Road P O Box 28 189 Epsom AUCKLAND Tel 68 7159 Cable HEWPACK Auckland CM CS E P Manada siphiabeticuly Dy Et Hewlett Packard N Z Lid 4 12 Cruickshank Street HO Box 9443 Kibirhie WELLINGTON 3 Tei 877 199 Cable HEWPACK Wellington CM CP E P Northrop instruments amp Systems Lid Eden House 44 Khyber Pass Road DO Box 9682 Newmarket AUCKLAND Tet 794 091 M Northrop instruments amp Systems Ltd Terrace House 4 Oxford Terrace HO Box 8388 CHRISTCHURCH Fel 64 165 AM Norihrop Instruments amp Systems Ltd Sturdee House 85 87 Ghuznee Street P O Box 2406 WELLINGTON Tel 850 091 Telex NZ 3380 A M NIGERIA The Electronics instrumentations Lid N6B S70 Oyo Road Oluseun House P MB 5402 IBADAN Tel 461577 Telex 31231 TER NG A EMP The Electronics instrumentalions Ltd
80. 0 for fre quency sweeps and 101 0 through 100 for amplitude sweeps MKP is the prefix used to position the marker at a specific bin This bin number may be calculated using the following formula LoT bis start Bin number X points per sweep span Where f is the frequency of the new marker position f IS the start frequency span is the frequency span points per sweep is the sweep resolution This number should be an integer x 401 If the result is not an integer you probably picked a frequency for fy that is not one of the sampled frequencies for the sweep The HP 3577A will round any fraction received with MKP if the number is gt 401 a NUMBER OUT OF RANGE error message will be generated USER DEFINED STORE UDS and TD1 TD4 are used together to define and store data traces Example 10 OUTPUT 711 UDS D3 A R D4 TD3 Note that a register name may appear as part of the defini tion and as the destination register A destination register must appear after the definition USER DEFINED FUNCTIONS 1 THROUGH 5 UFI UES are used to enter definitions as shown in the following Fxample 10 OUTPUT 711 UF3 DA AJR D3 20 OUTPUT 711 UFA A R D2yF3 Note that functions may be defined in terms of lower numbered functions Thus F1 cannot be a function of another user defined function but F5 could be a function of any of the first four CONTINUOUS ENTRY OFFION CEO amp CE1 corresponds to the MARKER an
81. 0 Volts 0 0 units DIV 200 mV 200E 3 units Reference position 50 same Reference line On same Phase slope Trc 1 amp 2 On 0 0 span same SCALE delay Reference level 00 s same DIV 100 ns same Reference position 50 96 same Reference line On same Phase slope Trc 1 amp 2 On 0 0 span same MARKER Both traces Marker On same Position Bin 200 same Offset Mag freq swp Off 1301 dBm Off 00 dB Freq Offset X axis 0 0 Hz 0 0 Hz Offset Mag amptd swp Off 1301 dBm Off 0 0 dB Amptd Offset X axis 13 0 dBm 130 dBm Target 10 01 dBm 30dB REMOTE OPERATION 3 32 STORE User def equation DEFINE MATH K1 real K1 imaginary K2 real K2 imaginary K3 real K3 imaginary SWEEP TYPE Sweep direction SWEEP MODE SWEEP TIME linear swp amplitude swp manual swp mode or CW FREQUENCY Start freq linear swp Start freq log sweep Stop frequency Center frequency Frequency span Center freq step size Freq sweep resolution AMPLITUDE Source amplitude Amplitude step size Start amplitude Stop amplitude Steps sweep TRIGGER MODE RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH Settling time for Res BW 1kHz Res BW 100 Hz Res BW 10 Hz Res BW 1 Hz AVERAGING INPUT ATTENUATION Input R input A input B INPUT IMPEDANCE Input R Input A Input B INPUT LENGTH input R Input A Input B Step size HE dg OH I 1 d 50 d 75 0 B RYKT B R AJR K1 F2 K1 F2 K2 F3 K3 F3 Linear freq Up left to right Continu
82. 0deg MARKER 78 872 500 000Hz PHASE A X SB 414dag MAG PHASE POLAR REAL Corresponds to of span selected for aperture IMAG DELAY APERTURE START 1 000 000 000Hz STOP 150 000 000 000Hz DEF AMPTO 414 0d8m DELAY APER 748 0KKz2 29 MAKING MEASUREMENTS DELAY APERTURE 196 OF SPAN AUTO SCALE Figure 2 8 Polar Display Function TUNED STUB NOTCH FILTER Softkey used to display the menu of user selectable values for the delay aperture These value s units are frequency in percent of span Data en tries are not allowed for this parameter Softkey used to select a delay aperture that is 196 of the total frequen cy span swept Hardkey described previously Softkey used to select POLAR as the display function for the active trace Since only one trace is allowed in POLAR display function the inactive trace will be turned off Hardkey described previously Softkey described previously See Figure 298 FULL SCALE 100 00mV MARKER 78 B72 500 000Hz PHASE REF O 0deg MAG A 1 4128mV REF POSN O 0deg PHASE A 34 7480eg REF POSN REF LINE ON OFF SMITH CH OM OFF PHASE SLOPE START 1 000 000 000Hz STOP 150 000 000 000HMZ PH SLOPE ON OF AMPTD 34 Do e E AAA 2 10 Now the measurements are complete Next we will STORE the trace data in one of four data storage registers STORE TRACE DATA TUNED STUB NOTCH FILTER KEY STORE DATA Figure Zen Store Da
83. 10 771 2087 A CM 05 E MS Hewlett Packard Co 1024 Executive Parkway ST LOUIS MO 63141 Tel 314 878 0200 A CM CP EMP Nebraska Hewel Packard 7101 Mercy Road Suite 101 BX Building OMAHA NE 58 106 Tal 402 392 0948 CM MS Nevada Hewiet Packard Co Suite D 130 A 5030 Paradise Blvd LAS VEGAS NV 89119 Tel 702 736 6610 CMMS New Jersey Hewlelt Packard Co er i Crystal Brook Professional Buliding Route 35 mE EATONTOWN NJ 07724 Tel 201 542 1384 A OMC EP Hewlett Packard Co W120 Century Road PARAMUS NJ 07652 Tel 201 265 5000 A CM OP E MP Hewlett Packard Co 60 New England Avenue West PISCATAWAY NJ 08854 Tet 201 981 1199 A CM CP E Naw Mexico Hewielt Packard Co P O Box 1 634 11300 Lomas Bivd N E ALBUQUERQUE NM 87 123 Tek 505 292 1330 Telex 910 988 1185 CM CP EMS New York Hewlett Packard Co 5 Compuler Drive South ALBANY NY 12205 Tet 518 458 1550 Telex 710 444 4691 A CM CS E MS Hewiett Packard Co 9600 Main Street CLARENCE NY 14031 Ter 716 759 8621 Teiex 7 10 523 1893 Hewlett Packard Co 200 Cross Keys Office FAIRPORT NY 14450 Tel 7 16 223 9950 Telex 510 253 0092 CM CP E MS Hewiett Packard Co No 1 Pennsylvania Plaza 55th Floor 34th 5treet amp 8th Avenue NEW YORK NY 10119 Tek 212 97 0800 CM OPE MI Hewlett Packard Co 5858 Fast Molloy Road SYRACUSE NY 13211 Tel 315 455 2486 A C
84. 144 Agege Motor Hoad Mushin PO Box 6645 Mushin LAGOS AEMP NORTHERN IRELAND Cardiac Services Company 95A Finaghy Road South BELFAST BT 10 OBY Tet 0232 625 566 Telex 747626 M NORWAY Hewiett Packard Norge A S Folke Bernadottesve 50 PO Box 3558 N 5033 FYLLINGSDALEN BERGEN Tel 05 16 55 40 Telex 16621 hpnas n CM CS E Hewlett Packard Norge A S Gesterndaien 18 P C Box 34 N 1345 OESTERAAS Tel 02 17 11 80 Telex 16621 hpnas n A CM SP E MS P OMAN Khimj Ramdas P O Box 19 MUSCAT Tet 72 22 17 72 22 25 Telex 3289 BROKER MB MUSCAT P PAKISTAN Mushko amp Company Ltd 10 Bazar Road Sector G 6 4 ISLAMABAD Tet 28624 Cable FEMUS Rawalpindi AF M Mushko amp Company Lid Cosman Chambers Abdullah Haroon Road KARACHI 0302 Tel 511027 512927 Telex 2894 MUSHKO PW Cable COOPFRATOR Karachi AEMP PANAMA Electr nico Balboa S A Apartado 4929 Panama 5 Calle Samuel Lewis Edificio Alfa No 2 CIUDAD DE PANAMA Tet 64 2700 Telex 3480380 Cable ELECTRON Panama ACM EMP Foto internacional S A DO Box 2068 Free Zone of Colon COLON 3 Tet 45 2333 Telex 3485 126 Cable IMPORT COLON Panama p PERU C mpania Electro M dica S A Los Flamencos 145 San isidro Casilla 1030 LIMA 1 Tel 41 4325 Telex Pub Booth 25424 SISIDRO Cable FLMED Lima ACMEMP PHILIPPINES The Online Advanced Systems Corporation Rico House Amorsolo Cor Herrera Street
85. 2 5X and rotation is 90 deg size is 2 5X and rotation is O deg establish size and rotation flag v a gt Plot a square on the HP 3577A screen Sqr DATA 100 100 DATA 100 1000 T x y coordinate for lower left corner upper left LE 1780 1790 1800 1810 1820 1830 1840 1850 1860 1870 1880 1890 1900 1910 1920 1930 1940 1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 2110 2120 2130 2140 2150 2160 2170 2180 2190 2200 2210 2220 2230 2240 2250 2260 2270 2280 2290 2300 2310 e 4M neet a ang 7 ws on PET REMOTE OPERATION DATA 1000 1000 upper right DATA 1000 100 lower right Since the display units are not equal i e Y axis units are the size of the X axis units on the display the Y axis units should be divided by 75 to get a true square Y axis scale 75 READ XO YO f read the first point CALL Add cmnd Set cmnd initialize SET CONDITION CALL Add cmnd XO Plotx move to starting point CALL Add cmnd YO Y axis scale Movey FOR 1 1 TO 3 READ X Y CALL Add cmnd X Plotx CALL Add cmnd Y Y axis scale Ploty NEXT I CALL Add cmnd X Plotx CALL Add cmnda YO Y axis scale t Ploty piot to starting pt Now display the following message in the four different sizes and rotations Message HP3577 CALL Add cmnd 550 Plotx CALL Add cmnd 500 Movey
86. 310 1320 1330 1340 1350 1360 1370 1380 1390 1400 1410 1420 1430 1440 1450 1460 177 1470 1480 1490 1500 1510 1520 1530 1540 1550 1560 1570 1580 1590 1600 1610 1620 1630 1640 1650 1660 1670 1680 1690 1700 1710 1720 1730 1740 1750 1760 k n mA mi amie 9 R H A BM B A emm S Em pen swam cm A E cug aam vum owad s_n es PI r EN EN 4 1 m e Plotx 0 Ploty 6144 Movey 4096 The SET CONDITIONS command for the display OTTE il ID w Where i defines the line intensity 00 blank 01 dim 10 half bright 11 full bright 1 defines line type 00 solid line 01 intensified end points 10 long dashes 11 short dashes w defines writing speed 00 0 20 inches per microsecond PES UN bs 7 10 D I0 2 114005 oc Set cmnd 30744 full bright solid line amp 05 in us The TEXT command 010s srre cccc cccc Where s defines character size 00 1 0X 01 1 5X 10 2 0X TT LSA r defines rotation 00 0 degrees 01 90 degrees 10 180 degrees 11 270 degrees e establish size of character O Use previous size and rotation 1 Use new size and rotation c character code see table in appendix Text 1 16384 Text 2 18944 Text 3 21504 Text 4 24064 Text 5 22528 Es 256 size is 1X and rotation is O deg size is 1 5X and rotation is 90 deg size is 20X and rotation is 180 deg size is
87. 4 Return Swp Res to 401 Aperture does not change FULL SWEEP is a softkey used to reset the start stop sweep parameters to their maximum values Full sweep in a linear sweep is from 0 to 200 MHz In log sweep full sweep is from 5 Hz to 200 MHz The presence of a test set does not affect full sweep GRATICULE GRATICULE is a scale for measuring quantities dis played on the CRT refered to as the display screen The HP 3577A has different graticules for LOG and LINEAR sweep types POLAR display function and changes the POLAR display graticule to a SMITH chart with a softkey in the SCALE menu REFERENCE i i kia mun PS uk ECH Rectangular Linear Too UCI A A CRESCE ERU HORE CHICO DUE DC O O AO TUI DCH LEE EHE CHI ELE Rectangular Log i Polar Smith Chart On Figure 4915 441 REFERENCE HARDKEY Figure 4016 HARDKEY refers to all of the keys on the front panel that have command names printed on them Most hard keys are used to display a menu of softkey labels Ex ceptions to this are the keys in the DATA ENTRY sec tion the TRIG RESET key the LCL key and the INSTRU MENT PRESET key INPUT S22 DATA REG USER DEF INPUT COPY Tre 291 TEST SET FWD REV COPY Tre Sai 4e17A 4 17B sip Kl lg der RP 442 4917C INPUT is a hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section used to display the menus of softkeys shown in Figure 4917 These softkeys may
88. 4 0016 NOTE Instrument Support Rails are not absolutely necessary when rack mounting with slides However they do relieve a considerable amount of strain from the slides and provide an extra measure of safety Perform steps a thru d of the previous procedure Attach a slide inner member bracket to each side of the HP 35774 Attach the slide s outer members to the instrument rack according to the instructions included with the slides If your instrument rack has extension legs on the front be sure that they are extended at this time Using two people lift the HP 35774 to its posi tion in the rack and mate the two sections of the slides together Do not rest the full weight of the HP 3577A on the extended slides until you are sure the instrument rack will not overturn Slide the HP 3577A into the rack Using the ap propriate screws fasten the HP 3577A s Rack Mount Flanges to the front of the rack GENERAL INFORMATION If alignment of the display is necessary perform the following a Power ON b Press the SPCL FCTN hardkey Press the TEST PATTERN softkey Adjust HORIZ and VERT on the rear panel to center the pattern on the face of the CRT E Q e Adjust ALIGN on the rear panel which rotates the display until the bottom of the display is parallel to the bottom of the bezel f Adjust FOCUS and ASTIG on the rear panel until the lines on the display are sharp and clear it may
89. 7 4958 FAEG i a e STOP tie EEE 75 SCH Le CENTER C FREQ STEP SREEP Y R SOLUTN START o 000Hz STOP 200 000 000 000Hz AMPTD 40 0dBm deeg BANDPASS FILTER MAKING MEASUREMENTS Hardkey in the SOURCE section used to display the menu of softkeys shown in Figure 2913 Softkey used to select center frequency as the parameter for modifica tion Default value is 100 MHz CENTER FREQ Data entry Softkey used to select megahertz as the units for the data entry Note that the data entry is not complete until units are selected from the menu Softkey used to select frequency span as the parameter for modi fication The DATA ENTRY block on the screen shows the current value is 200 MHz Data entry Softkey used to select kHz as units for entry Hardkey in the SOURCE section used to display the menu of softkeys shown in Figure 2814 Default value is 10 dBm without the test set and 15 dBm with the test set Figure 2 14 The Source REF LEVEL DIV MARKER 70 000 000 000Hz Ampiitude Menu o 00008 10 000d8 MAGIB A 8 0988d8 E E ee L ul T E EN NE SPENCER Si Yi At ee eee ee Ge na lA dio CENTER 70 000 000 000Hz SPAN 100 000 D00Hz AMPTO 30 0dBm Data entry Softkey used to select the units for the data entry The entry is effec tive when this key is pressed 2 15 MAKING MEASUREMENTS BANDPASS FILTER 2 16 In this case increasing the source amplitude 10 dB has
90. 8 MKR OFST ON OPES iaa 4 15 MKR CENTER 4 17 18 MKR FULL SCT 4 18 MKR L TARG 4 18 MKR MANUAL 4 33 MKR MAX ooo 4 17 18 MKR MIN 417 18 MKR R TARG 0 4 17 MKR REF 4 18 MKR REF LVL 4 17 MKR START 4 17 18 MKR STOP 4 17 18 MKR CPL ON OFF 4 16 MKR OFST SPAN 4 17 18 NORMUIZE sg 4 19 NORMLIZE SHORT 419 ONE PORT FULL CAL 4 20 ONE PORT PART CAL 419 PEN SPEED SLOW FST 424 ciate ee co ee Se ee OE RET 4 7 PHASE OFFSET uo doque perse 4 16 PHASE REFERENCE s caia 4 28 PHASE SLOPE cie dnm Sc PHASE SLOPE ON OFPE uz rios 4 28 PEO T ALD ut ie oerte etek oa 4 23 PLO CHAR b cina eene 4 23 PEOT GRAT catre eas 4 23 SOFTKEY page PLOT MARKER 5 ees de 4 23 PLOT TRACE oo Ru 4 23 POLAR id Uca s 4 7 RELOLD STATE E eg et 4 25 REAL ursi ara tas d exe RELALL REC um denen es Re trs ex ds 4 24 REF LEVEL iso os teer LR REF LINE ON OFF 4 28 29 REF POSN rai Ae UN EAR 4 28 29 RETURN Log ose e dente asf 4 18 24 S PARMS ON OFF 4 31 SAMPLE TIME 4 33 SAVE REC lt ea 4 27 SERVICE DIAG cia is 4 30 SETTLING ON OFF em 4 31 SINGLE sweep mode 4 32 SMITH CH ON Ort 4 29 SOFTWARE REVISION 4 31 START AMPLITUDE 4 2 START FREQ 00 ee 4 10 STEP SIZE amplitude 4 1 STEP SIZE
91. 844 501 664 8773 CM MS UNITED STATES Cont California Hewlett Packard Co 7621 Canoga Avenue CANOGA PARK CA 81304 Tet 213 702 8300 A CM CP EP Hewiett Packard Co 1579 W Shaw Avenue FRESNO C 9377 t Tel 208 224 0582 CM MG Hewlelt Packard Co 1430 East Orangethorpe FULLERTON CA 92631 Tet 714 870 1000 CM CP E MP Hewtett Packard Co 5400 W Rosecrans Boulevard LAWNDALE CA 90260 P O Box 92105 LOS ANGELES CA 90009 Tek 1213 970 7500 CM CP MP Hewlett Packard Co 3939 Lankershim Blvd NORTH HOLLYWOOD CA 91604 Tei 213 877 1282 Regional Headquarters Hewiett Packard Co 3200 Hillview Avenue PALO ALTO CA 94304 Tel 415 857 8000 CM CP E Hewlett Packard Co 646 W North Market Boulevard SACRAMENTO CA 95834 Tei 816 929 7222 A CM CPE MS Hewleti Packard Co 9606 Aero Drive DO Box 23333 SAN DIEGO CA 92 123 Tek 7 14 279 3200 CM CP E MP Hewlett Packard Co 3003 Scot Boulevard SANTA CLARA CA 95050 Tet 408 988 7000 A CM CP E MP Hewietl Packard Co 454 Carlton Court SO SAN FRANCISCO CA 94080 Tel 415 877 0772 CM CP Colorado Hewlett Packard Co 24 inverness Place East ENGLEWOOD CO 80112 Tel 302 771 3455 AOMCPEMS Connecticut Hewiett Packard Co 47 Barnes Industriai Road South P O Box 5007 WALLINGFORD CT 06492 Tet 203 265 7801 A CM CP EMS Florida Hewlett Packard Co PO Box 242 10 2727 N W Bend Street FORT
92. A TION section Display function Log magnitude same input both traces R input 21 Active trace Trace 1 same Scale 10 dB DIV same Reference level 0 dBm same Reference position 10096 for log mag same Start frequency O Hz 100 kHz Stop frequency 200 MHz same Amplitude 10 dBm 15 dBm Amplitude step size 1 dB same Sweep type Linear frequency same Sweep time 1 second same Sweep mode Continuous same Sweep resolution 401 points span same Trigger mode Free Run same Resolution bandwidth 1 kHz same Averaging Off same Attenuation input 20 dB all 3 inputs same Impedance input 50 ohms all 3 inputs same i Length R On 0 meters On 1 3 meters Length A On 0 meters same i Length B On 0 meters same User def constants K1 10 j0 0 same K2 50 0 j00 same K3 750 10 0 same i User def functions F1 B R K1 B R same F2 AIR same F3 K1 F2 K1 F2 same F4 K2 F3 same F5 K3 F3 same INSTRUMENT STATE is one of five front panel sec tions The hardkeys in this section may be used to SAVE and RECALL instrument state PRESET the HP 3577A PLOT what appears on the screen monitor the HP IB 413 REFERENCE INSTR PRESET C USTEN i Q Tatk C sra Figure 4019 status of the HP 3577A or use the SPECIAL FUNC TIONS SPECIAL FUNCTIONS include changing the HP IB ad dress confidence
93. A CM Hewlett Packard Schweiz AG 47 Avenue Blanc CH 1202 GENEVA Tet 022 32 30 05 32 48 00 CM CP Hewlett Packard Schweiz AG 29 Chemin Ch leau Bloc CH 1219 LE LIGNON Geneva Tel 022 96 03 22 Telex 27333 hpag ch Cable HEWPACKAG Geneva A CM MS P Hewlett Packard Schweiz AG 2Urcherstrasse 20 limend 2 CH 8967 WIDEN Tel 157 50 111 Teiex 59933 hpag ch Cable HPAG CH A CM CP EMS P SYRIA General Electronic Inc Nuri Basha Ahnat Ebn Kays Street P O Box 5781 DAMASCUS Tel 33 24 87 Telex 11215 ITIKAL Cable ELECTROBOR DAMASCUS E Sawah amp Co Place Azm Boile Postale 2308 DAMASCUS Tet 16 367 19 697 14 268 Telex 11304 SATACO SY Cable SAWAH DAMASCUS M TAIWAN Hewlett Packard Far East Ltd Kaohsiung Branch 68 2 Chung Cheng 3rd Road Shin Shin Chu KAOHSIUNG Tel 24 2318 26 3253 CS E MSP Hewlett Packard Far East Lid Taiwan Branch 5th Floor 205 Tun Hwa North Road TAIPEI Tet 02 751 0404 Cable HEWPACK Taipei AOP EMS P Hewiett Packard Far East Lid Taichung Branch 33 Cheng Yih Street 10th Floor Room 5 TAICHUNG Tel 289274 ing Lih Trading Co 3rd Floor 18 Po la Road TAIPEI Tet Telex Cable INGLIH TAIPE A THAILAND UNIMESA Co Ltd Elcom Research Building 2538 Sukhumvit Ave Bangchak BANGKOK Tel 393 2387 393 0338 Telex TH81160 82938 8 1038 Cable UNIMESA Bangkok ACEM Bangkok Business Equipment Ltd 5 5 6 Dejo Ro
94. A which represents Macua Mmea DYF M actual D Eh F he R 7 R Z o open Figure 4 28 ONE PORT FULL CAL is a softkey label in the MEAS UREMENT CALIBRATION menu used to improve return loss measurement accuracy Use of this feature destroys the contents of data registers D1 for trace 1 or D2 for trace 2 D3 and D4 and redefine F1 F2 and K1 Use of this feature is identical to that of the two term error correction described previously with the addition of a step requiring that PORT 1 of the S parameter test set be terminated with a short Messages on the screen 4 20 ask the user to LEAVE PORT 1 OPEN INSTALL SHORT ON PORT 1 and INSTALL REFERENCE LOAD ON PORT 1 fof the S parameter test set After each termina tion is connected the CONTINUE CAL softkey is press ed and the HP 3577A collects data by sweeping dur ing which sweep time we must patiently wait When this sequence is complete F2 is the displayed trace and has been defined to be the CALIBRATED REFLECTION The normalized impedance function may be displayed by selecting F3 for the user defined INPUT as previous ly described The error model expression used for the 3 term correc tion function is Mmeass D T Mactuatl 1S Macua where D is the correction factor for directivity T is the correction factor for transmission and S is the factor for source match When calibrated the HP 3577A displays Mactual Mmeas D S Mmeas T To sol
95. ATE section used to display the SPECIAL FUNCTION menu This menu contains the softkey CONF TEST Softkey used to select the confidence test Note that the screen displays a message to connect a cable between the output and the input to be tested The menu contains commands to test any of the three inputs Connect the cable as shown below dli 4 774 dono Mm ra raro im TEST Softkey that begins test of input R The HP 3577A will run nine R tests and display pass fail results of each These tests are LOG SWEEP signal level test LOG SWEEP flatness test LINEAR SWEEP signal level LINEAR SWEEP magnitude flatness Synthesizer and L O feed through AMPLITUDE SWEEP accuracy Output limiter linearity RECEIVER IMPEDANCE e RECEIVER ATTENUATOR 6 o e Y If any tests fail the HP 3577A Network Analyzer will stop the testing and display a failure message Testing may be continued by pressing the CONT TEST softkey Any screen listing of a failed test will be bright Inputs A and B may be tested in the same manner by connecting the OUTPUT to the input to be tested and pressing the corresponding softkey When testing is complete press INSTR PRESET or any other hardkey to exit the CONFIDENCE TEST menu and begin a measurement setup 1 5 GETTING STARTED NOTE i If any of the HP 3577A CONFIDENCE TESTS fail refer to the HP for instructions Service procedures should be executed by trained service personnel
96. ATTEN menu The menu shows the user s selections and has the CLEAR TRIP softkey which should be used to reset the TRIP condi tion The CLEAR TRIP softkey clears any and all inputs that are tripped AVERAGE FREE AVERAGE is a hardkey in the RECEIVER section of the front panel used to display the menu of softkeys shown in Figure 483 Selection of any of the numbered softkeys turns on the exponential averaging feature of the HP 3577A When averaging is on the LED above the AVG hardkey is illuminated The number selected by the user from the menu is a weighting factor called N in the following discussion Averaging is useful for removing the effects of noise from a trace It is best to select a small N if you wish REFERENCE Figure 4 3 to adjust the response of the device under test while sweeping A small N like 4 shows the response changes faster than a large N If you want a very good final picture pick 256 or other large value for N The larger N is the more noise is reduced This feature is capable of reducing trace noise as much as 24 dB N 256 Another way to reduce trace noise when measuring weak signals is to switch out the 20 dB RECEIVER at tenuators See ATTENUATION To use AVERAGE press the hardkey labeled AVG in the RECEIVER section of the front panel The list of choices appears in the menu area of the display If the feature is off the word OFF appears bright in the menu If any other selection i
97. Alfaro 1749 QUITO Tel 450 975 243 052 Telex 2548 CYEDE ED Cable CYEDE Quito A CM EP Hospitalar S A Casilla 3590 Robles 625 QUITO fel 545 250 545 122 Cable HOSPITALAR Quilo M EGYPT Samitro Sami Amin Trading Office 18 Abdel Aziz Gawish ABDIME CAIRO Tel 24 932 P international Engineering Associates 24 Hussein Hegazi Street Kasr et Aini CAIRO Tet 23 829 Teiex 93830 EM informatic For Computer Systems 22 Talaat Harb Street CAIRO fet 759006 Telex 93938 FRANK UN C EL SALVADOR PESA Boulevard de los Heroes Edificio Sarah 1148 SAN SALVADOR Tel 252787 A C CM E P FINLAND Hewlett Packard Oy Revontulentie 7 SF 02 100 ESPOO 10 Tei 90 455 0211 Telex 121563 hewpa sf ACM CP E MS P FRANCE Hewlett Packard France Le Ligoures Bureau de Vente de Aix en Provence Place Rom e de Villeneuve F 13090 AIX EN PROVENCE Tei 42 59 41 02 Telex 410770F A CM CS E MS P Arranged ic bs GE FRANCE Cont Hewietl Packard France Boite Postale No 503 F 25026 BESANCON 28 Rue de la Republique F 25000 BESANCON Tel 81 83 16 22 C M Hewlett Packard France Bureau de Vente de Lyon Chemin des Mouilles Boile Postale No 162 F 69130 ECULLY C dex Tel 78 33 81 25 Telex 3106 17F A CM CP EMP Hewlett Packard France immeuble France Evry Tour Lorraine Boulevard de France F 91035 EVRY C dex Tet 60 77 96 60 Telex 692315F CME Hewlett Packard France 5th Avenue
98. B R 0 1 nV to 10 V Ratio A R B R A B 10 to 102 Heal Imaginary Characteristics Range Dynamic Accuracy Frequency Response Uncertainty Crosstalk Stability specifications are the same as the corresponding magnitude and phase characteristics Delay GENERAL INFORMATION Resolution Marker 5 digits Display 0 1 nV div to 10 V div for absolute 10 to 10 for ratio Display Units V and linear ratio Reference Level Range 10 Y for absolute 10 for ratio Resolution 5 digits Characteristics Linear Frequency Sweep A R B R A B 50 Q input impedance Range Group delay is a computed parameter defined by the equation 8 AP to 7 2zA Minimum The minimum delay time is given by the expression 1 4x 1075 Aperture Hz Maximum The maximum delay is given by the expression N 1 2 x Span Hz where N number of points per sweep 51 101 20T 401 Effective Range ps to 20 000 s Resolution Marker Same as minimum delay time or 5 digits whichever is greater Display 0 01 ns div to ae s div Aperture Selectable 0 5 196 2 4 8 16 of frequency span Display Units s Accuracy freq Hz Or Dynamic Phase Accuracy 49 ns 360 x Aperture Hz whichever is greater The 138 freq Hz calibrated out with normalization Crosstalk Determined by the expression Phase Crosstalk 360 x Aperture Hz Reference Level Range 10 s Resolution 5 digits Stability Tem
99. Bm INPUT both traces 21 same as B R INSTRUMENT PRESET always displays the INPUT menu Note that S is bright in the menu This indicates that it is the active INPUT defini tion of the selected trace Also note the entry block showing that IN PUT is B R This indicates that S is the same as B R with the test set in the FORWARD configuration See Figure 2930 tege Figure 2930 S Parameter input Menu SWEEP TYPE nT A PPP A AR AA AAA ERR QA ANA REF LEVEL DIV MARKER 100 080 000 000Hz 0 000dB 10 00046 MAG 821 704 381 B lebt GOPY Tre 994 BTART 100 000 000Hzx STOP 200 000 000 000Hz AMPTD 18 Odi Hardkey in the SOURCE section LOW PASS FILTER MAKING MEASUREMENTS LOG FREQ Softkey that selects a logarithmic frequency sweep Note that the screen na SWEEP includes frequency annotation shown across the bottom of the graticule See Figure 2931 Figure 2 31 Log Frequency REF LEVEL DIV MARKER 4 472 198 000Hz LIN FAEG Sweep Type 0 00048 10 000d8 MAS 324 0 235d8 SWEEP NL LIU LLLI LI CU LLL UU TOL III LLL LIAE 1 LIMINE START 00 O00 000Hz STOP 200 000 000 000Hz NOTE If you need to change the FREQ or AMPTD parameters to get the cor rect measurement set up do so at this point Only two data entry parameters exist in the FREQUENCY menu when the SWEEP TYPE is LOG FREQ START and STOP FREQ FULL SWEEP is an immediate ex ecution command not data entry Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT
100. C MKA A MKR MER STAAT t TARS START MKR MARKER HKR A STOP TARGET STOP MKA gt MKA gt CENTER CENTEA MKA OFST MKB DEST SPAN SPAN HKA o HKA gt MAX REF MKR HKA e IN MAX MARKER HKA gt SEARCH MIN 4e24A 49248 4024 Rectangular Polar Figure 4 24 MARKER is a hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT sec tion of the front panel used to display the menus of soft keys shown above Some of these softkeys may be used to enter data corresponding to the position of the marker Others move the marker to points of interest MARKER REFERENCE LEVEL is a softkey used to change the current value of REFERENCE LEVEL to the magnitude position of the marker This redefines the level at the dashed line such that the trace moves up or down putting the marker on the reference line To use this feature 1 Move the marker to the point on the trace whose magnitude you wish to be the new reference level dashed line value 2 Press the MKR hardkey to display the menu 3 Press the MKR REF LVL softkey MARKER START FREQ is a softkey used to change the current value of START FREQUENCY to the fre quency position of the marker To use this feature 1 Move the marker to the point on the trace that you wish to be the new start frequency 2 Press the MKR hardkey to display the menu 3 Press the MKR START softkey MARKER STOP FREQ is a softkey used to change the current value of STOP FREQUENCY to
101. CTIONS SPC Confid self test menu SLF Self test channel R STR Self test channel A STA Self test channel B STB Return RET Beeper off BPO Beeper on BP1 Service Diagnostics menu SDG Source Leveling off SLO Source Leveling on SET Settling Time off SEQ Settling time on SE1 Synthesizer Diag off SYO Synthesizer Diag on SN Display Test Pattern DTP Trace Memory Test TMT Fast Processor Test FPT iO port test PRT More Serv Diag menu MOR Display Memory Test DST Software Revision message SRV Return RET S Parameters Off SPO S Parameters Oh SP1 SAVE INSTRUMENT STATE SAV Save state in register 1 KA Save state in register 2 v2 Save state in register 3 SV3 Save state in register 4 SV4 Save state in register 5 V5 RECALL INSTRUMENT STATE RCL Recall old last state RLS Recall register 1 RC Recall register 2 RC2 Recall register 3 RC3 Recall register 4 RC4 Recall register 5 RCS5 D 3 APPENDIX D INSTRUMENT PRESET PR PLOT MENU PEM Plot ail PLA Plot trace 1 P11 Plot trace 2 PL2 Plot graticule PLG Plot characters PLC Piot trace 1 marker PM1 Plot trace 2 marker PM2 Configure Plot menu CPT Trace 1 linetype entry TUL Trace 2 linetype entry T2L Trace 1 pen number entry T1P Trace 2 pen number entry T2P Graticule pen no entry PGP Pen speed fast maxi PNM Pen speed slow PNS Set plot config to default PLD Return RET HP IB ONLY COMMANDS Function HP IB code Settling Time Entry STE Dump register A DRA Du
102. D radiansispan RSP seconds SEC milliseconds MSC microseconds USC nanoseconds NSC percent degrees span DSP radtans span RAP MHz MHZ kHz KHZ Hz HZ exponent E USER DEFINED INPUT UDB uses the same terms and math functions as UDF user defined function Example 10 OUTPUT 711 UDI B RKKT B R COPY INPUT CPB will copy the INPUT definition of the inactive trace into that of the of the active trace as follows 1 Trace one active 2 Output CPI 3 INPUT definition of trace one is now the same as trace two TEST SET FORWARD AND REVERSE TSF amp TSR are used to configure a HP 35677A B S Parameter Test Set connected to the HP 3577A The INPUT definition should be user defin ed to avoid an error message If you wish to control the test set while using one of the standard input definitions enter it under UDI Example p 10 OUTPUT 711 UDI KRIS Use not required The only function of this code is to display a menu if bus diagnostics are on REMOTE OPERATION COPY SCALE CPS will copy reference level and DIV parameters of the inactive trace into those of the active trace if the DISPLAY FUNCTION units of both traces are compatible MARKER POSITION MKP is a prefix for a data entry The data will be a bin number The number of bins in a sweep depends on the sweep resolution in a frequency sweep or number of steps in an amplitude sweep The defauit numbers of bins in a sweep are 401 0 through 40
103. E 13 350 OUTPUT QAdrs ENA 5 CONTINUE key pressed 360 CASE 16 370 OUTPUT QAdrs ENA 5 TEST FAILED key pressed 3 26 Enter annotation bus mnemonic Opening quote indicates that text text Up to 40 characters of ASCII text The carriage return character code is unac ceptable and will be translated to a left arrow if used dd Closing quote marks lt delim gt This delimiter may be the characters lt CR LF gt space or the act of pulling 380 CASE 20 390 OUTPUT QAdrs ENA 5 400 END SELECT 420 WAIT 2 430 OUTPUT EOAdrs ENA 05 440 OUTPUT Adrs MN1 460 END LOOP ENTER GRAPHICS ENG The graphics mode allows the user to place alphanumeric information anywhere on the screen in different sizes intensities and rotational positions as well as draw vectors Although this offers more flexibility than ENA knowledge of the HP 1345A Digital Display command set is required This informa tion uses the same display memory as the ENA func tion therefore the two functions cannot be used together 1345A commands The format to be used is as follows ENG Enter Graphics bus mnemonic 1 Indicates binary words to follow lt 0 923 gt lt EOI gt Starting address within annotation block where 1345A commands are to be placed Sent as a 16 bit binary number MSB first PARA A nen nT OW OT WVU VEY OUT Sn OT TUT OY O77 U URE TU OY CT OT WOU RT UIT URTV CNET Wu Ore env Ov UNOVEYCovUrreT
104. EORY ASSISTANCE Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Hewlett Packard products For any assistance contact your nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office Addresses are provided at the back of this manual 12 1 81 Y HEWLETT SAFETY SUMMARY The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of this instrument Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design manufacture and intended use of the instrument Hewlett Packard Company assumes no lisbility for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements This is a Safety Class 1 instrument GROUND THE INSTRUMENT To minimize shock hazard the instrument chassis and cabinet must be connected to an elec trical ground The instrument is equipped with a three conductor ac power cable The power cable must either be plugged into an approved three contact electrical outlet or used with a three contact to two contact adapter with the grounding wire green firmly connected to an electrical ground safety ground at the power outlet The power jack and mating plug of the power cable meet International Electrotechnical Commission IEC safety standards DO NOT OPERATE IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable gases or fumes Operation of a
105. Examples of record length CW 1 LIN Sweep Resolution LOG 401 ALT 401 AMP Number of steps sweep plus 1 END OF INFORMATION The bus management line EO end or identify will be pulled by the HP 3577A on the last byte of any data dump whether it is a binary or ASCII dump Once the HP 3577A has pulled its EO line it will not transmit any more data until receiving another message When using ENG enter graphics to load graphics commands EOI must be pulled on the handshake of the last byte Using BASIC on HP com puters such as the 9836 pulling the EO line is done by putting END at the end of the data string as shown in the following example Example 10 OUTPUT 711 ENG 1 20 OUTPUT 711 USING W Cmnd array END REMOTE OPERATION ENTER MENU ENM allows the user to label the eight softkeys This feature may be used with commands that read the keyboard It does not allow the user to redefine the key label corresponding to a HP 35774 softkey func tion The user defined menu shares the same display memory with system menus It is recommended that the bus diagnostic mode be kept off to avoid overwriting menus To label the softkeys use the following sequence ENM Enter menu bus mnemonic if Opening quote indicates that text follows 1 8 The softkey number on which to display the message If the first character is not a number 1 is assumed text Up to 16 characters of ASCII text If the text is
106. F PRUSSIA P 19406 Tel 215 265 7000 Telex 510 650 2670 A CM CP E MP Hewiet Pack ard Co 111 Zeta Drive PITTSBURGH PA 15238 Tei 412 782 0400 A CM CP E MP South Caroling Hewiet Packard Co P O Box 6442 694 1 0 N Trenholm Road COLUMBIA SC 29250 Tel 803 782 6493 CM CS E MS SALES Ke Arranged alphabetically by country UNITED STATES Cont South Carolina Cont Hewlett Packard Gs 14 Wade Hampton Brvd Suite 10 GREENVILLE SC 29609 Ter 8033 232 0917 E Tennessee Hewlett Packard CG PO Box 22490 24 Peters Road Suite 102 KNOXVILLE TN 37922 Tel 6151 691 2371 A CMMS Hewiett Packard Co 3070 Directors Bow MEMPHIS TN 3813 Tel 901 346 8370 ACM ESMS Hewlett Packard Co Suite 103 478 Craighead Street NASHVILLE TN 37204 Tet 615 383 9136 CMMS l Texas Hewlett Packard Co Suite 310W 7800 Shoaicreek Blvd AUSTIN TX 78757 Tel 6 2 458 3143 CME Hewieti Packard Co Suite C 110 4171 North Mesa EL PASO TX 79902 Tel 815 533 3555 CM CSE MS Hewlett Packard Co 5020 Mark IV Parkway FORT WORTH Tx 76106 Tek 817 625 6364 CM C i Hewlett Packard Co PO Box 42816 10535 Harwin Street HOUSTON TX 77036 Tet 713 776 6400 ACM CP E MP Hewlett Packard Co 3309 671h Street Suite 24 i LUBBOCK TX 79413 Tel 806 799 4472 M Hewlett Packard Co P O Box 1276 930 E Campbed Rd RICHARDSON TX 75081 Tet 214 231 6101 A
107. FREQ STEP is a softkey used to enter data for the step size taken when the increment decrement ar rows are used to modify the center frequency value Data entry for this parameter is accomplished in the same manner as for START FREQ SWEEP RESOLUTION is a softkey used to change the number of sample frequencies measured by the HP 3577A The default value for sweep resolution is 401 points These correspond to the bins referred to in Ap pendix A Each bin is as wide as the selected resolution bandwidth and has associated with it a bin number position information and measurement value The user may select 401 201 101 or 51 points per sweep The larger numbers provide a smoother trace while the lower number of points per sweep allow a shorter SWEEP TIME To select a value for SWEEP RESOLU TION press the FREQ hardkey SWEEP RESOLUTN softkey and then press the softkey corresponding to the desired value NOTE Changing SWEEP RESOLUTION or SWEEP TYPE erases registers R A and B in trace memory sets all zero When the display function is group delay delay aper ture is somewhat dependent on sweep resolution If the sweep resolution is decreased the HP 3577A auto matically increases the delay aperture and displays the screen message DELAY APERTURE INCREASED EXAMPLE 1 PRESET Swp Res 401 Aperture 5 of span 2 Change Swp Res to 201 Aperture changes to 1 3 Change Swp Res to 101 Aperture changes to 2
108. Hewlett Packard Espa ola S A c Entenza 321 E BARCELONA 29 Tek 3 322 24 51 321 73 54 Telex 52603 hpbee ACM OP E MS P Hewlett Packard Espa ola S A c San Vicente S N Edificio Aibia 1 7 B E BILBAO f Tet 1944 423 8306 423 8206 ACM EMS Hewlett Packard Espa ola S A Calle Jerez 3 E MADRID 16 Tel 458 2600 Telex 23515 hpe ACME MPP Hewielt Packard Espa ola S A Colonia Mirasierra Edificio duban c o Costa Brava 13 2 E MADRID 34 Tek 734 8061 734 1162 CM CP Hewlett Packard Espa ola S A Av Ram n y Cajal 1 9 Edificio Sevilla 1 E SEVILLA 5 Tel 64 44 54 64 44 58 Telex 72933 CM CS MS P Hewlett Packard Espa ola S A C Ramon Gordillo Entlo 3 E VALENCIA 10 Tel 361 1354 361 1358 CM CSP SWEDEN Hewlett Packard Sverige AB Enighetsvagen 3 Fack P O Box 20502 S 16120 BROMMA Tet 08 730 0550 Telex 854 10721 MESSAGES Cable MEASUREMENTS STOCKHOLM A CM CP EMS P Hewteti Packard Sverige AB Sunnanvagen 14K 5 222286 LUND Tel 46 13 69 79 Telex 854 1072 1 via BROMMA office CM CS Hewlett Packard Sverige AB Vastra Vintergalan 9 S 70344 OREBRO Tel 19 10 48 80 Telex 854 10721 via BROMMA office CM CS Hewlett Packard Sverige AB Frotallisgatan 30 S 42 132 VASTRA FROLUNDA Tel 031 49 09 50 Telex 1854 10721 via BROMMA office CM CS E P SWITZERLAND Hewlet Packard Schweiz AG Clarastrasse 12 CH 4058 BASLE Tet 61 33 59 20
109. LL SWEEP 4 10 if the SWEEP TYPE is CW or AMPTD the menu con sists of the following FREQ STEP SIZE If the SWEEP TYPE is ALTERNATE different frequen cy parameters may be entered for each of the two ac tive traces See SWEEP TYPE ALTERNATE START FREQ is a softkey used to enter data for the sweep start frequency To enter a new start frequency 1 Press the FREQ hardkey to display the menu 2 Press the START FREQ softkey if label is not bright 3 Modify the value with the knob or arrow keys OR 3 Enter a new value with the numeric key pad 4 Select units from the menu press a softkey STOP FREQ is a softkey used in the same manner as START FREQ for entering data for the sweep stop fre quency The START and STOP FREQ values appear below the graticule CENTER FREQ is a softkey used in the same manner as START and STOP FREQ for entering data for the sweep center frequency There is no defined center fre quency when the SWEEP TYPE is LOG FREQ CW or AMPTD The START and STOP information below the graticule changes to CENTER and SPAN when either of the latter two are selected FREQ SPAN is a softkey used in the same manner as START FREQ for entering data for the frequency span represented by the graticule There is no frequency span when the when the SWEEP TYPE is LOG FREQ CW or AMPTD If the frequency span is 0 Hz and sweep time is less than 1000 seconds the marker position reads in units of time CENTER
110. LOT NO INPUTS ARE TRIPPED NO KEYBOARD ATTACHED NO LISTENER ON BUS NO RESPONSE FROM FP NO STORE amp DISP IN POLAR NON NUMERIC DATA RECEIVED NOT ALLOWED IN ALT SWP NOT ALLOWED IN LOG SWP NOTHING TO PLOT NUMBER OUT OF RANGE ONLY SMALLER FCNTS ALLOWED OSCILLATOR UNLOCKED APPENDIX DESCRIPTION E HP IB Code sent to HP 3577A for a data entry suffix is not appropriate for prefix parameter or instrument state The front panel key buffer can hold 6 key presses for processing When in MANUAL sweep mode and ALTERNATE sweep type with trace one active and trace two is not off this error message appears if MKR MAN FREQ is used This is permitted only for trace two in this situation HP IB Command issued over the bus is not allowed if the label does not appear in the menu during local operation it cannot be used over the bus e g Smith chart in a rectangular display function Cannot use MKR OFST SPAN if the OFFSET MARKER is OFF Request to plot one of the markers or execute a MKR gt operation but the marker is not on A memory hardware failure has occured and the in struments states which had been saved have been lost The test run on the port between the Main Processor and the Fast Processor has failed Hardware failure For more details see the Service Manual HP IB Request to plot characters that have been turn ed off HP IB Comma not aliowed in trace arithmetic HP IB Req
111. LY FCTN and then DELAY The softkey DELAY changes to read DELAY APERT when pressed Pressing this key displays the list of apertures in the menu area Large apertures have more of a smoothing effect on the trace than smaller apertures SPAN 40 000 000Hz DELAY APER 400 0Mz Ad d n Figure 4911 Delay aperture is somewhat dependent upon sweep res olution a softkey in the FREQ menu When sweep res olution is 201 the delay aperture cannot be less than 1 of span The HP 3577A automatically changes aper ture from 596 to the larger value when sweep resolu tion is changed Aperture is increased to 296 when a sweep resolution of 101 is selected and is increased again to 4 when sweep resolution becomes 51 See the example for SWEEP RES under the FREQ hardkey ENTRY BLOCK Figure 4 12 REFERENCE entered or modified Any time a new menu is select ed and the active bright softkey label is a data entry item its current value appears in the upper center por tion of the screen If the selected trace is changed to 2 and trace 2 is off no message appears Example Trace 1 Press SCALE hardkey REF LEVEL 0 000dBm ER heidi This input on the rear panel allows the HP 3577A to be connected to an external frequency reference When a signal is present on this input the EXT REF LED in the upper right hand corner of the front panel lights The HP 3577A phaselocks to signals from 7 dBm to 15 dBm at any frequency that i
112. M CS MS Hewlet Packard Co 3 Crossways Park West WOODBURY NY 11797 Tet 516 92 1 0300 Telex 510 22 1 2183 ACM CP E MS North Carolina Hewlett Packard Co P O Box 15579 2905 Guess Road 27705 DURHAM NC 27704 Tel 919 47 1 8466 C M SUPPOF 11 OFFICES Hewlet Packard Co 5605 Roanne Way GREENSBORO NC 27409 Tel 819 852 1800 A CM CP EMS Ohio Hewlett Packard Co 9920 Carver Road CINCINNATI OH 45242 Tet 513 891 9870 CM CP MS Hewlett Packard Co 16500 Sprague Road CLEVELAND OH 44 130 Tek 216 243 7300 Telex 810 423 9430 ACMCP E MS Hewletl Packard Co 962 Crupper ve COLUMBUS OH 43229 Tel 614 436 1041 CM CP E Hewlett Packard Co 330 Progress Rd DAYTON OH 45449 Tel 813 859 8202 A CM CP E MS Oklahoma Hewlett Packard Co P O Box 366 1503 W Gore Blvd Suite 2 LAWTON OK 73502 Tel 405 248 4248 C Hewlett Packard Co P O Box 32008 304 N Meridan Avenue Suite A OKLAHOMA CITY OK 73107 Tel 405 946 9499 A CM CP E MS Hewiett Packard Co Sule 121 9920 E 42nd Street TULSA OK 74145 Tel 918 665 3300 A CM CS M Oregon Hewlett Packard Co 1500 Valley River Drive Suile 330 EUGENE OR 97491 Tel 503 683 8075 C Hewietl Packard Co 9255 S W Pioneer Court WILSONVILLE OR 97070 Tet 503 682 8000 A CM CP E MS Pennsylvania Hewietl Packard Co 1021 8th Avenue King of Prussia Industrial Park KiNG O
113. MARKER Softkey described previousiy SEARCH Data entry Softkey selection of units Softkey searches right for target value The OFFSET information above MKR l l M R TARG the graticule contains the 3 dB bandwidth for this filter See Figure 2920 Shape factor may now be calculated Figure 2 20 3 dB Bandwidth REF LEVEL DIV OFFSET 14 80 000Hz MKR e 0 000d8 10 000d8 MAGIUDF 0 202 dB R TARG A e ILLU IRI i a a UA ee A AAA Y YAA 7 RRENEN PITT ry CENTER 70 000 000 000Hz SPAN 100 000 S AMPTD 0 0d8m Shape Factor 60 dB BW 58 500 3 97 3 dB BW 14 750 2 21 MAKING MEASUREMENTS PASSBAND RIPPLE BANDPASS FILTER The next measurement is passband ripple To make this measurement ALTERNATE SWEEP wili be employed to retain the frequency span given to trace one while viewing a narrower span with trace two When ALTERNATE SWEEP TYPE is selected trace two starts out with preset values This means another measurement set up is required for trace two as follows KEY SWEEP TYPE ALTERNTE SWEEP o pisPiY FCIN 2 22 DESCRIPTION Hardkey in the SOURCE section used to display the menu of softkeys which select the type of sweep Softkey used to select ALTERNATE sweep This feature allows each trace to have different values for START amp STOP or CENTER amp SPAN fre quencies AMPTD SWP TIME and RES BW Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMA
114. MAT ON 80 OUTPUT QNa IPR SM2 TKM atray2 0 50 array of 401x2 elements Na Network Analyzer TKM take measurement 3 17 REMOTE OPERATION 85 90 95 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 KRRKKREEEAKAR AA KEKE kkk KARA kkk EERE AK ERE EK KEE ERE KEKE E e e A A A o do Ao ER RRA Ro A ko ARRE FMT the ASCII data format I OUTPUT Na fem DTI 0 DTI dump trace one ENTER QNa Real a rra C PAUSE Real array1 now contains 401 real numbers from trace one KARE ARR ARE eoe cde ne RE RRA eo EKRAEAE eR CA A o ARR eK RRR ERR RRR RRR RRR e c dede ce de ce o hc kk A kk FM2 64 bit floating point binary HP Series 200 computer real number data format Next dump trace two using FM2 Note the use of reduced sweep res Enter the leading bytes 1 into array elements 0 amp 1 NTER Na USING 2 B Real arrayZ 0 Real artav2 1 Prepare for a Series 200 internal real number format i f i i i OUTPUT QNa RST TKM FM2Z DT2 Rail 51 pts span EN data transfer and perform the entry ASSIGN Na FORMAT OFF FORMAT must be OFF ENTER Na Real__array2 to use data format FM2 ASSIGN Na FORMAT ON Note that array elements PAUSE RRE RRA RARA
115. Maximum Output Power with 3577A Source Output Level at 15 dBm Output with direct through Test Ports 1 2 Ports A B R i consecuen tor rans rsson Or a short oR D circuit for reflection at 32967 ZA 2dBm gt 4 dBm tes ports 35677B 4 dBm 16 dBm vi x GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION This section is designed to get the first time user ready to make measurements To do this the HP 3577A must be configured and fused for the available line voltage and safely connected to the power line before it is turned on As the CRT warms up a self test is run that sounds the beeper illuminates all the front panel LED s and tests internal RAM and ROM By the time the CRT is warm enough to display a screen normal operation has begun Approximately ten minutes after power is turned on the beeper will sound again as the oven reference reaches operating temperature and switches in as the frequency reference for the HP 3577A Network Analyzer After the detailed turn on procedure is a definition of some of the terms commonly used in this manual and some operating hints to help the new user establish good operating habits IN CASE OF TROUBLE is included under operating hints INSTRUMENT TURN ON A Before connecting ac power to the HP 35774 1 Set the rear panel VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch to the position that corresponds to the power line voltage to be used Voltage Selector Line Voltage 115V 86V to 127V at
116. N This green hardkey in the INSTRUMENT STATE section of the front panel presets 3577A parameters to their defauit values These are listed under INSTRUMENT PRESET in the REFERENCE section of this manual Note that the INPUT menu is displayed Softkey used to select receiver input A as the INPUT definition for the active trace Note that the LED above the TRACE 1 hardkey is il luminated indicating that trace one is active The screen should now appear as shown in Figure 292 Figure 2 2 Log Magnitude of L REF LEVEL DIV MARKER 100 000 000 000Hz Input A 0 000dBm 0 000dB y MAG A 18 480dBm TH Block EPA wit 2 mm EE EET Bi NE GE T A CR UR UN LI ILLA Yt tw E BS I D Pl CITE E LLL wem Eo spo mr Source Output b START O 000Hz STOP 200 000 000 000Hz COPY Signal Level AMPTD 10 0dBm Tre Sei Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section that selects trace two as TRACE 2 the active trace Note that the INPUT menu shows that INPUT R is ac tive for trace two Note that trace one and its alphanumeric informa tion above the graticule dimmed slightly when trace two was selected Softkey that selects receiver input A as the active INPUT for trace two When this key was pressed the beeper sounded and the screen message WARNING TRACE IS OFF appeared gem 3 Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section that displays a new menu ECIN listing the seven possible display function formats available for each trace
117. N 30 20 RESUME 7 SEND 7 selects the HP IB interface at address seven UNL unlisten unaddresses all listeners MTA my talk address controller addresses itself to talk this command wil also unaddress all talkers LISTEN 11 addresses device at address eleven to listen DATA PLA outputs the characters in quotes on the HP IB UNL unlisten MTA my talk address TALK 11 addresses device at address eleven to talk LISTEN 30 addresses device at address thirty to listen DATA releases the bus for the data transfer Series 200 RESUME 7 releases the bus for the data transfer Series 80 If the HP 3577A is unaddressed as the talker by the bus controller during a plot the plotting process can be resumed if the HP 3577A is readdressed to talk and was NOT addressed to listen with a byte transmitted in the interim It is the responsibility of the bus controller to transmit its UNTALK command so that the handshake in progress is completed and data is not lost Actions that will terminate a PLOT are addressing the HP 3577A to LISTEN and sending a data byte sending a Univer sal Clear sending a Selective Device Clear or an in valid handshake If the plot is aborted via the HP IB the plotter pen is left in the carriage at its most recent position If the plot is aborted from the front panel the pen is returned to its stall and the carriage moved to the P1 position allowing full view of the plot on p
118. N female 3b5677B 75 f Type N female DC Bias Inputs BNC female rear panel DC Bias Range lypically 30 Vdc and 20 mA with some degradation of RF specifications 200 mA damage level Accessories included 4 ea 190 mmt7 5 in 50 Q cables with Type N male connectors for connection to 3D77A HP Part No 8120 4387 1 ea Test Set interconnect cable to 3577A HP Part No 35677 61620 1 ea Hear Panel Lock Foot Kit HP Part No 5061 0099 1 ea Service Manual HP Part No 35677 90010 Recommended Accessories 35677A 356784 50 Q Type N Calibra tion Kit 35679A 50 Q Type N Test Port Extension Cables 35677B 35678B 75 Q Type N Calibra tion Kit 35679B 75 Q Type N Test Port Extension Cables Programming The 35677A B are completely controlled through the 3577A using the 3577A interconnect cable All programming is accomplished through the 3577A HP iB interface Power All power is obtained through the 3577A interconnect cable Weight 6 kg 13 Ibs net 12 kg 12 lbs shipping Dimensions 90 mm H x 426 mm W x 584 mm D 3 5 in x 16 75 in x 22 75 in Add 1 1 8 inch to depth to include front panel connectors Note operation information included in 3577A Operation Manual HP Part No 03577 90000 Product Line Sales Support Key d Key Product Line A Analylicai CM Components C Computer Systems CP Computer Systems Primary Service Responsible Office SRO CS Computer Systems Secondary SRO Electronic in
119. NAPOLI Tel 081 7413544 A CM CS E Hewlett Packard italiana S p A Viale G Modugno 33 i 16156 GENOVA PEGLI Tel 010 68 37 07 E C Hewlett Packard Haliana S p A Via Turazza 14 I 35100 PADOVA Tel 49 664888 Telex 430315 A CM CS E MS Hewlelt Packard ftaliana S p A Viale C Pavese 340 I 00 144 ROMA Tel 06 54831 Telex 610514 A CM CS E MS P Hewlett Packard italiana S p A Corso Giovanni Lanza 94 t 10133 TORINO Tei 011 682245 659308 Telex 22 1079 CM CS E JAPAN Yokogawa Hewletl Packard Lid Inoue Building 1348 3 Asahi cho ATSUGI Kanagawa 243 Tei 0462 24 0451 CM C E Yokogawa Hewletl Packard Lid 3 30 18 Tsuruya cho Kanagawa ku Yokohama Shi KANAGAWA 221 tel 045 312 1252 Telex 382 3204 YHP YOK OM CS E Yokogawa Hewleti Packard Ltd Sannomiya Daiichi Seimer Bidg 54 69 Kyo Machi ikuta Ku KOBE CITY 650 Japan Tek 078 392 4791 CE Yok ogawa Hewielt Packard Ltd Kumagaya Asahi Yasoji Bidg Ar 4 3 Chome Tsukuba KUMAGAYA Saitama 360 Tel 0485 24 6563 CM CS E Yokogawa Hewlett Packard Lid Milo Mitsui Building 4 73 San no maru 1 chome MITO Ibaragi 310 Tel 0292 25 7470 CM CS E Yokogawa Hewlelt Packard Ltd Sumitomo Seimei Bldg 11 2 Shimo sasajima cho Nak amura ku NAGOYA Aichi 456 Tel 052 581 1850 CM CS E MS Yokogawa Hewlett Packard Ltd Chuo Bidg 41h Floor 5 4 20 Nishinakajima 5 chome Yodogawa ku Osaka shi OSAKA 532 T
120. NED EO BEFORE INPUT COMPLETE EXPECTED Fl FP CANNOT ACCESS TRACE MEM FP CNTR RCVR FAILURE FP LOGIC FAILURE FAST PROC NOT GRANTINC BUS FP SELF TEST PASSED FP MP COMMUNICATION ERROR FRONT PANEL DECODING ERROR FRONT PANEL KEY STUCK ILLEGAL 47 RECEIVED ILLEGAL SYMBOL INCOMPATIBLE DISPLAY FCTNS INCOMP TESTSET POSITIONS Trc__ chgd to agree with __ INP MUST BE A B R A R B R INP SHOULD BE USER DEFINED INPUT S _ TRIPPED INVALID EXPRESSION INVALID HPIB COMMAND INVALED LEARN MODE DATA INVALID START ADDRESS DESCRIPTION E Hardware failure E For more details refer to the Service Manual W An extremely small number has been rounded to zero E Data entered has too many characters Limit is 17 E Keys in the numeric key pad have been pressed when no data entry softkey is active n the menu E HP 1B End Or Identify asserted indicating end of data when more data was expected E HP 1B In the binary format data to be loaded should be preceded by the characters 1 E Hardware failure E Hardware failure of either the Fast Processor counter or a receiver input channel E Fast Processor hardware failure E Hardware failure E For more details see the Service Manual E Hardware failure E Hardware failure E One of the front panel keys has been depressed for ten seconds or more or is stuck E HPAB is a special character and may only be used for its intended function E User define
121. Note that trace two is OFF Softkey used to select the phase display function for the active trace PHASE Pressing this key turns trace two on and defines its display function to be phase Note that trace two is brighter than trace one This difference in trace intensity and the LEDs above the TRACE hardkeys indicate which trace is active Any softkey commands given or data entered will affect the active trace Note that when trace two was turned on another set of alphanumeric information appeared above the graticule This in formation applies to trace two and is the same intensity as the trace 2 4 Figure 2 3 Log Magnitude and Phase of input A Trace 2 information Trace 2 Ref Level TUNED STUB NOTCH FILTER MAKING MEASUREMENTS The screen should now appear as shown in Figure 293 REF LEVEL DIV MARKER 100 000 0006 000Hz 0 000dHs 10 00048 19 iB0cfm 0 0dep 435 000deg 000 000 000H2 7 96 90ideog START 0 000Hx AMPTD 10 0dBm Hardkey in the SOURCE section used to display the FREQUENCY menu Note that the softkey label START FREQ is active Since this is the parameter to be modified selection of a softkey parameter is not necessary Data entry done with the numeric key pad in the DATA ENTRY section Softkey used to select units for the data entry Softkey used to select the stop frequency parameter for modification or data entry of a new value Data entry done with the numeric key pad in the DATA ENTR
122. OP EMP P Hewletl Packard Canada Ltd 1020 Morrison Drive OTTAWA Ontario K2H 8K7 Tet 613 820 6483 Telex 610 563 1636 A CM CP E MSP Quebec Hewlett Packard Canada Ltd 17500 South Service Road Trans Canada Highway KIRKLAND Quebec H9J 2M5 Tel 514 697 4232 Telex 610 422 3022 A CM CP E MP P CHILE Jorge Calcagni y Cia Lida Arturo Burhle 065 Casilla 16475 SANTIAGO Tet 220222 Telex JCALCAGNI A CHEM Olympia Chile Ltd Rodrico de Araya 1045 Casilla 256 V SANTIAGO 21 Tet 25 50 44 Telex 40 565 CP COLOMBIA instrumentaci n HA Langebaek amp Kier SA Apartado A reo 6287 BOGOTA 1 DE Carrera 7 No 48 75 BOGOTA 2 D Tet 287 8877 Telex 44400 Cable AAR S Bogota ACM EM P COSTA RICA Cientifica Costarticense SA Avenida 2 Calle 5 San Pedro de Montes de Oca Apartado 10159 SAN JOS Tet 24 38 20 24 08 19 Telex 2367 GALGUR Cable GALGUR CHEM CYPRUS Telerexa Ltd PO Box 4809 14C Stassinas Avenue NICOSIA Tel 45628 Telex 2894 EMP CZECHOSLOVAKIA Hewlett Packard Obchodni Zastupitelstvi v CSSA Post schranka 27 CS 118 01 PRAHA 011 Tet 66 296 Telex 121353 IHC a DENMARK Hewlett Packard A S Datave 52 DK 3460 BIRKEROD Tel 02 81 66 40 Telex 37409 hpas dk A CM CP E MS P Hewlett Packard A S Navervej 1 DK 8600 SILKEBORG Tel 06 82 7 1 56 Telex 37409 hpas dk CM CS E ECUABOR CYEDE Cia Lida DO Box 6423 CC Avenida Eloy
123. PE if label is not bright 4 Modify the value with the knob or arrow keys OR 4 Enter a new value with the numeric key pad 5 Press the UNITS softkey TRACE 2 LINETYPE is a softkey used to select plotter line type for trace 2 as described for trace 1 above The default value for TRACE 2 LINETYPE is 7 solid TRACE 1 PEN NUMBER is a softkey used to select the plotter pen number for trace 1 This pen is also used to plot the alphanumeric information associated with trace 1 The default value for TRACE 1 PEN NUMBER is 1 PEN NUMBER is modified in the same manner as LINETYPE The range of pen numbers is 0 8 TRACE 2 PEN NUMBER is a softkey used to select the plotter pen number for trace 2 as described for trace 1 The default value for TRACE 2 PEN NUMBER is 2 PEN NUMBER is modified in the same manner as LINE TYPE in the range 0 8 GRATICULE PEN NUMBER is a softkey used to select the plotter pen number for the graticule and any alpha numeric information that is associated with both traces This information includes REF DIV start and stop or center and span frequencies when not in AL TERNATE SWEEP TYPE and source amplitude when not in ALTERNATE or LOG SWEEP TYPE In AL TERNATE SWEEP the frequency information is as sociated with a specific trace so pen numbers selected by trace are used and amplitude information does not appear in LOG FREQ SWEEP amplitude information does not appear at the bottom of the screen The de
124. Packard GmbH Technisches B ro B biingen Herrenberger Strasse 110 D 7030 BOBLINGEN Tei 070311 667 t Telex 07265739 bbn or 07265743 A CM CP E MP P Hewlelt Packard GmbH Technisches B ro Dusseldort Emanuel Leutze Strasse 1 D 4000 BUSSELDORF Tel 02 1 11 5971 1 Telex 085 86 533 hpdd d A CM CP E MS P Hewlett Packard GmbH Verltiebszentrale Frankfurt Berner Strasse 117 Postfach 560 140 D 6000 FRANKFURT 56 Tei 0611 50 04 1 Telex 64 13249 hpffm d A CM CP E MP P Hewlelt Packard GmbH Technisches B ro Hamburg Kapstadtring 5 D 2000 HAMBURG 50 Tel 040 63804 1 Telex 21 63 032 hphh d A CM CP EMS P Hewletl Packard GmbH Technisches Biro Hannover Am Grossmarki 6 D 3000 HANNOVER 91 Tek 0511 46 60 01 Telex 092 3259 A CM CS E MS P Hewiett Packard GmbH Technisches B ro Mannheim Rosslauer Weg 2 4 D 6800 MANNHEIM Tel 621 70050 Telex 0482105 ACE Hewlett Packard GmbH Technisches B ro Neu Uim Messerschmiltstrasse 7 D 79810 NEU ULM Tek Telex GE Hewlett Packard GmbH Technisches B ro N rmberg Neumeyerstrasse 90 D 8500 NURNBERG Tei 0911 56 30 83 Telex 0623 860 CM CS E MS P Hewiett Packard GmbH Technisches B ro M nchen Eschensirasse 5 D 802 1 TAUFKIRCHEN Tet 0891 6117 1 Teiex 0524985 A CM CP E MS P GREAT BRITAIN Hewlett Packard Lid Trafalgar House Navigation Road ALTRINCHAM Chesire WA 14 1NU Tel 061 928 6422 Telex 668068 AGEM Hewlett Packard Ltd Oa
125. R TEST SET E HP IB Text string for ENA or ENM is too long E Hardware failure E HP IB Enter Graphics code too long Memory is limited to 924 16 bit commands W One or both traces were group delay and the user selected a SWEEP TYPE that does not allow group delay This message is accompanied by a message that DELAY IN LIN ALT SWEEP ONLY Not LOG CW or AMPTD E Hardware failure E For more details refer to the Service Manual E HP IB Received text in quotes with no prior command such as enter annotation E The user defined math equation is in error There must be as many opening as closing parenthesis W Only the arrow keys in the data entry section or the KNOB may be used to move the marker W HP IB Data load in the binary format is waiting for the starting sequence 1 W HPAB Waiting for a data receiving device to handshake W HP IB Load ready and waiting for input data W This message appears when an operation is performed with the active trace OFF warning the user who may be trying to modify parameters for the wrong trace C 5 C 6 Le Meet E WC F H D H H A PE ZS uL P DISPLAY FORMAT Function TRACE 1 TRACE 2 DISPLAY FUNCTION Log Magnitude Linear Magnitude Phase Polar Real Imaginary Delay Trace Off Delay Aperture menu Aperture 5 of span Aperture 1 of span Aperture 2 of span Aperture 4 of span Aperture 8 of span
126. RM Free Run TG1 Line Trigger TG2 External Trigger TG3 Immediate TG4 SWEEP TRIGGER TRG TRG SWEEP RESET RESET RST SOURCE SUFFIX UNITS dBm DBM dBV rms DBV Volt rms V milii Volt rms MV micro Volt rms UV nano Voit rms NV seconds SEC milliseconds MSC MHz MHZ KHz KHZ Hz HZ exponent E RECEIVER Function HP iB code RESOLUTION BW RBW Resolution BW 1 Hz BWT Resolution BW 10 Hz BW2 Resolution BW 100 Hz BW3 Resolution BW 1 kHz BWA4 Auto Bandwidth Off AUG Auto Bandwidth On AUT AVERAGE AVE Averaging Off AVO N 4 AVI N 8 AV2 N 16 AV3 N 32 AV4 N 64 AYS N 128 AV6 N 256 AV7 ATTENUATION ATT Attenuation R 0 dB AR1 Attenuation R 20 dB AR2 Attenuation A 0 dB AAI Attenuation A 20 dB AA2 Attenuation B O0 dB ABI Attenuation B 20 dB AB2 Impedance R 509 IR 1 Impedance R 1 MQ IR2 Impedance A 502 iA Impedance A 1 MQ A2 Impedance B 50 Q IB 1 Impedance B 1 MQ iB2 Clear Trip Receiver CTR LENGTH LEN Length R entry LNR Length R Off LRO Length R On LR1 Use not required This code s only function is to display a menu if but diagnostics are on APPENDIX D Length A entry LNA Length A Off LAO Length A On LA1 Length B entry LNB Length B Off i BO Length B On LB1 Length Step Size entry LNS RECEIVER SUFFIX UNITS meters MET centimeters CM seconds SEC milliseconds MSC microseconds USC nanoseconds NSC exponent E INSTRUMENT STATE Function HP IB Code SPECIAL FUN
127. Raymond Chanas F 38320 EYBENS Tel 76 25 81 41 Telex 980124 HP GRENOB EYBE CM CS Hewlett Packard France B limen Amp re Rue de la Commune de Paris Boite Postale 300 F 93153 LE BLANC MESNIL Tet 01 865 44 52 Teiex 211032F CM CP E MS Hewlett Packard France Le Montesquieu venue du President JF Kennedy F 33700 MERIGNAC Tel 56 34 00 84 Telex 550 105F CM OP EMS Hewlett Packard France 32 Rue Lothaire F 57000 METZ Tel 87 65 53 50 CM CS Hewlett Packard France F 91947 Les Ulis C dexORSAY Tet 1 907 78 25 Telex 600048F ACM CP EMP P Hewlett Packard France Paris Porte Mailiot 13 15 25 Boulevard De 1 Amiral Bruix F 75782 PARIS C dex 16 Tel 01 502 12 20 Telex 613663F CM CD MSP Hewlett Packard France 2 Allee de la Bourgonetle F 35100 RENNES Tel 99 51 42 44 Telex 7409 12F CM CS E MS P Hewielt Packard France 4 Rue Thomas Mann Boite Postaie 56 F 67200 STRASBOURG Tel 88 28 56 46 Telex 89014 1F CM CS E MS P Hewlell Pack ard France 20 Chemin de la C pi re F 31081 TOULOUSE C dex Tek 61 40 11 12 Telex 531639F ACM CS E P Hewlett Packard France Bureau de Vente de Lille immeubie P ricentre Rue Van Gogh F 59650 VILLENEUVE D ASQ Tek 20 91 4 4 25 Telex 150124F CM CS E MS P GERMAN FEDERAL REPUBLIC Hewleit Packard GmbH Technisches B ro Berlin Keithstrasse 2 4 D 1000 BERLIN 30 Tel 030 24 90 86 Telex 018 3405 hpbin d A OM CS E X M P Hewlett
128. STUB NOTCH FILTER SAVE INSTRUMENT STATE KEY ANERER Figure 2 10 Save Instrument State Menu SAVE REG 1 3419 DESCRIPTION Hardkey in the INSTRUMENT STATE section used to display the menu used to save state into one of five state registers This menu will appear as shown in Figure 2910 AA TAE A d Mari i A A PAA RA FULL SCALE 100 00mV MARKER 75 872 B00 000Hz PHASE REF O O0deg MAG 01 1 4108mV REF POSN 0 0deg PHASE D1 84 548deg START 1 000 000 000Hz AMPTD 11 00d8m Softkey selection of instrument state register one Note screen message INSTRUMENT STATE SAVED This state may be recalled by press ing the RECALL hardkey and then pressing the RECALL REG 1 softkey Cycling power or presetting the instrument will not affect this memory register BANDPASS FILTER MAKING MEASUREMENTS NDPASS FILTER Connect the filter to the HP 3577A as shown in Figure 2811 The bandpass filter used in this exam ple has a center frequency of 70 MHz but the methods are the same for any bandpass filter Figure 2 11 The purpose of this measurement exercise is to demonstrate the use of the HP 3577A Network Analyzer to characterize a passband filter The general organization is Set up the measurement Measure the 60 dB and 3 dB bandwidths calculate the shape factor Measure the passband ripple Measure the passband insertion phase Measure the passband group delay db Lu Pl sch This meas
129. Softkey selection of units for the data entry Hardkey in the SOURCE section Data entry Softkey selection of units for the data entry Hardkey in the RECEIVER section Softkey used to reset a tripped RECEIVER INPUT DO ghe mene MAKING MEASURE e the DISPLAY FORMAT Section used to display the MEASUREMENY A IBRATION menu USER Replace th ACTION SWee es trace in data efinition divided Store would have an see in the entry Also note that the marker 21 to MAG UDP E defined function USER ACTION O De the old If trace two had een active th TT YOU press the INP hard block tha INP ey you c efinition is B R D d iS the abbrevia T section Ww Te 80ing to Change on reference level and Scale DIV Softkey S election Of uni top of th 8raticule do MOVed fr om the rom the bottom MAKING MEASUREMENTS AMPLIFIER S PARAMETERS Data entry Softkey selection of units for the data entry dB Now trace one is completely set up Next we ll turn on trace two as phase information and set it up Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section pisPLY Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey used to turn trace two on and make it phase information PHASE Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section COR Softkey used to copy the INPUT definition for trace one into trace two Tre 1 2 Note that the ENTRY BLOCK shows trace two INPUT to be B R D1 This equation
130. T or STORE The trace arithmetic capabilities of the HP 3577A make complicated error corrections or special conversions easy See MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION for examples 4 6 NOTE Pressing INSTR PRESET or cycling the power switch redetines all user defined functions Be sure to SAVE instrument state if you wish to retain the USER DEFINED FUNCTIONS RECALL OLD STATE may be used to recover the user defined functions as they were defined when power was last turned off or in case of power failure DISPLAY FORMAT DISPLAY FORMAT Figure 4 8 DISPLAY FORMAT is one of five front panel sections The hardkeys in this section display menus of softkeys used to INPUT define screen trace in terms of re ceiver inputs stored data user de fined constants and user defined functions DISPLAY define screen trace in terms of how FCTN the complex data is interpreted LOG MAG PHASE GROUP DELAY etc SCALE define graticule scale REF LEVEL DIV etc MKR marker read data from the displayed trace MKR marker goes into enter data using die the position of the marker STORE DATA MEASR normalize or do partial two term CAL or full three term error correction of one port measurements store complex data as defined under the INPUT hardkey DEFINE MATH define three constants and five functions Figure 4 9 DISPLAY FUNCTION is a hardkey in the DISPLAY FOR MAT section of the front panel used
131. T section used to select trace two as the active trace Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey used to select B R as the INPUT definition for the active trace Note the warning message on the screen that this trace is off Next we ll turn it on in the DISPLAY FUNCTION menu Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section used to select the DISPLAY FUNCTION of the active trace Note that OFF is bright in the menu indicating that trace two is off Softkey used to select LOG MAGNITUDE as the DISPLAY FUNCTION for trace two effectively turning the trace on All parameters for trace two revert to default parameters including AMPTD 10 dBm Since AMPTD 0 dBm for trace one the HP 3577A will change the amplitude OUTPUT level at the beginning of each sweep Note clicking of amplitude relays The HP 35774 uses relays in the output circuit to deter mine output amplitude If left running in a state that switches these relays regularly the instrument will TIME OUT switch to SINGLE SWEEP MODE after five minutes to reduce relay wear See SWEEP MODE SINGLE in the REFERENCE section Hardkey in the SOURCE section Data entry CENTER FREQ SWEEP TYPE SWP DIR UP DOWN BANDPASS FILTER MAKING MEASUREMENTS Softkey selection of units for the data entry The clicking of the output relays will stop when the amplitudes of the two traces are set equal Hardkey in the SOURCE section Softkey used to select the CENTER FREQUENCY para
132. TERNTE SWEEP AMPTD amplitude PINE TL SWEBRP esses ATTEN attenuation AUTO RBW ON OFF AUTO SCALE riae teo BEEPER ON OFF oi C TREO STEF iba Boren eens CENTER FREQ Aa orare eb CLEAR TRIP receiver CLEAR TRIP source CONF TESE iade toda CONFIG PLOT ue Roe CONTINUOUS SWEEP o ext Bases diet COPY TiC A uso EEN d MR ne aed Sata ee DATA REG DEFAULT SETUP plot DEFINE FUNCTION ocea DELAY GROUP ss ios DELAY APERTURE oh DISPLAY HPB aa DISPLAY MEM TEST EXT trigger FAST BUS INTERFACE TEST FASTPROC TEST erra FREE RUN trigger FREQ OFFSET ue cite S FREQ SPAN iiie bib dh PULL SCALE I orc as FUEL SWEEP oso leaked GRAT PEN NUM ses GROUP DELAY ic ote es HP IB ADDRESS HP IB SIG ANAL LE EE IMMEDIATE trigger IMPEDANCE 50911 M A S s acra YE e EENGTE ON OFP are sul SOFTKEY INDEX SOFTKEY page LEVELING ON OFF 5a eese ra 4 31 LIN FREQ SWEEP 434 LIN MAG linear magnitude 4 7 EINE trigger 132426 betas 4 36 LOG FREQ SWEEP veris 4 34 LOG MAG log magnitude 4 7 MAG OFPSET oa e 416 MANUAL sweep mode 4 33 MANUAL FREQ 4 33 MARKER MPRI 416 MARKER OFFSET ues 4 16 MARKER ON OFF ociosas 4 15 MARKER POS 4 ugeet edo tes 4 15 MARKER SEARCH EE 4 17 MARKER FARGET aaau 4 1
133. TLING time is the time that the source holds at the START frequency before beginning the sweep This is done to allow the SOURCE amplitude and filters time to stabilize before starting the measurement While the HP 3577A is settling the SETTLE LED is illuminated The SETTLING time is 22 ms for a 1 kHz bandwidth and pro gressively longer for narrower bandwidths see Resolu tion Bandwidth in the Reference section SETTLING time changes automatically uniess the user chooses to turn it off using the SPCL FCTN key There is no rigorous method for selecting SWEEP TIME given RES BW too much depends on the response time of the device under test The filters of the HP 3577A have a finite response time as does the circuit being tested If the SWEEP TIME is too short there is not enough time to allow both to respond fully to each sampled frequency When the SWEEP DIRECTION is UP i e increasing frequency the default condition this phenomena is evident as a skewing of the trace to the right The object is to make an accurate measurement with as short a SWEEP TIME as possible There are several ways to decide whether or not the SWEEP TIME is too small 1 Increment increase the SWEEP TIME and look for a change in the trace shape If there is then the previous SWEEP TIME was too small Continue incrementing un til no change is seen 2 Reverse the SWEEP DIRECTION when the sweep dot is on the steepest part of the response If the SWEEP TIME
134. Y section Softkey used to select units for the data entry Hardkey in the SOURCE section used to display the AMPLITUDE menu Note that the softkey label AMPTD is active Since this is the parameter to be modified selection of a softkey parameter is not necessary Note that the ENTRY BLOCK shows the current value of this parameter is 10 dBm Down arrow key in the DATA ENTRY section used to decrement the active parameter by the STEP SIZE Note that the value in the ENTRY BLOCK and the alphanumerics at the lower left corner of the graticule show that the source amplitude is now 11 dBm i e STEP SIZE is 1 dB 2 5 MAKING MEASUREMENTS TUNED STUB NOTCH FILTER Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section that selects trace one as the active trace Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section that displays the SCALE parameter menu Softkey selection that selects scale parameters such that the active trace will fit in the graticule The screen should now appear as shown in Figure 294 Figure 2 4 Changing Source REF LEVEL DiV MARKER 75 500 000 O00Hz AUTO i0 000dBm 8 000dB MAG IA 44 085 SCALE 0 0deg 45 000dep MARKER 75 500 000 ooo PHASE A 29 and Scale Parameter Values CITE IL a Se CONTAC EZ prm ae me i LEVE EVEL MERE mc o o ER T MES ATA m tt ie eee gt REF LINE OM ON OFF COPY Sci 292 Note new parameter A hc values for both traces START 4 000 ad GOGH
135. a only To avoid electrical shock do not perform any servicing pro MAKING MEASUREMENTS This section contains step by step instructions demonstrating the use of the HP 3577A Network Analyzer and the HP 35677A B S Parameter Test Set to make measurements Using the HP 35774 by itself characterize 1 A tuned stub notch filter a Measurement set up b Using the marker to make measurements c STORE trace data d SAVE Instrument State A bandpass filter a Measurement set up b Measure 60 dB and 3 dB bandwidths calculate shape factor c Measure passband ripple d Measure passband insertion phase e Measure passband group delay Gain compression of an amplifier Measurement set up b Meas re 3 dB gain compression point Using the HP 35677A B S Parameter Test Set with the HP 35774 characterize 4 A low pass filter a Measurement set up b Measure insertion loss C Measure passband insertion phase d Measure passband ripple e Measure stopband rejection rs x US P ed re S parameters of an amplifier uns d dd a Initial measurement set up b Measure S forward gain and phase Measure S reverse loss Measure input return loss Measure S output reflection coefficient Conversion of reflection coefficient to complex impedance mob o O This list of measurements was selected to cover topics of general interest and common usage such that most of the capabilities of the
136. ad BANGKOK Tel 234 8670 234 867 1 234 8672 Cable BUSIQUIPT Bangkok D TRINIDAD amp TOBAGO Caribbean Telecoms Ltd HO Box 732 50 A Jerningham Avenue PORT OF SPAIN Tet 624 42 13 624 42 14 A CM E MP TUNISIA Tunisie lectronique 31 Avenue de la Liberte TUNIS Tel 280 144 EP Corema ler Av de Carthage TUNIS Tel 253 821 Telex 12319 CABAM TN M TURKEY Feknim Company Lid Hiza Sah Pehievi Caddesi No 7 Kavaklidere ANKARA Tel 275800 Telex 42155 E EMA Muhendislik Kolektif Sirketi Mediha Eldem Sokak 41 6 YUksel Caddesi ANKARA Tel 17 56 22 Cable Ematrade M UNITED ARAB EMIRATES Emitac Ltd PO Box 1641 SHARJAH Tet 354121 354 123 Telex 68136 EMPE UNITED KINGDOM See GREAT BRITAIN NORTHERN IRELAND SCOTLAND UNITED STATES Alabama Hewletl Packard Co 700 Century Park South Suite 128 BIRMINGHAM AL 35226 Tet 205 822 6802 CMCS MP Hewletl Packard Co P O Box 4207 8290 Whitesburg Drive SE HUNTSVILLE AL 35802 Tet 205 881 4591 CMCP EM Alaska Hewlett Packard Co 1577 C Street Suite 252 ANCHORAGE AK 99510 Tet 206 454 397 1 CMCS Arizona Hewlett Packard Co 2336 East Magnolia Street PHOENIX AZ 85034 Tek 1602 273 8000 A CM CP E MS Hewlett Packard Co 2424 East Aragon Road TUCSON AZ 85702 Tet 602 889 4631 CM ESEMS Arkansas Hewlett Packard Co P O Box 5646 Brady Station LITTLE ROCK AR 72215 Tel 501 376 1
137. and When the DEFINE F key is pressed the entry block shows the equation being defined and the menu changes to a selection of the first term to be used This list includes the three in put channels R A and B the four data registers D A the three constants K the other functions only lower numbered functions may be used to define this function and parenthesis to be used in constructing the equation When a softkey is pressed the menu changes to the list of math functions or if K__ F__ or D was the first selection a list of numbers to finish describing the term The menu continues to change as the equation is built and the entry block shows what is being entered If er rors are made they may be erased by backspacing over them When finished one of the softkey labels should allow the function to be ENTERed Character strings may not be longer than 17 if longer strings are neces sary you may divide them among as many user defined functions as necessary and then define an INPUT equa tion with them See MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION for an example The default constant and function defini tions are listed in the following table Ki 1 0 0 0 F1 B R K1 B R K2 50 00j F2 A R K3 75 0j F3 K1 F2 K1 F2 F4 K2 F3 F5 K3 F3 When the function is ENTERed there is no change in the trace unless the INPUT is a function of the term just defined This new USER DEFINED FUNCTION may now be used in a user defined INPU
138. ardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT used to select trace one as the ac tive trace making it and its alphanumeric information above the screen bright The markers may be used to measure reverse loss and reverse phase angle See Figure 2940 REF LEVEL DIV MARKER 100 9350 AE 000Hz 926 000d amp 8 2 000dR MAG UDF 30 88048 50 00008e6 0 000deg MARKER 100 230 000 o00Hz 40 2485dep MARKER OFFSET FREG OFFSET MKA CP ON OFF START 800 000 000Hz AMPTO O 0dBm STOP 200 000 200 000Hz INPUT RETURN LOSS Next input reflection will be examined This is possible through the use of the directional bridges of the HP 35677A B S Parameter Test Set In this example full one port calibration using three term error correction is employed for maximum measurement accuracy KEY ONE PORT FULL CAL 2 46 DESCRIPTION Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey selection of S parameter 41 as the INPUT Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey Note the screen message LEAVE PORT 1 OPEN See Figure 2941 AMPLIFIER S PARAMETERS MAKING MEASUREMENTS n AAA La MR A I E E E EE Figure 2 4 Screen Messages Fuli Calibration H REF LEVEL niv MARKER 100 250 000 000Hz EE 28 000d amp 8 2 00008 MAG 311 198 562d8 CA 52 000deg 40 000deg MAAKEA 100 286 000 000Hz p epo START BOO 000 000Hz STOP 200 000 000 000Hz AMPTD O 0dBm Disconnect the device under test from its input cable Softkey After
139. ast turned off RCL OLD STATE To use this feature 1 Press the RECALL hardkey to display the menu 2 Press the softkey corresponding to the instrument state you wish to recall If SAVE and RECALL hardkeys are held down when power is turned on a special test of all main processor non volatile memory is run that is not part of the regular power on test These two keys must be held down until the test messages begin appearing on the screen One message should be TOTAL RAM TEST NON VOLATILE MEMORY LOST This test erases all main processor memory resetting INSTRUMENT STATE PLOT parameters and the HP IB to default parameters For the HP IB this means that TALK ONLY is OFF and the bus address is 11 This test may be used if the HP 3577A won t respond to key presses and INSTRUMENT PRESET and cycling power has not cleared the problem RECEIVER Figure 4 38 The RECEIVER section is one of five front panel sec tions This section has four hardkeys which allow the user to control resolution bandwidth vector averaging attenuation impedance and length for each of the three receiver inputs For more information on the in dividual hardkey refer to the item of interest i E 5 ALE L E T S de pM E VU E I REFERENCE AUTO ABW ON OFF Figure 4039 RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH is a hardkey in the RE CEIVER front panel section used to display the menu of softkeys shown above These softkeys may be used to select one of
140. ault value of the MARKER TARGET is 10 01 dBm without a test set and 3 dB with a test set To use this feature 1 Press the MKR hardkey to display a menu 2 Press the MARKER SEARCH softkey to display the second menu 3 Press the MKR L TARG softkey if the target value does not exist to the left of the marker the screen message TARGET VALUE NOT FOUND appears and the marker does not change posi tion If the value exists in more than one bin the marker moves to the closest bin containing the target value The bin value is not necessarily exactly equal to the tar get value Refer to the marker information block above the graticule MARKER TARGET is a softkey used to enter a value to search for with the marker The default value of the TARGET is 10 01 dBm without a test set and 3 dB with a test set To use this feature 1 Press the MKR hardkey to display a menu 2 Press the MARKER SEARCH softkey to display the second menu 3 Modify the value with the knob or arrow keys OR 3 Enter a new value with the numeric key pad 4 Select units from the menu press a softkey RETURN is a softkey that displays the previous menu This may also be done by pressing the MKR hardkey When the DISPLAY FUNCTION is POLAR the MKR menu appears with different softkey labels than when the DISPLAY FUNCTION is one of the rectangular for mats as shown in Figure 4824C The following discus sions of softkey features assume that t
141. ay function Default SCALE parameters for PHASE are REF LEVEL 0 0 deg IDIV 45 deg REF POS 50 To use this feature select the trace you wish to be a phase trace by pressing either the TRACE 1 or TRACE 2 hardkey press the DSPLY FCTN hardkey and then press the PHASE softkey The selected trace is now phase information POLAR is a softkey used to display trace information in a polar format In the polar format only one trace is displayed so if both traces are on in a rectangular format when polar is selected the non active trace is turned off The active trace is indicated by the LEDs over the TRACE 1 and TRACE 2 hardkeys The polar format changes the menu listings of the SCALE MKR and MKR hardkeys as shown in Figure 4910 REAL is a softkey used to define the y axis as real The unit of measure for the real and imaginary display func tions is volts When this display function is selected the HP 3577A displays the real half of the complex data stored in trace memory See Appendix A on Data Pro cessing and Structure 4 7 REFERENCE MARKER POSN MARKER ON OFF REF LEVEL DIY ZERO MARKER REF POSN MKA OFST ON OFF REF LINE ON OFF MARKER OFFSET COPY SMITH CH BCL 204 ON OFF FREG OFFSET PHASE HKA CPL ON OFF Figure 4 10 IMAGINARY is a softkey used to define the y axis as imaginary The unit of measure for the imaginary and real displ
142. ay functions is volts When this display func tion is selected the HP 3577A displays the imaginary half of the complex data stored in trace memory DELAY GROUP is a softkey used to select group delay as the display function When selected this softkey label changes to DELAY APERTURE DELAY APERTURE activates a menu which allows the user to change the delay aperture Choosing a display function selects the math used to interpret the data in trace memory as the selected func tion The data collected during the sweep does not de pend on which function is selected How the data is col lected is determined by the source and receiver settings See DATA PROCESSING AND STRUCTURE in Ap pendix A The DELAY display function does not exist in the DISPLAY FUNCTION menu if the sweep type is LOG SWEEP AMPLITUDE SWEEP CW or if the sweep mode is MANUAL Group delay is the derivative of phase with respect to frequency d df In the HP 3577A this is approximated by using the function AG Af X 360 The user selects the DELAY APERTURE Af in of span frequency from a menu The HP 35774 calculates the change in phase for the specified aperture and divide Ad by Af x 360 The point plotted is between data points used to cal culate it For example the group delay for 100 Hz may 4 8 MKA orar ON OFF MARKER POSN MARKER ON OFF ZERO i MARKER MKR MKR o CENTER CENTER MAG
143. becomes D4 NOTE Because this feature writes to a data register information stored there is overwritten and lost 4 32 SWEEP MODE Y m Hi end SS cic cano dit i o 0000 eS SINGLE SINGLE MANUAL MANUAL FREQ MKA MANUAL Figure 4 49 SWEEP MODE is a hardkey in the SOURCE section used to display the menus of softkeys shown above These softkeys may be used to select CONTINUOUS SINGLE or MANUAL sweeps The default selection is CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS is a softkey that selects a sweep mode which starts a new sweep after each sweep completion The TRIG RESET hardkey resets the sweep in progress after which settling takes place and the next sweep begins For more information on settling time refer to RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH vet sweeps once each time the HP 3577A is triggered To use this feature press SWP MODE hardkey and then the SINGLE softkey The sweep in progress continues ibut no new sweep begins when the current sweep ends The WAIT TRIG LED illuminates until the TRIG RESET hardkey is pressed to start a new sweep The j TRIG RESET hardkey may also be used to stop a sweep in SINGLE SWEEP MODE Ze Le Settling is done for the next sweep immediately upon completion of the present sweep Thus the sweep begins without delay on the next ES key press if the SETTLE LED is dark MANUAL is a softkey used to sweep the display man uaily using the knob or the arrow keys To use thi
144. ce is in error off frequency by more than one bin at the end of the sweep for a linear sweep or at arbitrary points in a log sweep Increasing the span or decreasing the sweep time is recommended DELAY APERTURE is limited by the selection of SWEEP RESOLUTION in the FREQ menu Coarse sweep resolution prohibits the use of small delay aper tures This message appears when the user tries to select a smaller aperture This message appears when a center frequency and frequency span are selected such that the equivalent start or stop frequencies would be less than 0 Hz or greater than 200 MHz The sweep time has been increased automatically to allow enough time to do the required math processing Hardware failure Hardware failure HP 1B The HP 3577A has been manually set to TALKONLY probably to plot When addressed the HP 3577A must listen even though the softkey setting is TALKONLY MESSAGE TARGET VALUE NOT FOUND TEST SET RELAY TIMEOUT TEXT STRING TOO LONG TIMER INTERRUPT FAILURE TOO MANY GRAPHICS COMMANDS TRACE HAS BEEN TURNED OFF or TRC 4 2 ARE NOW TURNED OFF TRACE MEMORY TEST FAILED TRACE MEMORY TEST PASSED UNEXPECTED TEXT STRING UNMATCHED AND UP DOWN OR KNOB ONLY WAITING FOR WAITING FOR DATA TRANSFER WAITING FOR INPUT DATA WARNING TRACE 15 OFF APPENDIX C DESCRIPTION W A marker search did not find a the target value F Same timeout as described for AMPLITUDE SWEEP See S PARAMETE
145. ce output and receiver inputs and the ability to save and recall six instrument states The HP 3577A is composed of three main functional blocks SOURCE RECEIVER and DISPLAY FORMAT The source and receivers work together to gather data and store it in trace memory The display section takes the trace data and formats it for viewing This instrument was carefully inspected both mechanically and electricaily before shipment It should be free of mars and scratches and in perfect electrical order upon receipt To confirm this inspect the instrument for physical damage incurred in transit inventory the supplied accessories listed in Table Seil and test the electrical performance using the Confidence Test listed in the section on Getting Started If there is physical damage if the contents are incomplete or if the instrument does not pass the Confidence Test notify the nearest HP Sales and Service Office If the shipping container is damaged or the cushioning material shows signs of stress notify the car rier as well as the Hewlett Packard office Keep the shipping material for the carrier s inspection WARNING A The integrity of the protective earth ground may be interrupted if the B HP 3577A is mechanically damaged Under no circumstance should the HP 3577A be connected to power if it is damaged 3977A NETWORK ANALYZER Display Measurement Functions Log magnitude ERN Ha Characteristics i nea
146. cessing done up to this point This data is then processed according to the definition of DISPLAY FUNCTION resulting in a high precision floating point scalar number This number is stored in main memory for readout as MARKER data The same number is then processed according to the SCALE definitions for place ment on the display These two scalar numbers provide 1 a trace that stays within the boundaries of the AA APPENDIX A Marr m Cet bin ista from inputs R A amp amp B UE eee EE Store data j e trace ment ji reg R A B Ee ES Remember E bin number Dn Display Func Store data processing in trace mem creates scale a reg D1 02 D3 D4 Store floating Pt ht precision H RETTEN for MKR data oil R estore bin no NO increment 1 pi bin pointer Plot pt 1 on screen D Figure A 1 vemm APPENDIX B To enter display graphics under remote control display commands must be issued to the 1345A display module using the ENA 3577A HP IB code as described in this quick reference For more details refer to the Operation Section of the 1345 Service Manual or the Designers Manual for the 1345A Digital Display Module number 01345 90902 1345A QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE 13454 COMMANDS NOTE Bit D15 is used only for vector memory board commands For standard 1345A commands DIS should be Y 1345A 16 Bit Data Word MER LS8 Dts Di3lpi2 011
147. changes SWEEP MODE to SINGLE changes the menu to SWP MODE and the WAIT TRIG LED il luminates The user may trigger single sweeps with the TRIG RESET key or change the sweep mode back to continuous for another five minutes of uninterrupted operation Time out extends the life of the HP 3577A and HP 35677A B relays To use this feature 1 set up trace 1 parameters input display function frequency source amplitude scale sweep time and resolution bandwidth 2 Turn on trace 2 by pressing hardkeys TRACE 2 DSPLY FCTN and selecting any menu item use of POLAR turns trace 1 off Trace 2 turns on having the same start stop frequencies amplitude band width and sweep time as trace 1 and both traces are swept simultaneously 3 Press SWEEP TYPE hardkey and ALTERNTE SWEEP softkey Trace 2 parameters revert to their previous settings if the HP 3577A was just preset these are the default parameters This allows the ALTERNATE SWEEP trace to be turned off and back on without losing trace parameters 4 Enter the new parameters for trace 2 LOG FREQ SWEEP is a softkey that selects a log scale for the horizontal axis of the display The logarithmic graticule has frequency values listed across the bottom of the screen The graticule changes as the START and STOP frequencies are changed When the ratio of STOP FREQ START FREQ is less than four the graticule changes back to a linear scale When LOG FREQ SWEEP is active the FREQ men
148. cord A record is com posed of data and an end of record terminator When loading data the HP 3577A accepts commas CR and LF as delimiters between data points No end of record symbol is required the instrument will respond to EOL No more than one delimiter is allowed between numbers CR LF is considered a single delimiter Spaces between and within numbers will be ignored FM2 is the 64 bit floating point binary specified by IEEE draft standard P754 This is the same data format used by the HP Series 200 computers This format appears as follows m H M MAP UN lt hal ai ta i V SEFEEEEEEEEEMEFF FFFEFFEFFEFFFEEF EFEEFFFEFFFFEFFF FFFFFEFEFEFEFFEL where M is the most significant bit of the fractional part F is an intermediate fractional bit L is the least significant fractional bit S is the sign bit of the fractional part E is the exponent part and Misa i The exponent is offset by 127 i e 127 0 This format represents 1 fff All ones for f s represents 2 0 i e normalized to 2 FM3 is the 32 bit floating point binary used by the HP 3577A fast processor This format appears as follows MFEPEPREFEEEFEFEEF SFFEEEFFLEEEEEEEE where M is the most significant bit of the fractional part F is an intermediate fract
149. d ENTRY modes of the knob where CEO MARKER and CET ENTRY REMOTE OPERATION SOURCE SOURCE SUFFIX UNITS dBm DBM E Function HP IB code dBV rms DBV Voit rms V SWEEP TYPE STY milli Volt rms MV Linear Sweep STI micro Volt rms UV Alternate Sweep ST2 nano Volt rms NV Log Sweep ST3 seconds SEC Amplitude Sweep ST4 milliseconds MSC Cw ale MHz MHZ Sweep Direction Up SUP bis KHZ Sweep Direction Down SDN Hz HZ SWEEP MODE SMD SEHR E Continuous SM1 Single swees SM2 STEP TIME SMT is a data entry prefix for sample time Manual Sweep SM3 used for amplitude sweeps The default value for this Manual Frequency entry MFR parameter is 0 05 seconds per step Manual Amplitude entry MAM Marker Manual MTM Example SWEEP TIME STM 10 OUTPUT 711 ST4 SMT 1 SEC ST4 is amptd sweep Sweep Time entry SWT Step Time entry SMT SAMPLE TIME MSR is a data entry prefix for sample Y p Sample Time entry MSR time for the manual sweep mode and CW sweep type FREQUENCY FRQ The defauit value for this parameter is 0 05 seconds per Source Frequency entry SFR sample Start Frequency entry FRA Stop Frequency entry FRB Example Center Frequency entry FRC 10 OUTPUT 711 SM3 MSR 1 SEC SM3 Manual sweep mode Frequency Span entry FRS didis ir ui SIS FREQUENCY STEP SIZE FST is a data entry prefix us Sweep Resolution menu SRL Eie Wo Re bi pissnan RSI ed oniy when the source is operated at a single frequen Freq Sw
150. d corner of the screen See Figure 2834 AGF LEVEL DIV MARKER 81 0566 575 800Hz AUTO 0 0600dB 0 50088 MAG 924 3 280dB8 SCALE HA BRUN HHSC AAN EEH mm REF LINE CTT ON GEF HHI 8 8 348 SE tt EH iam eg 100 000 E STOP 54 one 575 800Hz Hardkey in the DATA ENTRY section that clears the screen of the ENTRY BLOCK and the menu This key may be used to disable data entry so that unintentional rotation of the knob in ENTRY mode does not modify a parameter The marker may be used to measure the passband ripple The knob must be in MARKER mode to for it to be used to move the marker see the LEDs above the knob Note that the up and down arrow keys may also be used to move the marker LOW PASS FILTER MAKING MEASUREMENTS STOPBAND REJECTION KEY MARKER SEARCH MKR L TARG RETURN MKR START Hu DESCRIPTION Hardkey in the SOURCE section Softkey used to select stop frequency as the parameter for data entry Data entry Softkey used to select units for data entry Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey Note that the target value is 3 dB Softkey used to move the marker left to the 3 dB point This point wiH be used as the start frequency for sweeping the stopband Softkey used to return to the primary menu Softkey used to redefine the START FREQ as the present marker posi tion frequency Note that the graticule frequency scale changed from log to linea
151. d for plotting Cleared by a serial poll if it is unmasked or upon B1 being set Any status bit that is unmasked will cause an SRQ and set RQS when the condition it represents is true As long as the condition is true the bit will stay set The bit will reset when the condition has cleared and the instrument is serially polled Any status bit that is masked will follow the condition it represents resetting without a serial poll whenever the con dition clears MASKING THE STATUS BYTE A service request will be generated when any unmasked bit in the status byte becomes set The SRQ mask may be loaded by sending SQM followed by the mask byte in ASCII The mask byte definition is as follows Q 1 B7 not used B6 RQS not maskable B5 Error mask B5 enable B5 SRQ B4 Ready mask BA enable B4 SRQ B3 Key SRQ mask B3 enable B3 SRQ B2 MEAS DONE mask B2 enable B2 SRQ B1 DATA AVAIL mask B1 enable B1 SRQ BO XFER DONE mask BO enable BO SRQ Ae in the default instrument state SQM 0 all bits masked Pressing INSTR PRESET or sending IPR over the bus will set SOM 0 The user may choose the level of screen message that sets the SRQ line and which level of message appears with DMS by selecting one of the following four modes ERO Nothing will be reported ER1 Only errors will be reported ER2 Errors and warnings will be reported ER3 Errors warnings and messages will be reported Th
152. d math equation entry that is not a legal symbol E Attempt to COPY SCALE between traces when display functions units are incompatible W Incompatible S parameter test set positions trace changed to agree with trace number 2 or 1 i e the HP 35677A B can t be configured forward and reverse at the same time so the INPUT of the other trace has been changed E For NORMALIZATION the INPUT must be defined as one of these RECEIVER input expressions E HP IB Set INPUT to be USER DEF before attempting to directly change the configuration of the S parameter test set over the bus E One or more of the RECEIVER channels has switched to 1 MQ impedance The message indicates which receiver inputs have tripped This message is accom panied by a message to Clear trip on ATTEN menu E User defined equation not valid such as A R More common for HP IB than front panel entries E HP IB Code sent to HP 3577A not a valid HP 3577A HP IB Code E HP 1B The checksum of the instrument state just load ed is incorrect possibly because the attempted to modify instrument state data outside the HP 3577A E HP IB Start address for ENG must be an integer bet ween 0 and 923 MESSAGE INVALID SUFFIX KEY BUFFER FULL KEY NOT APPLICABLE KEY NOT IN MENU MARKER OFFSET IS OFF MARKER IS OFF MEM FAIL SAVED STATES LOST MP FP PORT TEST FAILED MP FP PORT TEST PASSED NO CHARACTERS TO PLOT NO COMMA IN TRACE ARITH NO GRATICULE TO P
153. d such the user may select which bits cause the HP 3577A to set the SRQ line see the Status Byte TRIGGER The HP 3577A responds to the TRIGGER bus command GET group execute trigger as it would to any other external trigger by beginning a sweep or in the case of CW SWEEP TYPE or MANUAL SWEEP MODE tak ing a measurement TRIGGER may be sent to a selected d vice or all devices addressed to l sten on the HP IB The HP 3577A must be addressed to listen and in the WAIT TRIG state before the trigger message is sent if the last statement left the HP 3577A addressed to listen and settling is complete it s ready for a trigger if not or if several devices are to be triggered simultaneously a SEND command may be used to ad dress the listeners See Bit B4 of The Status Byte Examples for HP Series 200 computers in BASIC SEND 7 UNL MTA LISTEN 11 17 22 TRIGGER 7 UNL UNLISTEN unaddresses all listeners MTA MY TALK ADDRESS the controller ad dresses itself to talk LISTEN 11 17 22 addresses devices whose addresses are 11 17 and 22 to listen Another example ASSIGN Listeners TO 702 707 711 TRIGGER Listeners DEVICE DEPENDENT COMMANDS In the Data Mode special codes known as device dependent commands may be placed on the HP IB These commands have meaning for a specific instru ment They can configure the instrument tell itto take a measurement dump or load data or define error reporting conditions a
154. d the marker information block above the graticule contains OFFSET information The OFFSET MARKER becomes the reference for the regular marker MARKER OFFSET ON OFF is a softkey used to turn on the OFFSET MARKER at the values represented by the MARKER OFFSET magnitude and FREQ OFFSET parameters This is a push push toggle type softkey When ON the triangular OFFSET MARKER appears on 4 15 REFERENCE the screen if its coordinates are on scale and the word MARKER changes to OFFSET in the marker block above the graticule MARKER OFFSET is a softkey used to enter a reference value for the Y axis of the OFFSET MARKER The default value for MARKER OFFSET is 0 0 dBm To change this value 1 Press the MKR hardkey to display the menu 2 Press the MARKER OFFSET softkey if label is not bright 3 Modify the data with the knob or arrow keys OR 3 Enter a new value with the numeric key pad 4 Select units from the menu press a softkey FREQUENCY OFFSET is a softkey that allows the user to enter a reference value for the X axis of the OFFSET MARKER The default value for FREQUENCY OFFSET is O Hz in a frequency sweep When SWEEP TYPE is AMPLITUDE this softkey label reads AMPLITUDE OFFSET This parameter may be modified in the same manner as MAGNITUDE OFFSET MARKER COUPLING ONJOFF is a push push toggle type softkey used when two traces are on In the default setting ON both markers move together when the knob is rotated
155. decreased the noise level in the stopband by the same amount Noise may be reduced further by using higher source amplitudes and or selec ting a receiver attenuation of 0 dB as long as the input is not overdriven in the passband Before removing the 20 dB receiver attenuator from input B check for a maximum signal level of 20 dBm on input B by pressing 1 hardkey INPUT 2 softkey B 3 hardkey MKR 4 softkey MKR max read level in marker info block at top of screen Change the INPUT definition back to B R by pressing 5 hardkey INPUT 6 softkey B R Select 0 dB attenuation by pressing 7 hardkey ATTEN 8 softkey ATTEN B 0 dB 20 dB These steps were taken and the results appear in Figure 2815 for comparison with Figure 2914 Figure 2915 Optimizing REF LEVEL DIV MARKER B8 985 500 000Hz ATTEN R Dynamic Range 0 00048 10 000dB MAG B R 5 749dB oda 2048 ATTEN A OodB 20dB ATTEN B ods 20dB IMPED A 500 Ma IMPED A 509 1M IMPED B Bon ima CENTER 70 000 000 000H2 SPAN 100 000 000rtz CLEAR AMP TO O 0dBm TAIP Hardkey in the RECEIVER section used to display the four possible selections for RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH Note that the current selec tion is 1 kHz Softkey used to select a RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH of 100 Hz Hardkey in the SOURCE section used to select a new time Any time resolu tion bandwidth is reduced an increase in sweep time may be required See OPTIMIZING SWEEP TIME in Appendix A
156. device and ignore other bus commands The HP 3577A will respond to the following commands as described The three letter com mand abbreviations refer to IEEE 488 nomenclature Abort Input Output IFC interface clear is an uncon ditional assumption of control of the bus by the system controller All bus activity halts and the HP 3577A becomes unaddressed This does not clear the HP 3577A HP IB command buffer Example for HP Series 200 computers in BASIC ABORT 7 This command removes all devices from the local lockout mode and returns them to local front panel control The only difference between this bus message and the LOCAL message is how it is addressed Example for HP Series 200 computers in BASIC LOCAL 7 Clears LOCAL LOCKOUT and enables front panel keys Pee bee a o DEVICE CLEAR The CLEAR command may be addressed SDC selected device clear or unaddressed DCL device clear When this command is received by the HP 3577A it will clear the HP IB command buffer reset the SRQ line if pulled low by the HP3577A and abort any data input or output This interrupts bus activity and gains control of the analyzer no matter what it may be doing It does not preset the 3577A It is good practice to begin programs with this command See the examples that follow REMOTE OPERATION Examples for HP Series 200 computers in BASIC CLEAR 7 UDC clears all devices on computer port seven CLEAR 711 SDC clears dev
157. dicator LED labeled REMOTE is not illuminated It is possi ble that the instrument has been addressed over the bus in which case it will not respond to front panel operation until LOCAL control is restored with the LCL hardkey or via a controller issued comand The LCL key will not restore LOCAL status if the controller has issued a LOCAL LOCKOUT command i b Press the INSTR PRESET hardkey C Turn the 3577A power OFF and back ON NOTE The test described in the following step will reset i e erase all non volatile read write memory on the main processor board This resets all six instrument states plot parameters and the HP IB parameters d to thei It parameters dy d If none of the previous steps have returned control to the front panel 1 turn power OFF 2 hold down the SAVE and RECALL hardkeys and 3 turn power ON Continue to hold the keys down until all power on tests are complete This procedure will test parts of the main processor memory not normally tested and may reset a bad memory register allowing normal operation to continue e Contact an authorized repair facility GETTING STARTED CONFIDENCE TEST The 3577A may be confidence tested with the following keystrokes Use this test when the instru ment is first unpackaged to ensure that the instrument is in an undamaged condition or whenever a quick check of basic operation parameters is necessary KEY DESCRIPTION Hardkey in the INSTRUMENT ST
158. dt amp Co Hong Kong Ltd Wing On Centre 28th Floor Connaught Road C HONG KONG Tel 5 455644 Telex 74766 SCHMX HX AM ICELAND Elding Trading Company inc Hafnarnvoli Tryggvagotu P O Box 895 IS REYKJAVIK lef 1 58 20 1 63 03 M INDIA Blue Star Ltd Shavdeep Stadium Road AHMEDABAD 380 014 Tel 42932 Telex 012 234 Cable BLUEFROST E Blue Star Ltd 17 Magarath Road BANGALORE 560 025 Tel 55668 Telex 0845 430 Cable BLUESTAR A CHCE Blue Star Ltd band Box House Prabhadevi BOMBAY 400 025 Tel 422 3101 Telex 011 3751 Cable BLUFSTAR AM Blue Star Ltd Sahas 4 14 2 Vir Savarkar Marg Prabhadevi BOMBAY 400 025 Tei 422 6155 Telex 011 4093 Cable FROSTBLUE ACM C EM Blue Star Lid 7 Hare Street CALCUTTA 700 001 Pet 12 01 31 Telex 021 7655 Cable BLUESTAR AM Blue Star Lid Meenakshi Mandiram XXXXV 1379 2 M G Road COCHIN 682 0 16 Tel 32069 Telex 085 514 Cable BLUESTAR A Blue Star Lid 133 Kodambakkam High Road MADRAS 600 034 Tet 82057 Telex 04 1 379 Cable BLUESTAR A M Blue Star Lid Bhandati House 7th 8th Floors 91 Nehru Place NEW DELHI 110 024 Tei 682547 Telex 031 2463 Cable BLUESTAR ACM CEM Blue Star Ltd 1 1 117 1 Sarojini Devi Road SECUNDERABAD 500 033 Tet 70126 Telex 0155 459 Cable BLUEFROST At Blue Star Ltd l F C 7 603 Poornima Maruthankuzhi TRIVANDRUM 695 013 Tel 65799 Telex 0884 259 Cable BLUESTAR
159. e 4 5 DATA ENTRY is a section of the front panel used for entering or modifying data It contains a numeric key pad increment decrement arrow keys a BACKSPACE key ENTRY OFF key and the knob If new entries are made with the keypad units must be entered with the softkeys at the right side of the screen before the new entry is complete The BACKSPACE key is used to correct data entries or trace arithmetic equations When the backspace key is pressed the cursor in the entry block text in the upper right corner of the screen backs up one space erasing that character If an error is made in the data entry the HP 3577A displays a screen message and beeps the original entry is not erased The new entry must be backspaced over before new data may be en tered Another alternative is to begin again with the hardkey This replaces your data in the entry block with the current definition of the parameter ENTRY OFF is used to keep the knob from changing an ENTRY value or to clear the screen of menus and mes sages The graticule and all characters are displayed at low intensity and the trace s are bright The KNOB is used in one of two modes to move the MARKER or for continuous ENTRY i e data modifica tion It toggles between these two modes when the key above it is pressed Two LEDs marked MARKER and ENTRY show which mode the knob is in When preset the knob is in the MARKER mode It is good operating practice to keep it in
160. e 595 HP IB Interfacing The instruments should also be protected from temperature extremes which cause condensation Original Packaging Containers and materials equivalent to those used in factory packaging are available through Hewlett Packard offices If the instrument is being re turned to Hewlett Packard for service attach a tag in dicating the type of service required return address model number and full serial number Also mark the container FRAGILE to ensure careful handling In any correspondence refer to the instrument by model num ber and full serial number Other Packaging The following general instructions should be followed for repackaging with commercially available materials a Wrap the instrument in heavy paper or anti static plastic If the instrument is being shipped to a Hewlett Packard office or service center attach a tag to the instrument indicating type of service required return address model number and full serial number b Use a strong shipping container A double wall car ton made of 350 pound test material is adequate each other or the threads of either or both will be destroyed The 35774 contains metric threaded HP IB cable mounting studs as opposed to English threads Metric threaded hp 10833A B C or D HP 1B cable lockscrews must be used to secure the cable to the instrument Identification of the two types of moun ting studs and lockscrews is made by their color English th
161. e default selection is ER1 If the error bit is unmasked the following conditions will pull SRQ regardless of the er ror reporting mode selected Input s tripped Input s overloaded Reference unlocked Source tripped 3 33 REMOTE OPERATION These two example programs are written for the HP Series 200 computers The first program demonstrates the fastest measurement technique for any display function except group delay with the appropriate changes in line 300 to way to make group delay measurements 10 This program demonstrates the fastest possible single 20 point CW measurements that the HP 3577A is capable of 30 i 40 ASSIGN Na TO 711 50 ASSIGN Na__nofmt TO 711 FORMAT OFF 60 Meas__complete 4 70 Pass 0 80 CLEAR Na initialize the bus 90 OUTPUT QNa IPR Preset the instrument 100 110 Turn characters and bus diagnostics off to improve speed 120 130 OUTPUT QNa CHG BD6 d 140 150 Set the data transfer format to 64 bit binary IEEE 160 170 OUTPUT 2Na FM2 180 190 Select single sweep mode to improve speed 200 210 OUTPUT QNa SMJ2 220 230 Select CW sweep type fastest method for making single 240 point measurements 250 260 OUTPUT QNa ST5 270 280 Set up measurement conditions 290 o 300 OUTPUT ENa SAM 6 DBM TRI BW4 UDI B R TSE 310 Freg RND 2 00 8 Select a random frequency 320 OUTPUT QNa SFR Freq HZ 330 OUTPUT QNa IKM i
162. e has been no key pressed since the last CKB command a 1 will be returned The second number is the knob counter which contains a number between 15 and 15 negative numbers indicate counter clockwise rotation and positive numbers indicate clockwise rota tion Zero indicates no rotation The following exam ple shows how the CKB and the DKY commands are used Also refer to the example for ENTER MENU and ENTER ANNOTATION Example 10 OUTPUT 711 CKB 20 OUTPUT 711 DKY 30 ENTER 711 Key Knob 40 IF Key 1 AND Knob 0 THEN 20 50 DISP Key Key and Knob Knob 60 OUTPUT ah E CRB 70 GOTO 20 80 END Number Co P OC Va da v N em OD Key Name zero one two three four five Six seven eight nine decimai minus backspace softkey 1 top softkey 2 softkey 3 softkey 4 softkey 5 softkey 6 softkey 7 softkey 8 TRIG RESET ENTRY OFF LOCAL MARKER ENTRY KEY INCREMENT DECREMENT 49 TRACE 1 TRACE 2 FREQ AMPTD TRIG MODE SWEEP TYPE SWP MODE SWP TIME DEFINE MATH STORE DATA DISPLAY FCTN INPUT SCALE MKR MEASR CAL not used SAVE RECALL SPCL FCTN RES BW AVG ATTEN LENGTH PLOT MKR Enter two numbers 3 21 REMOTE OPERATION DUMP CHARACTERS DCH Dumps the alphanumeric characters on the screen to determine values of certain parameters Only information presently on the screen is returned on the bus As soon as the instrument is ad dressed to talk the
163. e operating hints and shows how to run the CONFIDENCE TEST The MEASUREMENT section describes the use of the HP 3577A Network Analyzer and the HP 35677 AJB S Parameter Test Set in making typical measurements on several common devices These measurements were selected as examples to cover topics of general interest in a manner that demonstrates the cap bilites of the HP 3577A and HP 35677AJB The REMOTE OPERATION section describes the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus and how it is used to operate the HP 3577A with a controller computer To use the HP 3577A under remote control first become acquainted with front panel operation and then refer to the REMOTE OPERATION section The REFERENCE section is an encyclopedia of front panel operation details This section is an alphabetical listing of front panel sections hardkeys and terms Each hardkey topic shows the menu of softkey labels it wili display on the screen and describes each softkey command in detail The Meet the HP 3577A foldout was designed as part of the front cover to wrap around the back of the manual so that it will be visible to the right of the manual This makes it available for reference while the rest of the manual is in use Before proceeding further it is recommended that the user read Installation in the General Infor mation section This reading covers initial inspection power requirements power cable and groun ding requirements installation for the HP 3577A a
164. ed data constants and or X E functions 1 O dBm to 110 dBm 0 dBm to 110 dBm Calibration Normalization and refiection 1 kHz O dBm to 80 dBm OG dBm to 95 dBm vector error correction removes effects of directivity frequency response and or source match Graphics HP 18 programmable alphanumeric and special characters and iine vectors Hard Copy O rect piots using an HP graphics plotter without a computer Save Recall Memory Front pane setups can be stored and recalled using any of the five non volatiie memories Note These levels shift 20 dB lower with 0 dB input attenuation Phase Range 180 deg Group Delay Range ps to 20 000 s Resolution Bandwidth 7 kHz 100 Hz IO Mz THE Dynamic Accuracy lin 1 kHz 100 Hz or 10 Hz resolution bandwidth Input Level Relative to 35677A B S PARAMETER TEST SETS Magnitude Phase Maximum Allowable Input Eraguancy anges TOO OD MES 0 04 dB 0 4 deg OdBto 10 dB KE 0 02dB 420 2 deg 10 dB to 50 dB 35677A 50 Q with gt 26 dB port match 0 05dB 0 5 deg 90 dB to 60 dB 356778 75 Q with gt 24 dB port match 0 15 dB 1 5 deg 60 dB to 80 dB Connectors 0 75 dB 7 5 deg 80 dB to 100 dB Input Port Output Ports A B R 50 Q i Dee Type N fernaie T Electrical Length 3 x 10 mto SOSTA Ed A Type N temale 3 x 109 rm of eguivalent electrica length 356778 75 Q Type N female at inputs A B and Directivity gt 40 dB Typical
165. ed or adhered to could result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the product The NOTE sign denotes important information It calls attention to procedure practice condition or the like which is essential to highlight instrument Description initial Inspection vi MSRP cruda rtorras tarada dob 4 15 Specifications at a CGlance e Vil Marker Measurement Calibration 4 18 GETTING STARTED MEDU a x Rotae dried REN ewe nad 44 Message Block em 4 21 Instrument Turn On ETE IP 1 1 Ge d e NAM MEL HEN C Definitions amp Operating Hit 1 3 Sie NS RH hoe need Wenn SonHdence Test eege dire dane ae Le Recall Instrument State 4 24 A ENEE 4 25 MEASUREMENT E MAKING SU 3 Resolution Bandwidth e 425 S Parameter Test ber 4 26 Save Instrument State coco 4 27 O beri Mut LE Sin te e troduction ou Cet ade C tb Bandpass EE EE 2 13 E a LOW Pass FIBI a a aa ie d o AA 2 39 Ma Source TM ace Special Functions Prid evanida beeen Ee ES 4 30 REMOTE OPERATION Store Data BS Nah A Peg ENEE 4 31 The Hewlett Packard Interface Bus 3 1 Sweep Mose emos e CREE De e PED e e The HP 3577A and the HPAB 3 2 Sweep MO ia ret Lh E hen dd ae a The HP 3577A s HP IB Address 3 4 O bu la ee 4 34 Bus Messages S Trace T T6682 saos sea idee bres rera O Instrument Preset Parameter Values ENEE 3 31 Trigger Mode i eee esee 436 The Status Byte T
166. egister D2 Binary data must be preceded by 7 80 OUTPUT Na USING amp W Integer array el 790 800 Register D1 now contains the data from Integer array 810 820 OUTPUT QNa TR2 IDT DF5 ASL Display D1 as phase DF5 830 840 END DUMP TRACE Traces may be dumped but not load ed A trace is made up of real numbers as defined under the INPUT and DISPLAY FUNCTION keys and will have the same number of data points as defined in the cur rent sweep resolution This data is dumped using any of the three data formats with the following units Absolute Units Relative Units eg INPUT R eg INPUT B R Display Function Hee PAPA PA PAN Phase trace data will be offset by the active Phase Reference Level Delay data will be meaningless in some of the beginning and end bins due to the nature of the measurement The number of bins affected will depend on the aperture and sweep resolution When the HP 3577A dumps a delay trace it will output large negative numbers in those bins whose data is thus af fected The example that follows shows how a trace may be dumped to the computer controller Log Mag dBV dB Lin Mag Voits Units Phase Degrees Degrees Polar Volts Units Delay Seconds Seconds Real Imag Volts Units Example 20 l De ce example demonstrating use of all three 30 data transfer formats 40 50 REAL Real array1 0 400 Real 60 INTEGER Integer array 0 1 0 400 70 ASSIGN Na TO 711 FOR
167. el 06 304 6021 Telex YHPOSA 523 3624 ACM CP E MP P Yokogawa Hewiett Packard Lid 29 21 Takaido Higashi 3 chome Suginami ku TOKYO 168 Tek 03 331 6111 Telex 232 2024 YHPTOK A CM CP E MP P JORDAN Mouasher Cousins Company DO Box 1387 AMMAN Tel 24907 39907 Telex 21456 SABCO JO EMP KOREA Samsung Electronics 4759 Shinkil 6 Dong Youngdeungpo Ku SEQUL Tei 8334311 8334312 Telex SAMSAN 27364 ACEMP KUWAIT Ai Khalidya Trading amp Contracting P O Box 830 Salat KUWAIT Tet 42 49 10 41 1726 Telex 2481 Areeg kt AEM Photo amp Cine Equipment HO Box 270 Salat KUWAIT Tet 42 2846 42 3801 Telex 2247 Malin D LUXEMBOURG Hewlett Packard Belgium S A N V Blvd de la Woluwe 100 Woluwedal B 1200 BRUSSELS Tet 02 762 32 00 Telex 23 494 paloben bru A CM CP EMP P MALAYSIA Hewlett Packard Sales Malaysia Sdn Bhd Suite 2 2 1 2 22 Bangunan Angkasa Raya Jalan Ampang KUALA LUMPUR Tel 483544 Telex MA31011 A CP E M P Protel Engineering Lot 319 Satok Rd P O Box 1917 KUCHING SARAWAK Tel 535 44 Telex MA 70904 Promal Cable Proteleng AE MEXICO Hewlett Packard Mexicana S A de G Y Avenida Periferico Sur No 6501 Tepepan Xochimilco MEXICO CITY 23 BF Tel 905 676 4600 Telex 017 74 507 ACP E MS P Hewiett Packard Mexicana S A de GV Rio Volga 600 Coionia del Vaile MONTERREY N L Tet 78 42 93 78 42 40 78 42 41 Telex 038 4 1
168. el ees e A ae ru egen aen el e GAS d e CM MM ERR aoe test oniv DIO 4 8 iUe e XD ux nu 1 oD ee IZOD omy MID Figure 3e1 Management CONTROL Lines REM troller to define how information on the data lines DIO 1 8 will be interpreted by the other devices on the bus When ATN is low true the HP IB is in Command Mode and the data lines carry bus com mands When ATN is false the HP IB is in Data Mode and the data lines carry device dependent com mands in the command mode the controller is ac tive and all other devices are waiting for instructions SRQ Service Request This line is set low true by any instrument requesting service BEN Remote Enable The system controller sets REN low and then addresses the devices to listen before they will operate under remote control aF Interface Clear Only the system controller can activate this line When IFC is set true all talkers listeners and active controllers go to their inactive states 3 2 OBEnd Or Identify This line is used to indicate the end of a multiple byte transfer sequence or in con junction with ATN to execute a parallel poiling sequence THE HP 3577A AND THE HP HP 3577A HP IB CAPABILITY As defined by IEEE Standard 488 1978 the HP 3577A has these characteristics SH1 complete Source Handshake capability AH1 complete Acceptor Handshake capability T5 Basic Talker serial poll
169. en an error is encountered When this occurs processing of all bus commands will halt for three seconds to allow the programmer to read the code that caused the error before processing con tinues and secondary errors are generated Gral i 82 is the same as BD1 except that the HP 3577A processes bus code at a reduced rate one command per second and all programming code received on the bus is left shifted through the screen error block NOTE The HP 3577A will interpret the carriage return CR as linefeed as and EO as Binary loads including the 41 and ASCII register loads are not shown on the screen NOTE The HP 3577A s HP IB buffer will hold a max imum of 100 characters If the controller tries to send more than 100 it will have to wait for the HP 3577A to process some of the code before sending more If the computer is waiting as just described and the HP3577A processes a dump command it will wait to be addressed to talk It is possible that both controller and HP 3577A could end up wating for each other halting all bus activi M iN DORNER DOR 3 3 REMOTE OPERATION L scht me S ee Anc n TALK LISTEN ADDRESSES Every HP 1B device has at least one address unless it s totally transparent or a Talk Only or Listen Only device Device addresses are used by the active controller in the COMMAND MODE ATN true to specify who talks via a Talk Address and who listens via Listen Ad dr
170. ept Hewlett Packard Graphic Language HP GL commands The HP 3577A must be configured in a Talk Only mode and the plot ter must be configured as a Listen Only device Refer to SPECIAL FUNCTIONS in the REFERENCE section HP B VERIFICATION Refer to the computer operating manual and find the section describing the HP IB REMOTE Message When this message is sent to the HP 3577A the REMOTE an nunciator LED on the front panel will light 1f this does not occur recheck the cabling the HP 3577A address and the syntax of the computer statement Here are some examples of the REMOTE message as im plemented by HP computers REMOTE 711 HP Series 80 Series 200 BASIC rem 711 HP 9825 Series 200 HPL REMOTE OPERATION The Bus Diagnostic Modes BD1 amp BD2 may be used to find HP IB program problems When active these modes cause the HP 3577A to display menus as though being operated from the front panel In BD2 the pro gramming code received by the HP 35774 over the bus will be left shifted through the screen error block in a ticker tape fashion BDO is the default mode Bus diagnostics are off no menus appear and bus codes are not displayed Sweep dot does not appear unless sweep time is 1 second or more This is the fastest programming mode tetas MURS BD1 displays all menus and updates the front panel as though the HP 3577A were being operated from the front panel The HP IB programming codes ap pear only wh
171. equally spaced bins in the sweep span but 201 101 or 51 points sweep may be selected for the sweep resolution Each bin is as wide as the selected resolution bandwidth and has associated with it a frequency number position information and measurement value Bins do not always overlap The process shown in the flow chart operates on one bin at a time Data is taken and a point plotted on the screen before the next bin is sampled The receiver s output values are complex numbers of the form X jY where X is real and Y imaginary Two numbers X amp Y are transferred to the processor for each bin Data is collected from all three receivers simultaneously If the AVERAGE or LENGTH features are in use the processor implements those functions at this point and then stores the results in trace memory Trace memory is used to store the complex numbers representing in puts R A B and storage registers D1 D2 D3 and D4 If LENGTH and AVERAGE are inactive the measure ment data is stored in trace memory without change This point is emphasized because the AVERAGE and LENGTH functions change what is stored in trace memory Consider the case of single sweep mode After the data is taken it may be formatted to any of a number of configurations but changing LENGTH or AVERAGE has no effect TRACE INPUTS DISPLAY FUNCTIONS or SCALE may be changed and the display updated from trace memory without taking another measurement If LENGTH
172. equire new measurments to update the trace a memory sweep occurs The pro cessor sweeps through the complex data in trace memory and updates the trace very quickly The speed in which this happens is limited only by the rate at which the processor can manipulate numbers If the pro cessor is given a lot of math to do averaging length and complicated user definitions for two traces the HP 3577A may choose a slower sweep speed to allow time for the number processing The message SWEEP TIME INCREASED appears on the screen when this happens It is important to keep in mind how the HP 3577A does math and the form of the complex data in trace memory when defining user defined equations for INPUTS STOREs or functions For example to find the dif ference in phase between inputs R and A the INPUT definition should be A R not A R See Figure Ae2 if A X jY Mel R S jT Ne then INPUT AIR M N e 92 where is the phase displayed elle ooog wono ll E ooooloooo Figure 4 2 APPENDIX A OPTIMIZING SW EEP TIME The HP 3577A Network Analyzer has 4 selections for bandwidth 1kHz 100Hz 10Hz and 1Hz While each reduction in bandwidth lowers the noise floor it also results in an increase in the pre sweep SETTLING time done automatically and mav require selection of a longer SWEEP TIME This discussion is to help the user find the optimum Sweep Time for a given Resolution Bandwidth SET
173. er The organization of the exercise is Initial measurement set up Measure S forward gain and phase Measure S reverse loss Measure S input return loss Measure S output reflection coefficient Conversion of reflection coef to complex impedance 12 11 C ui ok uo hn sch MAKING MEASUREMENTS 2 40 AMPLIFIER S PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT SETUP KEY NOTE DESCRIPTION Hardkey in the INSTRUMENT STATE section used to reset all parameters to their default values The menu displayed on the screen is the INPUT menu Note that the default INPUT definition is S B R amp test set FORWARD when the HP 35677A B S Parameter Test Set is connected to the HP 3577A Network Analyzer f the amplifier was on when INSTR PRESET was pressed one or more of the RECEIVER INPUTs may have tripped or been overloaded A receiver trip is when the receiver input switches to 1MQ to protect itself from high input signal levels This switch occurs for signals z 1 1 Vos The screen message INPUT __ TRIPPED Clear trip on ATTEN menu appears listing the input s tripped and directing the user to the AT TEN hardkey to clear the condition Note that the impedance softkeys in the ATTEN menu will not reflect the tripped condition We will clear the trip with the CLEAR TRIP softkey after the value of AMPTD is changed Hardkey in the SOURCE section Note that START FREQ is selected ready for data entry Data entry
174. erence position i e a change in the REF POS value rotates the trace even if the ref erence line does not appear SMITH CHART ON OFF is a softkey that allows the user to overlay the polar graticule with a Smith Chart This is a push push toggle type key The Smith chart is used to graphically convert reflection coefficient to nor malized impedance The marker information reads im pedance when the Smith chart is on To use this feature the INPUT definition should be 11 A R or S22 B R and the full scale value should be 1 0 If full scale is a value other than 1 0 the trace values cannot be read directly from the Smith chart but the marker information is still valid Note that the marker units may be toggled between magnitude amp phase and real amp imaginary by pressing the MARKER M P R I soft key in the MKR menu AEF LEVEL DIV 9 0008 1 06 000dB MARKER 10 700 000 000Hz MAG 891 6 B808d5 LENGTH R LENGTH R AO 7 EES E SE LENGTH A SEW yq CECR MEME RN SEET RE E E ON OFF o LENGTH B START 40 i T G ns AMPTO 18 048 LENGTH B OM OFF STOP 10 Las a Figure 4 44 The SCREEN is the total CRT display area It is com posed of the graticule which takes up most of the REFERENCE screen in the center the menu area down the right side from top to bottom and the alphanumeric characters which appear above and below the graticule See Figure 4044 salida Softkeys Figure 4945
175. es Math function plus Sample Time entry MSR Math function minus Math function multiply FREQUENCY d Math function divide i Source Frequency entry SER Math bracket Start Frequency entry FRA Return RET Stop Frequency entry FRB DATA ENTRY SECTION COMMANDS Center Frequency entry FRC increment up arrow IUP Frequency Span entry FRS Decrement down arrow IDN FRC Step size entry CFS Continuous Entry knob Off CEO Sweep Resolution menu SRL Continuous Entry knob On CE1 Freq Swp Res 51 pts span RSI SES Ge Freg Swp Res 101 pts span RS2 DISPLAY FORMAT SUFFIX UNITS Freq Swp Res 201 pts span RS3 dBm DBM Freq Swp Res 401 pts span RS4 dBV rms DBV Return RET ca Gett Fuil Sweep FSW milli Volt rms MV Freq Step Size entry FST micro Voit rms UV nano Volt rms NV AMPLITUDE AME degrees DEG Source Amplitude entry SAM degrees span DSP Amp Step Size entry AST radians RAD Clear Trip Source CTS Em RSP Start Amplitude entry AMA enee ge S Stop Amplitude entry AMB microseconds USC Steps Sweep menu NST nanoseconds NSC Number of steps 6 NS1 percent 96 Number of steps 11 NS2 degrees span DSP Number of steps 21 N 3 unm ee Number of steps 51 NSA kHz KHZ Number of steps 101 NS5 Hz HZ Number of steps 201 NSG exponent E Number of steps 401 NS7 Return RET Full Sweep FSW Use not required The only function of this code is to display a menu D 2 if bus diagnostics are on TRIGGER MODE T
176. es up through lower values of N until it reaches the user s selection For ex ample let N 256 The first value used in the equation for N is 4 After several sweeps a higher value of N is used and the process repeated until 256 is reached The HP 35774 uses this method because it displays a use able trace faster than if N were large and constant NOTE After averaging with a large N for a long time i e many sweeps removing the device under test does not affect the trace noticeably The LED above the AVG key is on when the HP 3577A is averaging CONTINUOUS ENTRY MARKER Q Figure 494 4 4 In the DATA ENTRY section of the front panel there are three ways to enter or modify data the keypad the arrow keys and the knob CONTINUOUS ENTRY refers to the knob in ENTRY mode To use CONTINUOUS ENTRY the active bright soft key must be a type that allows data entry When the key above the knob is pressed the LEDs marked MARKER and ENTRY toggle The knob is capable of CONTINUOUS ENTRY when the ENTRY LED is lit When in MARKER mode the knob moves the markers on the screen It is recommended that the knob be left in MARKER mode so that data modifications are not made when the knob is accidently rotated The ENTRY OFF hardkey also turns off the knob ENTRY mode by removing the menu and therefore any active softkey from the screen DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY Lo MARKER O ENTRY Q Figur
177. esses There may be only one talker addressed by the controller to talk at any time Talk and Listen ad dresses are the same on the HP 3577A VIEWING THE HP 3577A s HP IB ADDRESS The HP 3577A s HP IB MSc RUE set to eleven iu at the factory Tordisplay the address of tt y 1 Press the SPCL FCTN hardkey 2 Press the HP 1B ADDRESS softkey top item in the display menu The address will appear in the entry block See Figure 382 REF LEVEL DIY 0 000dB MARKER 00 080 600 000Hz HP TA 0 00048 MAG 924 85 208d8 ADDRESS TALKONLY ON OFF SERVICE DIAG S PARMS ON OFF LARA AM T START 100 000 000Hz STOP 200 000 000 OOOH AMP TD 15 0d8m Figure 3 2 Every device on the HP 1B must have a unique address The HP 3577A address can be set to any address from zeto 0 to thirty 30 inclusive When choosing an ad dress remember that the controller also has an address typically 21 Fo change the HPB address 1 Press the SPCL FCTN hardkey 2 Press the HP IB ADDRESS softkey to display the current HP IB address 3 Press the appropriate keys in the numeric keypad for the new address Note the change in the entry block 3 4 4 Press the ENTER softkey The HP 3577A s HP IB address is stored in a non volatile memory there are no address switches If the contents of this memory are destroyed the HP IB address defaults to eleven 11 Under normai circumstances the non volatile
178. et and Trigger commands 30 40 This example program will take measurements at 1 2 3 4 and 50 5 MHz and dump the data to the computer 60 70 First set up the instrument state and take a measurement 90 OUTPUT 711 IPR ST5 SM2Z SFR 1 MHZ TKM Set up 1st freq 100 PORI 2TO35 110 LOOP x 120 EXIT IF BINAND SPOLL 711 4 4 B2 of Status Byte 130 END LOOP 4 Loop until Meas is 140 Complete 150 160 OUTPUT 711 SFR L MHZIRST DMTUTRG Start settling for 170 ENTER 711 Mkr_Magr next meas and dump 180 ff data for previous 190 meas This allows 200 settling to occur 210 during the data dump 220 EA 230 PRINT MARKER MAGNITUDE AT 1 1 MHz Mkr Mag dB 240 Kei 250 NEXT I When this FOR NEXT 260 loop is done 5 MHz 270 has been set up but 280 no data dumped 290 LOOP 300 EXIT IF BINAND SPOLL 711 4 Wait for Meas 310 END LOOP Complete again 320 OUTPUT 711 DM1 Dump 5 MHz data 330 ENTER 711 Mkr Mag 340 PRINT MARKER MAGNITUDE AT I 1 MHz Mkr Mag dB 350 END 3 11 REMOTE OPERATION RECEIVER Function HPB code RESOLUTION BW RBW Resolution BW 1 Hz BW1 Resolution BW 10 Hz BW2 Resolution BW 100 Hz BW3 Resolution BW 1 kHz BW4 Auto Bandwidth Off AUO Auto Bandwidth On AUT AVERAGE AVE Averaging Off AVO N 4 AV1 N 8 AV2 N 16 AV3 N 32 AVA N 64 AV5 N 128 AV6 N 256 AV7 ATTENUATION ATT Attenuation R 0 dB ART Atten
179. exit Since data entries must be terminated by selection of units Hz dBm etc no entry is made if units are not selected 1 3 GETTING STARTED 4 The softkey labels will appear next to the eight softkeys down the right side of the screen Each group of softkey labels is referred to as a menu The beeper will sound to attract the user s attention when the HP 3577A displays a new screen message uniess the beeper has been turned off see SPECIAL FUNCTIONS in the REFERENCE If the HP 3577A is used as part of a measurement system it is recommended that the frequency references of ali instruments be phase locked to a common frequency standard The HP 3577A will lock to a frequency reference applied to its External Reference Input if the signal is be tween 7 and 15 dBm and the frequency is the result of dividing 10 MHz by an integer and is above 100 kHz 20 ppm Or the HP 35774 can serve as the system reference via its 10 MHz 0 dBm Reference Output Both of these connections are located on the rear panel If the HP 3577A is used as the standard the stability will be 05 ppm per C The HP 3577A requires 60 minutes to warm up before all of the specifications will apply however the instrument is operable during this warmup period iN CASE OF TROUBLE _ If the HP 3577A fails to respond to front panel key presses perform the following steps until normal operation is restored a Verify that the HP 1B status in
180. f America OPERATING ENVIRONMENT WARNING To prevent potential fire or shock hazard do not expose the HP 35774 to rain or other ex cessive moisture Temperature The HP 3577A may be operated in temp eratures from 0 C to 4 55 C The HP 3577A perform ance specifications apply within this temperature range Humidity The instrument may be operated in environ ments with humidity up to 9596 However the HP 3577A should be protected from temperature extremes which cause condensation Altitude The HP 3577A may be operated at altitudes up to 4 600 meters 15 000 feet Table 581 Accessorles Avaliable DESCRIPTION MINIMUM CONFIGURATION 50 Q IMPEDANCE TRANSMISSION S PARAMETERS TRANSMISSION S PARAMETERS GENERAL INFORMATION Cooling System The HP 3577A is equipped with a forced air cooling system to maintain the proper inter nal operating temperature The cooling fan is mount ed on the rear panel Air drawn through the rear panel fan filter is circulated through the instrument and ex hausted through holes in the side panels The HP 3577A should be mounted to permit as much air circulation as possible with at least one inch clearance at the rear and on each side The filter for the cooling fan should be removed and cleaned at least once every 30 days To clean the fan filter flush it with soapy water rinse and then air dry Thermal Cutout The HP 35774 is equipped with a ther mal cutout switch whic
181. fault value of GRATICULE PEN NUMBER is 2 This parameter may be modified in the same manner as LINETYPE The range of numbers allowed as data for this entry is 0 8 PEN SPEED SLOWIFST is a softkey used to select either a slow pen velocity or the maximum The defauit set ting is FST This pen velocity is dependent on the plot ter in use The SLOW pen speed is 10 cm s for plotting with marginal pens or transparencies This softkey is a 4 24 toggle selection To modify this parameter press the PLOT hardkey and then the CONFIG PLOT softkey The current setting of PEN SPEED appears bright To change to the other selection of PEN SPEED press the PEN SPEED softkey once DEFAULT SETUP is a softkey that resets the plot para meters to their default parameters TRACE 1 LINETYPE 7 TRACE 2 LINETYPE 7 TRACE 1 PEN NUMBER 1 TRACE 2 PEN NUMBER 2 GRATICULE PEN NUMBER PEN SPEED FST RETURN is a softkey that changes the menu listing back to the PLOT menu This allows the user to plot after reconfiguration The same thing is accomplished by pressing the PLOT hardkey RECALL INSTRUMENT STATE I c3 aooaiic Een llc 0000 oooo e gt P ki GE AECALL REG 1 RECALL REG 2 RECALL nto 3 RECALL REG 4 AECA L REG A AGU OLD STATE Figure 4037 RECALL is a hardkey in the INSTRUMENT STATE sec tion of the front panel used to recall 5 SAVEd states or the state of the HP 3577A when it was l
182. following ASCII information will be returned if the display is NOT in polar format 1 Reference level for trace 1 2 Amplitude level for trace 1 3 Reference level for trace 2 4 Amplitude level for trace 2 5 Marker frequency for trace 1 6 Marker amplitude for trace 1 7 Marker frequency for trace 2 8 Marker amplitude for trace 2 9 Start frequency for trace 1 10 Stop frequency for trace 1 11 Start frequency for trace 2 12 Stop frequency for trace 2 13 Source amplitude if not in alternate sweep 14 Delay aperture if DSPLY FCTN is DELAY for the active trace 15 Entry block information if bus diagnostics are enabled if the display format is POLAR then the following ASCH information is returned 1 Full scale level 2 Phase reference 3 Reference position 4 null 5 Marker frequency 6 Marker amplitude 7 Marker phase 8 null 9 Start frequency for trace 1 10 Stop frequency for trace 1 11 Start frequency for trace 2 12 Stop frequency for trace 2 13 Source amplitude if not in alternate sweep 14 null 15 Entry block information Each field will be separated by a comma the last field will be delimited by a carriage return linefeed If the field is not defined currently on the CRT an empty field will be returned AAA AA Status read to make sure all commands have been processed amp sweep is done Example 10 20 DCH Dump Characters program 30 40 DIM Bfr 1 15 40 U
183. four resolution bandwidths for the re ceiver IF The top four softkey labels in this list are the only valid selections for resolution bandwidth No data entry is appropriate Narrow bandwidths usually require more sweep time for accurate measurements For more on optimizing sweep time for a given bandwidth refer to Optimizing Sweep Time in Appendix A AUTOMATIC RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH ONIOEE is a fifth softkey in the RES BW menu when the SWEEP TYPE is LOG FREQ AUTO RBW is a feature that cycles up through the lower values of resolution bandwidth as the band is swept until it reaches the active bright RES BW This prevents LO feedthru at low frequencies and allows fast accurate measurements at high fre quencies With default parameters sweeping 50 Hz to 200 MHz and RES BW 1 kHz the sweep starts at 50 Hz with a resolution bandwidth of 10 Hz At 400 Hz the bandwidth changes to 100 Hz and at 4 kHz the bandwidth changes to 1 kHz If FULL SWEEP is selected from the FREQ menu or if START FREQ is changed to 5 Hz AUTO RBW starts by waiting approximately 4 4 25 REFERENCE seconds for the source to settle Then the sweep begins at 5 Hz with 1 Hz BW and changes to 10 Hz BW at 40 Hz The cycle continues as described previously When the SWEEP TYPE is ALTERNATE the user may select a different resolution bandwidth for each of the two traces This is in addition to being able to select different band sweeps sweep times and source amp
184. from linear phase Fre quency Response Port Match and Test Port Reciprocity specifications are equivalent values for ratio measurements and errors can be calibrated out Frequency Range 100 kHz to 200 MHz Test Port impedance 356774 50 2 35677B 75 Q Directivity gt 40 dB Frequency Response Transmission S Ln 21 08 5 069 Reflection S bus 108 x5 deg Port Match Test Ports 1 2 35677A gt 26 dB 35677B gt 24 dB Test Ports 1 2 open short ratio 35677A lt 0 75 dB magnitude and 5 deg phase 35677B lt t 1 dB magnitude and x 7 5 deg phase input Port gt 20 dB return loss Output Ports A B and R gt 26 dB return loss Test Port isolation gt 100 dB insertion Loss RF input to Test Port 1 or 2 35677A typically 13 dB 356778 typically 19 dB RF Input to Output Ports B or R 356774 typically 19 dB 35677B typically 31 dB Test Port Reciprocity Transmission S S typically lt 4 0 5 dB magnitude and lt xb deg phase Reflection S S typically lt 0 5 dB magnitude and lt lt LD deg phase incident Power Ratio Test Port 1 to Test Port 2 typically lt x 1 5 dB RF input Maximum Operating Level 25 dBm or 30 Vdc 356778 Block Diagram x RF input Damage Level 27 dBm or 30 Vdc Port 1 or 2 Damage Level 27 dBm or 30 Vdc Connectors Input Port and Output Ports A B and H 502 Type N female Test Ports 1 and 2 35677A 50 Q Type
185. function 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the equation is complete 6 Press the ENTER softkey aen a TRACE 1 is selected and COPY INPUT 1 2 when TRACE 2 is selected lE 70 e TEST SET FWDIREV is a push push toggle type softkey used to select which of the two S parameter test set ports is the source When FWD is bright PORT 1 is the signal source and when REV is bright PORT 2 is the source This softkey appears only when the USER DEF INPUT softkey is active tel cono Hj c ooadoo e S O e gt Figure 4e18 REFERENCE INSTRUMENT PRESET is a green hardkey in the IN STRUMENT STATE section This key resets the values of HP 3577A parameters to a known state This op erating state is especially useful as a reference condi tion Immediately after preset or power on the HP 3577A parameters are set to their default values These parameters and their preset conditions are shown in the following table Table 4 1 Preset Condition Without test set With test set Function where F1 converts closed loop gain to open loop gain F2 is input reflection if the test set is configured forward F3 converts the reflection measurement to normalized impedance for port 1 of the test set F4 converts normalized impedance to actual im pedance where Zo 50Q and F5 converts normalized im pedance to actual impedance where Zo 750 For a more com plete listing of preset parameters refer to the REMOTE OPER
186. g Resolution Marker 0 005 deg 0 0001 rad Display 0 01 deg div to 200 deg div 0 00018 rad div to 3 49 rad div Display Units degrees radians Accuracy at 100 kHz 25 C and Max imum input Level 2 0 deg Accuracy and frequency response errors and effects of different input attenuation can be calibrated out with normalization Input Level Relative to Maximum Allowable O dB to 10dB 10 dB to 50 dB 50 dB to 60 dB 60 dB to 80 dB 80 dB to 100 dB Specifications do not apply below 60 dB in a 1 Hz Resolution Bandwidth BEE m SCH pr poe 7 deg A E H ps E MEME t kHz 100 Hz 10 Hz a i 2 deg M E o sz ZER ES t deg D al EH a m 40 ga 30 160 Input Loval ir dB Relativa to Maximum ABowalie VACENTANET te m TP APPENDIX A DATA PROCESSING AND STRUCTURE Knowing how the HP 3577A takes measurements and what it does with the data will increase your effec tiveness as a user This section presents and explains the operating system flow chart of the HP 3577A Net work Analyzer For the folowing discussion refer to the flow chart in Figure A 1 The synthesized source sweeps the selected span con tinuously when not in CW sweep type or MANUAL sweep mode while the 3 receivers take measurements digitize them and output the data The processor ac cepts data from the receivers only at certain frequen cies These are usually 401
187. gger is ignored Each trigger requires a transition edge of the external trigger signal so the trigger signal must return to the pre trigger state before triggering again holding a closure to ground or low signal on the external trigger input does not continue triggering the HP 3577A There is a delay of 250 to 500 microseconds from the time the trigger signal is received to the beginning of the sweep IMMEDIATE triggering is a softkey that appears in this menu only when the SWEEP MODE is MANUAL If this method of triggering is selected the operator triggers the HP 3577A to take a measurement by pressing the TRIG RESET hardkey To use this feature Press the SWP MODE hardkey to display a menu Press the MANUAL softkey Press the TRIG MODE hardkey to display a menu Press the IMMED softkey Press the SWP MODE hardkey Move the marker to the point of interest Press the MKR MANUAL softkey The MANUAL FREQUENCY changes to that of the marker but no measurement is taken 8 Press the TRIG RESET hardkey to take the measurement OR 7 Enter a new value with the numeric key pad Select units from the menu press a softkey 9 Press the TRIG RESET hardkey to take the measurement TRIGGER RESET Y Ch Lt ud UL N oe co Figure 4 54 nmm graticule and 2 good measurement data readout via the marker for all portions of the frequency span even where the trace is off screen If a function change does not r
188. gister D1 for trace 1 or D2 for trace 2 Then it redefines the INPUT to be oid INPUT D1 or old INPUT D2 whichever ap plies dependent on trace being operated on REFERENCE NORMALIZE may also be used to calibrate a reflection measurement The configuration shown in Figure 4827 should be used with an open as the standard The pro cedure is the same as previously described except that instead of replacing the device under test with a through the D U T should be disconnected and the connection to the directional bridge left open NORMALIZE SHORT may be used in the same man ner as NORMALIZE for normalizing single port reflec tion measurements The standard used should be a short Figure 4027 NOTE The HP 3577A does not allow normalization of INPUT expressions other than A DR AAR Y orBR ONE PORT PARTIAL CAL is a softkey label in the MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION menu used to improve accuracy of return loss measurements by doing two term error correction Use of this feature destroys the contents of registers D3 and D4 and redefines the func tion F2 and the constant K1 To use this feature 1 Set up the measurement INPUT FREQ AMPTD SWEEP TIME etc 2 Press the MEASR CAL hardkey to display the menu 3 The HP 3577A displays a screen message to LEAVE PORT 1 OPEN Disconnect the cable to PORT 1 Press the CONTINUE CAL softkey Wait for the HP 35774 to do a complete sweep The HP 35774 displays a
189. greater than 4V appears on the connector This open condition is called TRIP PED The screen message SOURCE TRIPPED Clear trip on AMPTD menu directs the user to to the AMPTD menu where the softkey CLEAR TRIP may be found OVERLOAD OVERLOAD occurs when a signal level larger than 0 0 dBm with ATTEN 20 dB or 20 dBm with ATTEN 0 dB is applied to one of the three receiver inputs if the frequencies of interest are below 1 kHz reduce these signal levels 6 dB When an input is overloaded the measurement accuracy is degraded and action should be taken to reduce the input level When an 4 22 overload occurs the HP 3577A sounds an audible alarm if the beeper is ON illuminates the red OVERLOAD LED above the input being overloaded and displays a warning message on the screen The red alarm LED is a real time indication of an overload condition while the screen message remains until the beginning of a new sweep fM FE OE IVER eessen INPUT 8 INPUT A INPUT B C ovencoao O overivan O ovtacoac PROBE PWf PROBE PWP 30 dRM 25004 259 DC MAX Figure 4 34 NOTE If an overload occurs during a slow or single sweep inaccurate trace data may remain on the screen It is recommended that a new sweep be taken with reduced input levels l before measurement values are taken If the signal level is increased to 1 1V the receiver in put TRIPs changes to 1 MQ impedance to
190. h automatically turns off the main power supply whenever the internal temperature is excessive The temperature at which this occurs is dependent upon line voltage and airflow With proper airflow and operating line voltage thermal cutout does not occur at or below an ambient temperature of 559 C The switch resets automatically when the instrument is turned off on If a thermal cutout occurs check for fan stoppage clogged fan ports and other conditions that can obstruct airflow or otherwise cause excessive heating HIGH IMPEDANCE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS __J5 0 IMPEDANCE NETWORK ANALYZER 3577A S PARAMETER TEST SET TYPE N CALIBRATION KIT TYPE N TEST PORT EXTENSION CABLES 356794 POWER SPLITTERS 11850A or 11667A MINIMUM LOSS PAD AND ACCESSORY KITS TYPE N MINIMUM LOSS PAD TYPE N ACCESSORY KIT 11853A BNC ACCESSORY KIT 118544 TRANSISTOR FIXTURES TO 18 TO 72 TRANSISTOR FIXTURE TO 5 TO 12 TRANSISTOR FIXTURE TRANSISTOR FIXTURE ADAPTER PROBES CURRENT PROBE 500 MHz ACTIVE PROBE 1 1 MINIATURE PROBE 10 1 MINIATURE PROBE Notes 11 2 ea recommended 2 3 ea recommended 3 4 ea recommended 3577A 35774 3577A 3577A 356774 356778 35678A 356788 35679A 35679A 35679B 113508 118524 11853A 11855A 118554 11854A 118564 11856A 11854A 116008 11602B 11858A 1110B 1120A 10021A 10040A 4 Requires 2ea 11525A APC 7 to Type N maie adapters for use with the 356774 5 3 GENERAL INFORMATION NOTE T
191. hardkey TRACE MEMORY TEST is a softkey that tests the RAM in TRACE MEMORY when pressed This test takes ap proximately 20 seconds to run during which time all other activity is suspended This test may be interrupted by pressing INSTR PRESET NOTE This test clears all information stored in trace memory including D1 D2 D3 D4 R A and os FAST PROCESSOR TEST is a softkey that runs a test on the fast processor board This test should immediately display the message FP SELF TEST PASSED FAST BUS INTERFACE TEST is a softkey that tests the port between the main processor and the fast processor This test should immediately display the message MP FP PORT TEST PASSED DISPLAY MEMORY TEST is a softkey that tests the memory of the digital display unit This test takes ap proximately 5 seconds to run during which time the dis play is blank The HP 35774 returns from the test in the preset condition DISPLAY HP IB is a softkey that puts a picture of the HP IB connector on the screen Pin numbers and signal REFERENCE names are labeled on the figure and a bright dot ap pears on any pin that has a TRUE low signal state on it This feature allows the user to display the status of the HP IB lines of the HP 35774 HP IB SIGNATURE ANALYSIS is a softkey that runs a program to allow signature analysis tests to be run on the HP 3577A s microprocessor systems SOFTWARE REVISION is a softkey used to display a screen message
192. he active DIS PLAY FUNCTION is POLAR MARKER FULL SCALE is a softkey used to change the value of FULL SCALE to the magnitude position of the marker This sets the level of the outer ring of the polar graticule to the current magnitude of the marker which has the effect of changing the scale 4 18 MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION To use this feature 1 Move the marker to the point you wish to be on the outer ring of the polar graticule 2 Press the MKR hardkey to display the menu 3 Press the MKR FULL SCL softkey MARKER START FREQUENCY is a softkey that also appears in the MKR menu for rectangular display for mats lt works the same for polar formats In POLAR there is only one trace and only one marker The marker has three values associated with it frequency mag nitude and phase or frequency real and imaginary The MKR START FREQ softkey puts the present fre quency value of the marker into the START FREQ value MARKER STOP FREQUENCY is a softkey that works the same in polar as rectangular display formats MARKER CENTER FREQUENCY is a softkey that works the same in polar as rectangular display formats MARKER OFFSET FREQ SPAN is a softkey that works the same in polar as rectangular display formats MARKER REFERENCE is a hardkey that puts the cur rent phase value of the marker into the value of the reference line This has the effect of rotating the polar trace leaving the marker
193. he thermal cutout will operate at any exter nal temperature above 15 C if the airflow is blocked ACCESSORIES VAILABLE Table 5 1 lists the accessories available for the HP 3577A These accessories may be obtained through your HP Sales and Service office Table 582 lists the accessories suppled with the HP 3577A Network Analyzer and the HP 35677A S parameter test set Tabie 592 For the HP 3577A Power cord Qty 1 see Figure 5 1 Type N m to BNC f adapters Qty 4 1250 0780 For the HP 35677AIB Interconnect cable 190 mm 7 5 in 500 cable Cabinet lock foot kit 35677 61620 8120 2289 5061 0099 Qty 1 Qty 4 Qty 1 OPTIONS Table 583 lists the options available for the HP 35774 These options are available either when the instrument is ordered or for later installation Table 303 Option Description HP Part Number For the HP 3577A 907 Front Handle Kit 908 Rack Mounting Kit 909 Front Handle amp Rack Mount Kit 910 Additional Service Manual For the HP 35677AIB 907 Front Handle Kit 908 Rack Mounting Kit 909 Front Handle amp Rack Mount Kit 910 Additional Service Manual For either instrument 910 Additional Operating Manual 5061 0091 5061 0079 5061 0085 03577 90010 5061 0088 5061 0074 5061 0075 035677 90010 03577 90000 5 4 INSTALLATION The HP 35774 is shipped with plastic feet attached t
194. his softkey is active A bright label in the menu indicates softkey selection To change the value of AMPLITUDE 1 Press the AMPTD hardkey to display the menu 2 Press the AMPTD softkey if label is not bright 3 Modify the value with the knob or arrow keys OR 3 Enter a new value with the numeric key pad 4 Select units from the menu press softkey When the SWEEP TYPE is ALTERNATE each trace may be given separate AMPLITUDE values For more infor mation see SWEEP TYPE ALTERNATE SWEEP STEP SIZE is a softkey used to change the value that the arrow keys in the DATA ENTRY section increase or decrease the output amplitude STEP SIZE is ad justable from 1 dB to 64 dB in 1 dB steps The default value for STEP SIZE is 1 0 dB To change the value of STEP SIZE 1 Press the AMPTD hardkey to display the menu 2 Press the STEP SIZE softkey if label is not bright 3 Modify the value with the knob or arrow keys OR 3 Enter a new value with the numeric key pad 4 Select units from the menu press softkey 4 4 REFERENCE CLEAR TRIP Source is a softkey in the AMPTD menu used to reset the SOURCE TRIP The source is protected against large external signals applied to it by a relay in the output circuit which opens when the voitage is 4Va If the source TRIPs the user is directed by a screen message to press the AMPTD hardkey in the SOURCE section of the front panel This displays the menu containing the softkey label
195. ice addressed eleven on port seven LOCAL GTL go to local returns control of the listen ing device to the local front panel state The REMOTE LED on the front panel extinguishes if the instrument was in remote prior to the local command The HP IB buffer is not cleared on the HP 3577A Also any dump or load in progress will not be aborted Example for HP Series 200 computers in BASIC LOCAL 711 Local lockout still active if returned to REMOTE NOTE This command is not identical to pressing the LCL front panel key on the HP 35774 Press ing the key will clear the HP IB buffer of all pending commands LOCAL LOCKOUT LLO disables the LOCAL key of all devices on the bus to secure the system from operator interference when in remote control After this command is issued the only way to return to front panel operation from remote control is with a LOCAL command from the controller Local lockout will not change the local remote status of the instrument Local lockout is disabled by a universal unaddress ed LOCAL command on the bus Example for HP Series 200 computers in BASIC LOCAL LOCKOUT 7 PARALLEL POLE PARALLEL POLL is a command issued by the con troller in response to the SRQ service request management line being pulled low true Since any instrument could have pulled SRQ the controller must poll them all to find which requested service The parallel poll commands each device to send its Req
196. ics are the same for any low pass filter Front Panel Connections 4 Rear Panel Connections 1 Figure 2 28 HP 3577A to HP 35677 A B Connections The HP 35677A B is a convenient accessory for making ratio measurements of transmission and reflection scattering parameters The test set has two configurations FORWARD and REVE RSE indicated by two LEDs on the upper left corner of the front panel This configuration is controlled through the HP 3577A Network Analyzer by defining the INPUT Figure 2829 shows the test set block diagram for each of the two configurations INPUT INPUT Rem FORWARD BIER REVERSE SER VERNON Figure 2 29 HP 35677 A B Configurations die PORT BIAS im 2 PORT 1 PORT 2 MAKING MEASUREMENTS Ads LOW PASS FILTER The purpose of this measurement exercise is to demonstrate the use of the HP 35677A B S Parameter Test Set and the HP 3577A Network Analyzer to characterize a low pass filter The general organiza tion IS 1 Set up the measurement 2 Measure the insertion loss 3 Measure the insertion phase 4 Measure the passband rippie 5 Measure the stop band reiection MEASUREMENT SET UP KEY DESCRIPTION Hardkey in the INSTRUMENT STATE that presets the HP 3577A parameters to their default values With the HP 35677A B S Parameter Test Set connected to the HP 35774 via the rear panel cable INSTR PRESET parameters differ as follows START FREQ 100 kHz SOURCE AMPLITUDE 15 d
197. ilities for Character and Vector Combinations Conditions Average character drawing time 16 sec Recommended refresh rate 60 Hz 16 6 msec 1345A writing speed 0 1 in sec Vector dead time 1 sec NUMBER OF CHARACTERS TO RE DRAWN lo m s Tota fame time msec 16 57 16 67 16 67 Character writing time 0 1 60 4 80 msec Time left to draw vectors 16 67 15 07 11 87 imsec AVERAGE VECTOR LENGTH APPROXIMATE NUMBER OF VECTORS DRAWN 8330 7530 2770 2510 790 710 270 240 B 2 T APPENDIX C The HP 3577A Network Analyzer displays operator messages to inform the user of various condi tions These fall into three categories instructions or informative messages warning messages and error messages Under remote control the user may select the message category level that pulls SRQ and appears in the DUMP STATUS command as defined by the error reporting mode selected Refer to Masking the Status Byte in the section on Remote Operation In the following table W is used for warning E is for error and M for general information messages MESSAGE 1 MHz FAILURE 1345A JUMP CMND DISALLOWED 1 MHz amp 8 kHz FAILURE 8 kHz FAILURE ABORT CAL SOFTKEY ONLY AMPLITUDE SWEEP TIMEOUT AVG TURNED OFF IN ALT SWP CONFIDENCE TEST FAILED CONFIDENCE TEST PASSED CONT CAL NOT ALLOWED COPY NEEDS FROM TRC ON DATA ERROR i DATA INPUT ABORTED DATA OUTPUT ABORTED DELAY APERTURE INCREASED DESCRIPTION
198. ional bit L is the least significant fractional bit S is the sign of the fractional part E is the exponent part and M should always be a 1 The exponent is offset by 128 i e 128 0 This format represents 1fffff All ones represents 1 0 i e normalized to 1 3 24 In either of the the binary data formats the header 1 must precede a binary load so that the HP 3577A can recognize the bytes following the header as binary data ABORTING A DUMP OR LOAD A dump or load will be aborted by any one of the following events 1 End EOI sent by talker FM2 or FM3 load only 2 Sending non numeric data ASCII loads only 3 Device Clear 4 Pressing the LOCAL front panel key 5 Addressing the HP 3577A to Listen and sending one or more bytes dumps only Note that an Interface Clear IFC does not abort a dump or load over the bus For unconditional control of the bus it is recommended that Device Clear follow ed by Interface Clear be issued at the beginning of your program The BASIC commands that correspond to these are CLEAR 7 and ABORT 7 respectively LENGTH OF RECORD The length of the data record number of points transferred will depend on the sweep type currently active This is true for both register data and trace data Note that in trace dumps of delay the aperture 2 first and last bins will be undefined the HP 3577A will output a large negative number in an attempt to protect the user from bad data
199. ious HP IB devices The cable s role is limited to connecting all of the devices in parallel so that data can be transferred from one device to another Every participating device must be able to perform at least one of the following roles TALKER LISTENER or CONTROLLER A talker transmits data to other devices called listeners Most devices can perform both roles but not at the same time A controller manages the operation of the bus system by designating which device is to talk and which device s are to listen at any given time The HP 3577A can be a talker or a listener It has no controller capabilities The minimum HP IB system consists of one talker and one listener without a controller In this configuration data transfer is limited to one direction because one device must be manually set to TALK ONLY and the other device must be manually set to LISTEN ONLY The HP 3577A can be set to talk only it cannot be set to listen only The full flexibility and power of the HP IB is realized when a controller is added to the system An HP IB controller participates in the measurement by being programmed to schedule measurement tasks e set up instruments e monitor the measurement interpret and operate upon the results HP4B SPECIFICATION SUMMARY Number of Interconnected Devices A maximum of fifteen on one bus Interconnection Path Maximum Cable Length Total cable length equal to two meters times number of
200. is a softkey used to define a function and have the results stored in the register of choice This equation is constructed in the same man ner as done for user defined functions and user defined inputs When selected the menu changes to the first term selection menu Terms include five user defined functions four data registers three user defined com plex constants and the three receiver inputs R A and B After the first term is selected a new menu is dis played containing the four possible math functions and j and the STORE IN REGISTER D command These two menus alternate until you finish the defini tion and use the D command to select the register to store into This store occurs without affecting the trace on the screen unless the active INPUT definition is a function of the register stored to STORE amp DISPLAY is a softkey used to store the cur rently selected trace and compare the stored data with measurement data using one key press The storage reg ister used for the STORE depends on the active trace If TRACE 1 is active data is stored in data register D3 if trace two is active then data is stored in D4 After the STORE the INPUT definition of the inactive trace is changed to display the data just stored If TRACE 1 is active the store goes into D3 and the INPUT defini tion of TRACE 2 becomes D3 If TRACE 2 is active when STORE amp DISPLAY is pressed the store goes into D4 and the INPUT of TRACE 1
201. is reconnected with the Clear Trip function 35774 Eure E En Block Diagram S Hz 7 300 25 MHz 200 MHz e eme SYNTH DARAN M To QUERENS i 300 MHz ls O kHz 300 25 500 26MH24 3 L SYNTH H FREQ pee ERENCE 2 D diim 20 dB I 26 200 25 MHz INPUT A Same as input R INPUT B mm o SAO as input R neu kHz 8 kHz s E 10 kHz BPF i MAIN PROCESSOR EA AAA AAA EA ASA ESE TNR mun d E ESE ooo Ed ep Can UN EH ODD De CT NOD tk 5 8 Frequency Response Specifications apply when inputs are driven from a 50 f source impedance Frequency 1 Error M PNE ERR 50 2 1 MQ Input Input 20 Hz to 20 MHz 2 ded pp 5 Hz to 200 MHz 10 deg pp 5 Hz to 20 MHz E i Hi E IW i Mh rins lup DID Aid O A BEE EME Frequency Hz Crosstalk Specified under Input Characteristics Reference Level Range 500 deg to 500 degt to 8 7 rad Resolution 0 01 deg Stability Temperature Typically lt 0 05 deg C Time Typically lt x 0 05 deg hour at 25 C 8 7 rad Polar Characteristics Hange Resolution Display Units Dynamic Accuracy Frequency Response Uncertain ty Crosstalk Reference Level and Stability specifications are the same as the cor responding magnitude and phase characteristics Full Scale Magnitude Range Absolute A
202. ity BEEPER ON OFF is a push push toggle type softkey used to turn the beeper off and back on This is not reset by INSTR PRESET SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS is a softkey which displays a menu used for diagnosing service problems with the HP 3577A The menu items that follow are described bri ly For more details on these features and their uses refer to the HP 3577A Service Manual ens S PARMS ONJOFF is a softkey used to change the IN PUT definition menu between the S parameters menu to the standard INPUT menu LEVELING ONJOFF is a softkey that disables the source leveling loop when OFF This is used for service of the HP 3577A and should not be changed by an operator This feature is reset to ON by INSTR PRESET or power on SETILING ONJOFF is a softkey that turns the digital filter settling on default condition or off This is used for service of the HP 3577A and should not be changed by an operator This feature is reset to ON by INSTR PRESET or power on SYNTHESIZER DIAGNOSTICS ONJOFF is a softkey used to turn on the fractional N synthesizer diagnostics for service of the HP 3577A and should not be changed by an operator This feature s status is reset to OFF by INSTR PRESET or power on TEST PATTERN is a softkey that turns on the digital dis play test pattern This feature is used for alignment of the screen area of the HP 35774 To terminate the test pattern and return to the measurement state press the INSTR PRESET
203. ker position The result will be the offset frequency between the two markers Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey described previously 2 19 MAKING MEASUREMENTS A rele re Vier PIN Figure 2 19 60dB Bandwidth RECALL RECALL REG 1 MARKER SEARCH 2 20 BANDPASS FILTER Data entry for a new MARKER TARGET vaiue Softkey selection of units Softkey used to search right for the user defined MARKER TARGET value The OFFSET reading in the marker block is the 60 dB bandwidth for this bandpass filter See Figure 2919 Pn AMAA AR MM EREMO REF LEVEL ZOIN OFFSET 88 500 Free MKR A 0 00008 10 000d8 MAG UDF 0 2310B A TARO MKA i TARG MARKER TARGET CENTER 70 000 000 000Hz SPAN 100 000 Cent AMPTD 0 0dBm RETURN Hardkey in the INSTRUMENT STATE section used to display a new menu Softkey used to RECALL instrument state saved in register 1 Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Hardkey described previously Note that the target value has returned to 3 000 dB as shown in the data entry block BANDPASS FILTER MAKING MEASUREMENTS Softkey used to search left for the MARKER TARGET value Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Sek Softkey used to move the OFFSET MARKER to regular marker MARKER Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section
204. kfield House Oakfield Grove Clifton BRISTOL 8S8 28N Tel 36806 Telex 444302 p Hewiett Packard Ltd t4 Wesley Street CASTLEFORD Yorkshire WF 10 1AE Tek 0977 550016 Telex 5557355 C Hewlett Packard Lid Fourier House 257 263 High Street LONDON COLNEY Herts AL2 1HA Tei 0727 24400 Telex 1 89527 16 CE Hewiett Packard Ltd Tradax House St Mary s Walk MAIDENHEAD Berkshire SL6 1ST Tet 0628 39151 EP Hewlelt Packard Ltd 308 314 Kings Road READING Berkshire Tei 61022 Telex 84 80 68 CMP Hewlett Packard Ltd Quadrangle 106 118 Station Road REDHILL Surrey Tel 0737 68655 Telex 947234 CE Hewletl Packard Ltd Westminster House 190 Stratford Road SHIRLEY Solihull West Midlands B90 384 Tek 1021 7458800 Teiex 339105 C Hewletl Packard Ltd King Street Lane WINNERSH Wokingham Berkshire RG11 SAR Tel 10734 784774 Telex 847 178 ALEM GREECE Kostas Karaynnis 8 Omirou Street ATHENS 133 Pel 32 30 303 32 37 37 1 Telex 21 59 62 RKAR GR EMP Plaiso G Gerados 24 Stournara Street ATHENS Tet 36 11 160 Teiex 21 9492 F GUATEMALA LESA Avenida Reforma 3 48 Zona 9 GUATEMALA CITY Tel 316627 314786 6647 15 Telex 4192 Teletro Gu A C CM E MP HONG KONG Hewlett Packard Hong Kong Ltd G P O Box 795 oth Fioor Sun Hung Kai Centre 30 Harbour Road HONG KONG Tei 5 83232 11 Teiex 66678 HEWPA HX Cable HP ASIA LTD Hong Kong E CP P Schmi
205. l clear the error string to all blanks It also clears the Power on ROS and if no permanent hardware errors remain set the error bit Its effect on the Status Byte is the same as a serial poll DUMP AVERAGE NUMBER DAN dumps the number of sweeps or samples taken since averaging was turn ed on This number is not the user selection N The ASCH equivalent of the average number is returned ter minated by lt CR LF gt and lt EOI gt The data format for DAN is always ASCH The maximum value return ed is 9999 Example 10 OUTPUT 711 IPRCAVS 20 WAIT 5 30 OUTPUT 711 DAN 40 ENTER 711 Avg__no 50 DISP Avg no 60 GOTO 20 70 END REMOTE OPERATION I AV5 averaging on N 64 PAN PP O E n A iMd AE E CLEAR KEYBOARD BUFFER amp DUMP KEY CKB amp DKY These allow the controller to clear the keyboard buf fer which will hold as many as ten keypresses and monitor key presses and or knob rotation Note that an SRQ may be generated by front panel keys see STATUS BYTE CKB clears the key buffer of key presses and the knob counter to zero The key buffer holds a maximum of six key presses The knob counter contains the first count other than zero taken by the counter since the last CKB command DKY dumps two numbers in ASCII format The first number corresponds to a front panel hardkey and will range from 0 to 51 inclusive The following table shows the keys and their corresponding number If ther
206. length elements 2420 2430 SUB Add cmnd INTEGER Value 2440 2450 Cmnd__array Array__indx Value 2460 Array__indx Array__indx 1 2470 IF Array indx Array length THEN 2480 CALL Transfer cmnd 2490 Array indx 1 2500 END IF 2510 SUBEND 2520 2530 Send Cmnd array to HP 3577A 2540 2550 SUB Transfer cmnd 2560 COM INTEGER Cmnd__array Array indx Disp__adrs Array__ leng th 2 Adrs 2570 Cmnad array 0 Disp__adrs 2580 OUTPUT QAdrs ENG 1 2590 OUTPUT Adrs USING W Cmndarray END send array 2600 FOR K 0 TO Array length 2610 Cmnd array K 0 2620 NEXT K 2630 Disp adrs Disp adrs Array indx 1 2640 2650 SUBEND ANNOTATION OFF ANO Turns off the Annota tion Graphics modes by disabling the display memory ANNOTATION ON ANT Enables the commands in display memory ANNOTATION CLEAR ANC Clear display memory back to NOP instructions Additional functions to control the screen are Graticule On GR1 Graticule Off GRO Characters On CH1 Characters Off CHO screen messages will not be turned off The character fields controlled by the CH commands are 1 Information at the bottom of the screen 2 The REF and DIV messages and their values 3 30 3 The entry block 4 The marker data The following screen features have their own on off commands 1 Trace data the traces themselves TR1 DFO and TR2 DFO 2 Trace reference lines
207. level of notch 2 8 Hardkey described previously Softkey used to turn OFFSET MARKER on or off This is a push push toggle type key continued key presses will toggle the feature between ON and OFF One keypress now turns it OFF Note the return of the marker information block to MARKER Hardkey described previously Softkey used to move the marker to the lowest value on the trace This point is the center frequency of the notch Note that the marker infor mation block now contains the notch center frequency and rejection magnitude as shown in Figure 296 REF LEVEL BEV MARKER 7B G72 B00 000H 106 000dBm 6 00008 MAG A 44 080d8m 0 0deg 4B 000deg HARKER 7B 672 500 000Hz PHASE A 95 8458de9 START 2 000 000 000 STOP 50 000 000 000Hz AMP TD 1 0d m TUNED STUB NOTCH FILTER MAKING MEASUREMENTS Hardkey described previously TRACE 2 Hardkey described previously n Data entry Softkey selection of units Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section used to display the DISPLAY FUNCTION menu Softkey selection of GROUP DELAY as the DISPLAY FUNCTION for the active trace Note that this softkey label changes to read DELAY APER TURE when pressed Also note the DELAY APER alphanumeric data under the lower right corner of the graticule See Figure 297 Figure 297 Phase and Group ME SEET DIV MARKER 78 72 800 ooi Deiay o 100 00nSEC DELAY A 228 74n er 000deg 48 00
208. lgure 4 51 SWEEP TYPE is a large hardkey in the SOURCE section of the front panel used to display the menu of softkeys shown above These softkeys may be used to select from five sweep types NOTE Changing sweep type or sweep resolution in d the FREQ menu erases registers R A and B in trace memory sets all zeros LINEAR FREQUENCY SWEEP is the default sweep type The graticule displayed on the screen has ten equal divi sions This softkey is a mode select type of key data entry is not appropriate ALTERNATE SWEEP is a softkey used to assign separate FREQ AMPTD RES BW and SWP TIME parameters for each trace The sweeps are linear and alternate Without using ALTERNATE SWEEP the user may define different DISPLAY FUNCTIONS INPUTS and SCALES for each 4 34 trace With ALTERNATE SWEEP each trace may also have different frequency parameters start stop center span source amplitudes resolution bandwidths and sweep times When the sweep type is alternate stores are not al lowed This means that none of the MEAS CAL features may be used in alternate sweep Averaging is turned off when alternate sweep is active If two amplitude values selected cause the output relays to switch as the sweeps alternate the HP 3577A times out after five minutes Also if the INPUTs selected for the two traces cause the S parameter test set to switch configuration from forward to reverse time out occurs after five minutes Time out
209. lotters that roll the paper in and out for one axis of movement PEN SPEED The bus code PNM pen speed fast allows the plotter to run at its maximum default velocity This speed is dependent on the plotter used The bus code PNS pen speed slow causes the plotter pen velocity to be ten centimeters per second REMOTE OPERATION HP IB ONLY COMMANDS Function HP iB code Settling Time Entry STE Dump register A DRA Dump register B DRB Dump register R DRR Dump register D1 DD1 Dump register D2 DD2 Dump register D3 DD3 Dump register D4 DD4 Dump trace 1 DTI Dump trace 2 DT2 Dump marker 1 DM1 Dump marker 2 DM2 Dump marker 1 position MP1 Dump marker 2 position MP2 Dump state learn mode out LMO Dump status DMS Dump average number DAN Dump key or knob DKY Dump characters DCH Dump Instrument ID 1D load register A LRA Load register B LRB Load register R LRR Load register D1 LD1 Load register D2 LD2 Load register D3 LD3 Load register D4 LD4 Load state learn mode in LMI Graticule off GRO Graticule on GR1 Characters off CHO Characters on CH1 Annotation off ANO Annotation on ANT Annotation Clear ANC Menu off MNO Menu on MN1 Menu clear MNC ASCII data format FMI 64 bit IEEE data format FM2 32 bit HP 3577A binary FM3 Bus diagnostics mode off BDO Bus diagnostics on fast BD1 Bus diagnostics on slow BD2 Enter Menu user defined ENM Enter Annotation ENA Enter Graphics ENG Clear Keyboard Buffer CKB Take Measurement TKM Se
210. luded with your instrument contact the nearest HP Sales and Service Office and the proper cable will be provided 5 1 GENERAL INFORMATION OPTION 900 PLUG BS 1363A CABLE HP 8120 1703 OPTION 902 PLUG CEE7 V11 CABLE HP 8120 1692 OPTION 904 PLUG NEMA G 15P CABLE HP 8120 0888 OPTION 906 PLUG SEV 1011 1959 24507 TYPE 12 CABLE HP 8120 2104 Figure 5 1 5 2 WARNING The power cable plug must be inserted into a socket outlet provided with a protective earth ground terminal Defeating the protec tion of the grounded instrument cabinet can subject the operator to lethal voltages United Kingdom OPTION 901 1 E iis emm Neutral 250 v PLUG NZSS 198 AS C112 OP RATION CABLE HP 8120 0086 European Continent OPTION 903 Earth Australia New Zealand parth OPERATION U S Canada Line Neutral 250 V OPERATION U S Canada 250V GA Switzerland ga OPERATION S im Neutral mom Line PLUG NEMA 5 15P CARLE HP 98120 1521 125 Y BA OPTION 805 Any country Line Neutral Earth PLUG CEE22 V1 250 V CABLE HP 9120 1880 OPERATION OPTION 912 Denmark Neutral i T Earth PLUG DHCR 107 250 Y CABLE HP 8120 2956 OPERATION The number shown for the plug is the industry identifier for the plug only The number shown for the cab a is an HP pert number for a compiete cable including the pug UL lieted for use in the United Stetes o
211. m to 49 dBm approximation 1 26 Vrms to 793 uVrms 2 dBV to Range 5 Hz to 200 MHz 62 dBV into a 50 Q load Entry Start stop frequencies Resolution 0 1 dB Span O 01 Hz to 200 MHz phase Entry Units dBm dBV V continuous Accuracy 1 dB at 15 dBm and Log Accuracy 296 100 kHz Below 15 dBm add the greater Sweep Time 200 ms span to 6553 s span of 0 02 dB dB or 0 2 dB Sweep Direction Increasing frequency Flatness 1 5 dBp p from 5 Hz to 200 MHz Alternate Frequency Sweep alternates impedance 502 gt 20 dB return loss at all between two separate start stop frequencies levels using linear sweep only RF Output Connector 50 Q Type N female CW Frequency is fixed Data is updated with Spectral Purity a selectable sample time from 1ms to 16 s Phase Noise in 1 Hz Bandwidth Log Amplitude fixed f y lt 70 dBc at offset frequencies from car hor E E NETA rier of 100 Hz to 20 kHz ange 15 dBm to 49 dBm Hamont ac 30 dBr Entry Start stop level in dBm or dBV Non Harmonic Spurious Signals Sweep Time 1 ms step to 16 s step Total E O E D gt EE ts sweep time span depends upon total greater number of steps and time step Reverse Power Protection Output is Sweep Modes Continuous single automatically opened at a signal level of ap manual proximately 22 dBm 500 or 4 Vac Trigger Modes Free run immediate line or greater applied to the source output external Source output
212. memory should retain its data for up to five years This time is not specified and no warran ty is stated or implied Use the following table if you are using a controller that requires the talk and listen addresses A ne NN A nn A ea a o a enero MAA MN HP IB ADDRESSES DEVICE ADDRESSES TALK LISTEN 0 SPACE t 1 A 2 B 3 C A 4 D e wo 6 F amp 7 8 H 9 10 j R Tit K J 12 L 13 M 14 N 15 O j 16 p 0 17 Q 1 i 18 R Fw 19 S 3 20 T 4 21 ifi U 5 22 V 6 23 W 7 24 X 8 25 Y 9 26 S 27 i 28 v 29 30 A gt i ASCH character fi HP 3577A factory setting ftt usually the controller come addressed The ASCII character will unaddress all devices The Device ad dress set from the HP 3577A front panel is used by most newer HP 1B computers which automatically send the Talk and Listen address characters The interface system operates in either of two modes COMMAND MODE ATN true or DATA MODE ATN false If an HP computer is used the bus management lines will be configured automatically and all necessary command strings will be issued In the Command Mode special codes known as bus commands may be placed on the HP IB These com mands have the same meaning in all HP IB systems Each device is designed to respond to those commands that have a useful meaning to the
213. meter for data entry Data entry Softkey selection of units Softkey used to select the FREQUENCY SPAN parameter for data entry N Data entry that is the center portion of the 3 dB bandwidth Softkey selection of units Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Wait until trace two has completed a full sweep before pressing the AUTOSCALE softkey Softkey AUTOSCALE will evaluate the values in all bins of the active trace to determine the new scale When the SWEEP TYPE is ALTERNATE these values are not updated until the next sweep of the trace If a change is made that requires rescaling and you choose to AUTOSCALE again wait for the sweep to finish before pressing the AUTOSCALE sof tkey The trace on the screen will be updated on the sweep following the AUTOSCALE command Hardkey in the SOURCE section Softkey used to change the SWEEP DIRECTION for the active trace This is a push push toggle softkey In this instance selection of a dif ferent sweep direction is used only to demonstrate the use of the feature See SWEEP DIRECTION listed under SWEEP TYPE in the REFERENCE section 2 23 MAKING MEASUREMENTS 2 24 Now the measurement set up for the second trace is complete Note that this extra set up is re quired only when ALTERNATE SWEEP is used The following key presses will make the bandpass ripple measurement AAA a II PPP gg Figure 2 21 Passband Ripple Trace 2 is passband PPP BANDPASS FILTER
214. move them along the trace Marker data appears in the marker information block above the graticule See Figure 2942 Figure 2 42 Calibrated input REF LEVEL DIV MARKER 903 750 000Hz MKA A Return Loss and 20 000dB 2 00008 HAC UDF 31 04405 REF LVL Phase Response 80 000deg 15 000deg MARKER B 483 750 000Hz PHASE UDF S B837deg MKR oo START HKA STOP Phase T CENTER MKR Gar e SPAN t 7 SH gt Magnitude v HAX CH t MIN BTART 600 000 000Rz MARKER AMPTD O 0dB m SEARCH 2 48 AMPLIFIER S PARAMETERS MAKING MEASUREMENTS 3 77 OUTPUT REFLECTION COEFFICIENT Next we ll set up and measure S output reflection coefficient using the HP 35677A B in the REVERSE configuration KEY DESCRIPTION Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey used to select B R as the INPUT with the test set in the REVERSE configuration Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section USER Disconnect the cable from the amplifier output and leave the end of ACTION the cable open Softkey used to normalize the measurement as described previously NORMLIZE This feature may be used with an open termination for reflection measurements as well as with a BNC barrel for transmission measurements USER Reconnect the output of the amplifier to the PORT 2 cable ACTION Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey used to display trace information in a polar format Note that only one trace may be on when usi
215. mp register B DRB Dump register R DRR Dump register D1 DD1 Dump register D2 DD2 Dump register D3 DD3 Dump register D4 DD4 Dump trace 1 DT1 Dump trace 2 D 2 Dump marker 1 DM1 Dump marker 2 DM2 Dump marker 1 position MP1 Dump marker 2 position MP2 Dump state learn mode out L MO Dump status DMS D 4 Use not required The only function of this code is to display a menu if bus diagnostics are on Dump average number Dump key or knob Dump characters Dump Instrument ID Load register A Load register B Load register R Load register D1 Load register D2 Load register D3 Load register D4 Load state learn mode in Graticule off Graticule on Characters off Characters on Annotation off Annotation on Annotation Clear Menu off Menu on Menu clear ASCII data format 64 bit IEEE data format 32 bit HP 35774 binary Bus diagnostics mode off Bus diagnostics on fast Bus diagnostics on slow Enter Menu user defined Enter Annotation Enter Graphics Clear Keyboard Buffer Take Measurement Set SRQ Mask Error Reporting mode O Error Reporting mode 1 trror Reporting mode 2 Error Reporting mode 3 Send SRQ DAN DKY DCH ID LRA LRB LRR LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LMI GRO GR1 CHO CH1 ANO AN1 ANC MNO MN1 MNC FM1 FM2 FM3 BDO BD1 BD2 ENM ENA ENG CKB TKM SQM ERO ER1 ER2 ER3 SRQ APPENDIX E Fitzpatrick J Error Models for Systems Measurements Microwave Journal May 1978
216. n and impedance softkeys are the push push toggle type Each DE has two possible states the bright part of the labels in dicate which state is active These parameters may be changed by softkey selection only The two input attenuation values may be thought of as measurement ranges Normally the HP 3577A is in the high range with 20dB of input attenuation To in crease the HP 3577A s ability to measure very smal signal levels change the input attenuation to OdB The following table lists the signal levels at which overload occurs for any combination of input attenuation and impedance OVERLOAD SIGNAL LEVELS A A E e e e FF nooo INPUT INPUT IMPEDANCE ATTENUATION H T antimia All the front panel connections of the HP 35677A S PARAMETER TEST SET have a characteristic im pedance of 508 If a 75Q characteristic impedance is required we recommend using the HP 35677B To modify the impedance and attenuation parameters 1 Press the ATTEN hardkey to display the menu 2 Press the softkey of the parameter you wish to change CLEAR TRIP RECEIVER is a softkey used to reset a RECEIVER TRIP A RECEIVER TRIP is input voltage pro tection that switches the input impedance to 1 MQ when the signal level is 1 1Vix When any receiver trips the screen message INPUT TRIPPED Chan Clear trip on ATTEN menu appears This change of im pedance does not show in the
217. n t be configured both ways at the same time the HP 3577A has changed the HP 35677A B configuration to REVERSE and displayed a screen message to let the user know that the trace two INPUT definition has changed MKR OFST ON OFF USER ACTION USER ACTION TRACE 2 AMPLIFIER S PARAMETERS MAKING MEASUREMENTS Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey used here to turn OFF the OFFSET MARKER Hardkey the DISPLAY FORMAT section Replace the amplifier with a BNC barrel Softkey used to normalize the measurement as described previously Replace the BNC SEELEN the amplifier Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey described previously Hardkey used to select trace two as the P trace Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Note that the current IN PUT definition listed in the entry block is B R D1 Softkey used to copy the INPUT definition for trace one into trace two Note that the INPUT definition in the entry block has changed to A R D1 This normalizes trace two Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey described previously Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section 2 45 MAKING MEASUREMENTS MKR CPL ON OFF TRACE 7 Figure 2 40 Normalized Reverse Loss and Phase Phase ementi Magnitude mei AMPLIFIER S PARAMETERS Softkey used here to turn marker coupling back ON Note that both markers are now at the same frequency and will move together when the knob is turned H
218. nd are meaningless for other instruments Device dependent commands and front panel key func tions have a one to one relationship for all but the HP IB only commands For example DF5 is the remote equivalent of pressing the PHASE softkey in local Ex ceptions to this rule are Front panel functions not allowed in remote operation HP IB Address Viewing and Selection Remote functions not allowed from the fronf panel Data Dumps Load Data User defined graphics User defined annotation User defined menus Bus code diagnostics Control of Settling Time value Device dependent commands may be sent to the HP 3577A by using the BASIC command OUTPUT as REMOTE OPERATION shown in the following examples for HP Series 200 computers Full sweep Display Function 5 is PHASE Start Frequency 2 MHz Dump Register A OUTPUT 711 FSw ODTPUT ZTEI DES OUTPUT 71T FRA 2 MHZ OUTPUT 711 DRA OUTPUT 71T DFZFRA 1 MHZFRB 10 MIZ SAM O DBM TKM DRA Display Function Log Mag Start Freq 1 MHz Stop Freq 10 MHz Source Amplitude 0 dBm Take measurement Dump Register A d Le Pee E Re Voi on SS ine LF and lt EO gt pulling the EO bus manage ment line Separators such as spaces and commas may be used instead of delimiters but using semicolons or LF characters between commands enables the HP 3577A to do a better job of error reporting A delimiter is required to terminate a n
219. nd the HP 356774 and definition of the operating environment mrt pee pe PO Fi HEWLETT LAM PACKARD WARNING To prevent potential fire or shock hazard do not expose equipment to rain or moisture Manual Part No 03577 90000 Microfiche Part No 03577 90050 Copyright Hewlett Packard Company 1983 P O Box 69 Marysville Washington 98270 U S A Printed November 1983 CERTIFICATION Hewlett Packard Company certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Hewlett Packard further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States Na tional Bureau of Standards to the extent allowed by the Bureau s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members WARRANTY This Hewlett Packard product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment except that in the case of certain components listed in this manual the warranty shall be for the specified period During the warranty period Hewlett Packard Company will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product must be returned to a service facility designated by hp Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to hp and hp shall pay shipping charges to return the product t
220. ng the POLAR display function Trace two is turned off when POLAR is selected for trace one See Figure 2943 Figure 2 43 Polar Display FULL SCALE 1 000d8 MARKER 8 8683 750 000Hz Functlon of PHASE REF 0 0deg MAS UE 20 862dB REF POSN 0 0deg PHASE UDF 2 152deg Normatized RF Amplifier Output Reflection START 800 000 606Hz 8TOP 200 000 900 000Hz AMPTO O O0dBm 2 49 MAKING MEASUREMENTS AMPLIFIER S PARAMETERS Now the display shows the trace of the reflection coefficient of the amplifier output from 5 MHz to 200 MHz Note that the marker magnitude units are in linear units The marker may be moved as described previously to make measurements on the trace COMPLEX OUTPUT IMPEDANCE Next we ll use the Smith chart graticule to convert reflection coefficient to complex impedance and change the marker units from magnitude and phase to real and imaginary KEY SMITH CH ON OFF MARKER M P R DESCRIPTION Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey which appears in the SCALE menu when the DISPLAY FUNC TION is POLAR This softkey toggles the Smith chart on and off Note that the marker units change from MAG and PHASE to Z MAG and Z PHASE or impedance magnitude and phase This may be changed to read directly in real and imaginary units as shown next Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey that appears in the MARKER menu when the DISPLAY FUNC TION is POLAR This softkey toggles the marke
221. nput signal level is 20 0 dBm receiver attenuation 20 dB overload occurs at input signal levels 20 dBm with receiver attenuation 0 dB The amplifier used in this example has a gain of approximately 30 dB so 30 dB of attenuation was add ed to the circuit between the amplifier and the receiver input Figure 2924 KEY DESCRIPTION Hardkey in the INSTRUMENT STATE section that resets parameters to their initial values Hardkey in the SOURCE section AMPTD Softkey that selects amplitude sweeps Note the alphanumeric infor SWEEP mation under the graticule The START amplitude is 40 dBm the STOP amplitude is 0 0 dBm and the source frequency is 100 MHz NOTE This feature will time out change to SINGLE in the SWEEP MODE menu after five minutes of CONTINUOUS sweeping to extend the life of the switching relays in the output of the HP 3577A SINGLE sweeps may be triggered with the TRIG RESET hardkey or CON TINUOUS sweep may be selected for another five minutes 2 27 MAKING MEASUREMENTS AMPLIFIER The plot shown in Figure 2925 is output level versus input level Note that gain compression causes the trace to level out To display gain compression input versus gain we will normalize Normaliza tion stores a measurement taken with a BNC barrel in place of the amplifier and then redefines the INPUT to be the old INPUT definition divided by the stored trace This makes the trace gain versus input Figure 2225 Ampli
222. ny electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS Operating personnel must not remove instrument covers Component replacement and internai adjustments must be made by qualified maintenance personnel Do not replace components with power cable connected Under certain conditions dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cable removed To avoid injuries always disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them DO NOT SERVICE OR ADJUST ALONE Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present 00 NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY INSTRUMENT Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards do not install substitute parts or per form any unauthorized modification to the instrument Return the instrument to a Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are main tained DANGEROUS PROCEDURE WARNINGS Warnings such as the example below precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed E WARNING Dangerous voltages capable of causing death are present in this in strument Use extreme caution when handling testing and adjusting e e SAFETY SYMBOLS General Definitions of Safety Symbols Used On Equipment or In Manuals JD u D
223. o the bottom panel ready for use as a bench instrument The feet are shaped to make full width modular instru ments self align when they are stacked Because of its weight the HP 3577A is not equipped with a tilt stand It is recommended that a Front Handle Kit Optica 907 HP Part No 5061 0091 be installed for ease of hand ling the instrument on the bench The HP 35677 A B S parameter test set was designed to be mounted to the bottom of the HP 3577A Network Analyzer as follows a Install the Rear Panel Lock foot kit 5061 0099 as indicated by the kit instructions This fastens the two instruments together using four slide together clips across the front edges and two lock feet mounted at the corners of the rear panels com mon side b Install the test set interconnect cable between the rear panels of both instruments as shown in Figure bei This cable 1 supplies power and ground 2 lets the analyzer sense the presence of the test set changes the INPUT menu and 3 controls the test set s coaxial switch e d H E Y A Rear Panel Connections 1 Figure 592 Rear panel interconnect cable installation c Install the four N connector 509 cables between the front panels of the two instruments as shown in Figure 593 GENERAL INFORMATION e Using two people lift the HP 3577A to its posi tion in the rack on top of the Instrument Support Rails f Using the appropriate screws
224. o Buyer However Buyer shall pay all shipping charges duties and taxes for products returned to hp from another country HP software and firmware products which are designated by HP for use with a hardware product when properly in stalled on that hardware product are warranted not to fail to execute their programming instructions due to defects in materials and workmanship If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period HP shall repair or replace software media and firmware which do not execute their programming instructions due to such defects HP does not warrant that the operation of the software firmware or hardware shall be uninterrupted or error free LIMITATION OF WARRANTY The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied software or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product or improper site preparation or maintenance NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED HEWLETT PACKARD SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES HEWLETT PACKARD SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSE QUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL TH
225. onnector pin may adverse ly affect HP IB operation See Figure 585 To achieve design performance with the HP 1B proper voltage levels and timing relationships must be main tained If the system cable is too long the lines cannot be driven properly and the system will fail to perform Total cable length for the system must be less than or equal to 20 meters 65 feet or 2 meters 6 feet times the total number of devices connected to the bus whichever is less STO Environment The HP 3577A and HP 35677A B should be stored in a clean dry environment The following are environmental limitations that apply to both storage and shipment Temperature y 40 C to 759 Humidity 0 Up to 95 relative Altitude Up to 15 300 meters 50 000 feet GENERAL INFORMATION 2 D102 HP IB Interconnect Cabies 3 DIO3 L T 4 D104 Par Number Length 13 DIOS pe Seege 14 DIDS 10833A 1m 3 3 t 15 0107 10833B 2 m 6 6 ft 16 Dm 10833C 4 m 13 2 ft 5 EO 10833D 0 5 m 1 6 ft 17 REN 6 DAV 7 NRFD B NDAC 9 IFC 0 SRQ 11 ATN 12 SHIELD CHASSIS GROUND 18 P O TWISTED PAIR WITH PIN 6 18 P O TWISTED PAIR WITH PIN 7 20 P O TWISTED PAIR WiTH PIN g f THESE FINS 21 P O TWISTED PAIR WITH PIN S gt INTERNALLY 22 P O TWISTED PAIR WITH PIN 10 GROUNDED 23 P O TWISTED PAIR WITH PIN 11 24 ISOLATED DIGITAL GROUND Figur
226. ons are add subtract muitiply and divide Calibration Normalization Both traces can be nor malized to measured data with fuil ac curacy and resolution Scale factors can be changed after normalization without affecting calibration Normalize Short Compensates for fre quency response errors Requires a short termination One Port Part Cal Compensates for directivity errors and frequency response errors Requires open and load terminations One Port Full Cal Compensates for direc tivity frequency response and source match errors Requires open short and load terminations Moise Averaging Type Exponentially weighted vector averaging on successive sweep data Averaging Factor Selectable 1 off 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 The current trace Ap is always displayed and updated at the sweep rate according to the expression An Sp F F 1HAp dF where Sp current input signal F averaging fac tor An 1 previously averaged trace Specificatio Averaging Factor is fixed at 1 in alternate sweep Linear Phase Slope Compensation Pro vides linear phase slope offset in deg span Range 72 000 deg span to 72 000 deg span 1256 rad span to 1256 rad span Resolution 5 digits or 0 001 deg whichever is greater Accuracy 0 02 Autoscale Automatically adjusts the reference level and scale div of the displayed measurement Measured No of Points per Sweep Logarithmic frequency
227. oon after the HP 3577A is turned on NOTE Each time the HP 3577A is powered ON a self test of ROM and RAM is run and the results pass fail are displayed on the screen Normal ly the CRT will not show these results because it hasn t warmed up The beeper will sound and all front panel LED s should illuminate when E the instrument is first turned on The operator should visually verify E that all LED s illuminate E Verify that the cooling fan on the rear panel is operating and that the SWEEP LED on the front panel is flashing about once per second F Approximately ten minutes after power on the beeper will sound and the screen message REFERENCE UNLOCKED will appear very briefly This indicates that the oven reference has reached operating temperature and has been selected as the frequency reference for the Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator VCXO When the switch occurs the VCXO takes a moment to achieve phase lock which causes the screen message Until this switch occurs the VCXO uses its own 10 MHz crystal as the frequency reference If REFERENCE UNLOCKED remains on the screen contact an authorized repair facility NOTE The internal oven will automatically become the frequency reference when it reaches operating temperature no external connections are necessary The jack on the rear panei marked EXTERNAL REFERENCE f is not meant to be connected to the 10 MHz REFERENCE OUTPUT j beside it GETTING STARTED
228. or smaller than stop amplitude unlike frequen Cy Sweeps If left running the amplitude sweep times out after five minutes This is to prolong the life of the relays used to switch pads in the output circuitry in and out The time out condition switches the SWEEP MODE from CONTINUOUS to SINGLE and displays an error mes sage The user may trigger single sweeps with the TRIG RESET key or change the sweep mode back to continuous CW is a softkey that puts the HP 35774 in a single fre quency measurement state When the SWEEP TYPE is CW the frequency menu contains only the menu items FREQ and STEP SIZE The display shows a single line from the bottom of the graticule to the height of the signal level at the specified frequency Any frequency may entered with the numeric key pad with millihertz resolution Group delay is not available on the DISPLAY FUNCTION menu when CW is selected SWEEP DIRECTION UP DOWN is a push push toggle type softkey that allows the user to change the direc tion of the sweep The default direction is UP or left to right In frequency sweeps left to right is always up because the start frequency cannot be larger than the stop frequency In an amplitude sweep the start REFERENCE amplitude may be larger than stop amplitude so ampiitude may be swept from a higher to lower value without changing the SWEEP DIRECTION Changing SWEEP DIRECTION to DOWN in an amplitude sweep causes the sweep dot to move from right to
229. ous 1 000 s 0 050 s step 0 050 s step 0 000 Hz 50 000 Hz 200 MHz 100 MHz 200 MHz 1 0 MHz 401 points span 10 0 dBm 1 0 dBm 40 0 dBm 00 dBm 100 Free run 1 kHz 22 ms 55 ms 370 ms 3 707 s Off 20 dB 20 dB 20 dB 500 500 500 On 0 0 meters On 0 0 meters On 0 0 meters 1 0 meter same same same same same same same same same same same same same same same same same same 100 kHz 100 kHz same 100 05 MHz 1999 MHz same same 15 0 dBm same same 15 0 dBm same same same same same same same same same same same same same same On 1 3 meters same same same i ocu p THE STATUS BYTE The Status Byte is an 8 bit word that the HP 3577A wll dump on the HP IB when it is serially polled The state of each bit indicates the status of an internal HP 3577A function Wed BASIC example Var SPOLL 711 HPL example rds 711 S STATUS BYTE BIT NUMBERS B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 Bt B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Not used REQUIRE SERVICE RQS Set when the HP 3577A pulis the SRQ line Cleared along with the SRQ line when a serial poll is performed ERROR This bit reflects the logical OR of ali error condi tions in the instrument An SRQ is generated on the rising edge of any of these error conditions The error conditions include all HP IB errors and all hardware error conditions The hardware errors include input o
230. p Res 101 pts span RS2 cies as with CW or amplitude sweep types or the manual Freq Swp Res 201 pts span RS3 frequency sweep mode Freq Swp Res 401 pts span RS4 ae aan TRIGGER AND RESET TRG amp RST Where the front Eie E P E E panel has one key labeled TRIG RESET functioning as both trigger for single sweeps and reset the HP IB has AMPLITUDE AMP separate commands for each function Sweep control ea y je is done the same in remote as local RST resets the m enir TEMA ox oda y sweep in all sweep modes and TRG may be used to Clear Trip Source CTS SEA l Start Amplitude entry AMA trigger single sweeps RST also initiates settling even if Stop Amplitude entry AMB more commands are waiting in the HP IB buffer Other Steps Sweep menu NST commands do not initiate settling until the command Number of steps 6 N51 buffer is empty RST is useful for decreasing the time Number of steps 11 N 2 RUNE o Oe required to prepare for a sweep by overlapping settl Numberaf steps 2 5 NS4 ing and other HP IB operations Number of steps 101 NS5 Number of steps 201 NS6 Number of steps 401 Na Return RET Full Sweep FSW TRIGGER MODE TRM Free Run TG1 Line Trigger TG2 External Trigger TG3 immediate TG4 SWEEP TRIGGER TRG FRO SWEEP RESET RESET RST 3 10 Use not required The only function of this code is to display a menu if bus diagnostics are on REMOTE OPERATION Example 10 20 RST TRG Use of Res
231. papadoxo Si io SOY JO FOYT 1 Wor ya ME D UO IGA UF 4o wigpzz 440 jardy peudis tunuirxpiui e poaoxo jou OG j MOTORS EARN dr ds ES tpogga MIZAT NY E i pr dnoiB Arentsen aa RUHA p3ui ap OU 307 MOUNT Avaadsia s grdu pauysp sash Ya UN a Y ERI NI BW AwvWiO3 AWI4siG He SUOS AJOS 407941 leds 2 opnpus THES nua NANI 40 z jeue ylomjeu 341 pejoouuoo Jas 1591 e UEM 195 3594 E 30 0631005 pue Jamo jeusits sepiaocid wiz6t dH au se nop juod omy pue 9uo J sjuouoinseotu u rssiuisuedg pue 1013991191 Sube 303 poujour JUBIUSALIOS e sopiAoid JOS 159 SY sod 155 0 GZ seu Pp poui gj aly pue 310d 159 D D sey jopow y sell Keier MONIIN VZZS di SY rM Ssh 10 YING Jos 199 iojourgjed Suusyb5s ZH DOZ OF ZH3 001 L 5 G VZZ96E aH 91 Aqua epp FOL ary Spurs PA MM Ke THAT C ua Em d di por dia o e Pag Pnu id emp Eer ul Ais JO Spaut 202 sas BY Jo Spis IS val TINSIN 1011995 1IN143499 y U 2 NILO 999 YNWS 10 ejod 201 Je Sul Meier vonisod ive EL GER 91018 NOLLVINHOJNI MIN Waas sape uo o qau swedde pa E uoi posn E pro ap apiseg s Aan n 1 SA3 14OS mua 1ndNI au ul Suey Jas 1593 oy 40 aduesaid aqu 9sueas 01 Y ZZSE dH y swo je pue jas 1593 y JO uomein8IIuoo D BU S OJJUO 3s 593 eu 03 JaMOd sarjddns ejqe sti Z LYOd 10 L LMOd Pejeqe iud 3 91q83 JOSUUODIO UI JaURd 1984 ay YM oued seal ay suonoeuuoo jeued JUO BY 03 SBPJOA SPIQ Y 129
232. pedance Selectable 50 R with gt 25 dB return loss or 1 MQ in parallel with approximately 30 pF Magnitude Maximum 1 Input Level 9 Input Attenuation mme iiia TTT 20 dBm KE TEE AN 22 4 mV 224 mv y Input Damage Level approximate 50 Q 30 dBm or 25 Vdc 1 MQ 16 9 aBV 7 Vrms or 25 Vdc The 50 Q input impedance automatically switches to 1 MQ at approximately 20 dBm and can be reset with the clear trip function input Connectors 50 Q Type N female Resolution Bandwidth Selectable 1 kHz 100 Hz 10 Hz or 1 Hz Sensitivity Due to noise and internal crosstalk between source and receiver inputs Minimum Freq 30 kHz 30 kHz 200 MHz 50 Q1 30 kHz 20 MHz 1 MO Maximum tr Input Level Maximum Input Level O dBm d dBm 20 dBm 13 dBV 13 dBV 20 dB atten 33 dBV 20 dB atten O dB atten 110 dBm 130 dBm 110 dBm Hz 100 dBm 120 dBm 110 dBm Hz 90 dBm 110 dBrn 105 dBm 80 dBm 100 dBm 95 dBm ese DEDERIS AS Residual Responses gt 100 dB below maximum input level except for crosstalk error limits L O feedthrough and ac line and fan related spurious signals Crosstalk Error Limits gt 100 dB iso lation between inputs 210 deg a Ki Measurement Receiver input Levai in g Relative to Maximum
233. perature Determined by the expression Phase Temperature Stability 360 x Aperture Hz Time Determined by the expression Phase Time Stability 360 x Aperture Hz 2 ns term can be 5 11 GENERAL INFORMATION 5 12 Annotation Start stop center span or CW frequency source level scale div reference level delay aperture marker data and soft key functions Graticules Rectangular logarithmic and linear polar and Smith All graticules are electronically generated Traces Two simultaneous traces may be present with a rectangular graticule One trace with polar or Smith graticules Markers Each trace has one main marker and an offset marker Markers indicate data at corresponding trace coordinates in the same units as used to set the Reference Level Markers can be used to modify cer tain display parameters Marker resolution IS the same as horizontal display resolution Reference Line Position Rectangular Graticule 0 to 100 full scale deflection in 0 05 increments Polar Smith Chart Graticule 500 deg in 0 001 deg increments Data Storage Measured data can be stored in vector format in non volatile storage registers D1 D2 D3 D4 Stored data can be redisplayed later or operated on with Vector Math Vector Math input Magnitude and Phase Data Stored Data and User Defined Con stants and Functions can be mathematically combined into expressions which define displayed or stored data Mathematical operati
234. piures tad asco Trigger Reset io co ic rota e oca 1c APSO How To Go Fast Examples nr 3 34 SOTtKev INGE course mere IERI DIU YE DPA Df eE Pi CA H n E S E M VA EN Pn ani a PM a we an Dec Ed REFERENCE GENERAL INFORMATION PAO FEE 4 1 Introd DOE taa da te A tenuad ON ius e da a ene oi ER Ac o Loi Lor pere d Pu daa 5 1 PV CT ARE pou deaur aste hee ew C DR s ets oe x ated Power Requirements Ld Stars ace ael Continuous Ty T DEPT Power Cable and Grounding Requirements 5 1 Data Entry ibt pode Pat uoa eod Pario Eug i a oi Operating Environment Data Register EE 4 5 Accessories Available ooo 54 Define Math on reiten emt ce o edle Accessories Supplied 0 0 0 EE ened Display FORMAL EE So geet E St sath de A ee geg oe Display TEE 4 7 Metala Om PERPE Entty BIOCK ieri is cs ira E HP IB Connections EE b External Reference e d Storage and Shipment BE Giclee CI 4 11 Specifications os S40 obs dada rn o DF PV OR OWS MEI LUDERE E E Input wp c TT i APPENDICES instrument Preset r rrr 4 13 Appendix A Special Topniecs A EE EE Ga Appendix B Remote Graphics Bi NADO iara ap ae agi acid Duo s PED aicut da Appendix C Screen Messages o En Son DEE Appendix D Programming Codes D 1 io eebe We bed Zeta Shas Wehr eebe eke Appendix E Bibliography E 1 vi The HP 3577A Network Analyzer is a three input dual
235. protect it self from damage To reset the TRIP press the ATTEN hardkey and then the CLEAR TRIP softkey Note that the TRIP changes the the impedance of the input but the ATTEN menu shows an impedance of 50 Q The im pedance shown in the menu is a user selection not the active impedance value PLOT PLOT is a hardkey in the INSTRUMENT STATE section of the front panel used to display the menus of soft keys shown in Figure 4 35A These softkeys are used to reproduce the display screen on paper using an HP IB TRACE 1 LINETYPE PLOT TRACE 2 TRACE 1 LINETYPE PLOT TRACE 1 TRACE 2 PEN NUM PLOT TRACE 2 GRAY PEN NUM PLOT GRAT CHAR PEN NUM PL OT PN SPEED MARKER 1 SLOW FST PLOT DEFAULT MARKER 2 SETUP CONFIG PLOT RETURN As 35A 4035B Figure 4 35 plotter The plotter must be configured to LISTEN ON LY and the HP 3577A must be in the TALK ONLY mode press SPCL FCTN hardkey then the TALKONLY ON OFF softkey so that ON is bright Connect the HP IB ports of the printer and the HP 3577A with an HP IB cable Refer to INSTALLATION in the GEN ERAL INFORMATION section PLOT ALL is a softkey used to plot the active traces the active markers the graticule and the alphanumerics above and below the graticule When pressed the plot begins the screen message PLOT IN PROGRESS ap pears and the menu changes to ABORT PLOT Line types and pen numbers used are discussed
236. r This will occur any time STOP FREQ divided by START FREQ is x 4 Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey used to let the HP 35774 select the SCALE parameters for the graticule Hardkey described previously Softkey described previously MAKING MEASUREMENTS LOW PASS FILTER The trace on the screen in Figure 235 is the stopband Rejection may be measured at any point by moving the marker to the point of interest and reading the value in the marker information block Figure 2 35 Low Pass Fliter i REF LEVEL DIV MARKER Ge 984 398 P uon MKA A Stop Band 0 000 40 00045 MAG 824 05 196 REF LVL Rejection MKR START MATA ee NAHH HKR gt STOP KKR e HAX BM D 0 aile E A HARKER REG qo ng d START 51 086 875 800HZ STOP 200 000 000 000Hz MKR gt MXN 2 38 AMPLIFIER S PARAMETERS MAKING MEASUREMENTS nM r Ll E E i A i ic A M E u E i 2 Connect the amplifier to the HP 35677A B as shown in Figure 2936 Fifteen volt power is supplied by an external power supply The amplifier used in this example has a gain rating of 15 dB from 0 5 MHz to 100 MHz The methods used here may be used to test amplifiers with different specifications Za less feele ele j l i i 5 0000 mood e Figure 2236 The purpose of this measurement exercise is to demonstrate the use of the HP 3577A Network Analyzer and the HP 35677A B S Parameter Test Set to characterize the scattering parameters of an RF amplifi
237. r magnitude phase real imaginary and Source Frequency Range 5 Hz to 200 MHz group delay Characteristics Frequency Resolution 0 001 Hz Graticules Rectangular dual trace polar Output Level Range 15 dBm to and Smith chart 49 dBm 1 26 Vrms to 793 Vrmsi Output Resolution 0 1 dB Resolution Impedance 50 Q with 2 20 dB return toss Output Connector 50 Q Type N female Display Marker Sweep Type Linear Alternate Logaritnmic t and CW Frequency Logarithmic Amplitude Magnitude 0 01 dB div 0 001 dB Sweep Mode Continuous Singie Manual Phase 0 0 deg div 0 005 deg Trigger Mode Free Run Immediate Line Real imaginary 0 1 nV div 5 digits External Group Delay 0 01 ns div 1 ps Receiver Frequency Range 5 Hz to 200 MHz Measured No Points Swesp Linear and Characteristics Inputs Three IA B A Alternate Frequency 51 101 201 401 Impedance 50 2 with gt 25 dB return toss Logarithmic Frequency 401 T or 1 MQ Measured No Steps Sweep Logarithmic input Connectors Three 50 Q Type N Amplitude Sweep 5 10 20 50 106 200 400 female Noise Averaging Exponentialiy weighted vector averaging on successive Sweeps Magnitude Range with 50 2 input im Averaging factors are 1 0f1 4 8 16 32 64 pedance and 20 dB input attenuation 128 256 Vector Math Vector addition subtraction Basolution 5 Has et kee 30 kHz to 200 MHz multiplication and division of measured Bandwidth input Frequency Input Frequency data stor
238. r trace two to be displayed as PHASE Note the vertical parts of the phase trace This is a jump of 360 from 180 to 4 180 called phase wrap Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Note that REF LEVEL is bright in the menu Reference level is the measured signal level represented by the dashed line For PHASE this line will appear at midscreen It may be moved up or down by changing the value of REF POSN Next the knob will be used to redefine the value of REF LEVEL 2 34 LOW PASS FILTER MAKING MEASUREMENTS Press the unlabeled key above the knob This key press should put the knob in ENTRY mode so that it may be used to modify the value of the active data entry softkey in the menu Turn the knob counterclockwise The trace moves toward the top of the graticule and the value of REF LEVEL in the ENTRY BLOCK and above the upper left corner of the graticule changes Figure 2 33 Low Pass Filter AEF LEVEL QIV MARKER A 472 186 000Hz Log Magnitude 0 000dB 40 000d8 AG UDF 07448 i174 000dag 45 000deg and REF Phase Response LEVEL DIV REF POSN REF LINE ON OFF LLL E LLL LLL DAD ee LLL LLL WU TIPS e I PT LX HL LOOK OD LLLI 406 PART 450 000 oo GR TS CH 000 360 Souls A or Pa PASSBAND RIPPLE KEY DESCRIPTION piseLY FCTN Softkey in the DSPLY FCTN menu used to turn the active trace which OFF should still be trace two off Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Hardke
239. r units between Magnitude amp Phase and Real amp Imaginary units Note the cor respondence between the Smith chart graticule and the marker units See Figure 2944 PPTTTP n Figure 2944 The Smith Chart Marker readout in complex impedance th NOTE 2 50 FULL SCALE 1 000dB MARKER 6 885 750 000Hz MARKER PHASE REF 0 0deg 2 RE UDF 1 4884 POSN REF POSN 0 0deg Z IM UDF 8 0070 3 MARKER ON OFF ZER MARKER MKR OFST ON OFF REAL OFFSET IMAG OFFSET FREG OFFSET START BOO 000 000Hx BTOP 200 000 000 000H2 MARKER AMPTO 0 Od nt WP RI A PUPA PRA PA PARIS M AMI UA Pi a The Smith chart graticule should be used with a FULL SCALE value of 1 000 units If this scale is changed the graticule may not be used for conversion to complex impedance but the data in the marker in formation block will continue to be accurate REMOTE OPERATION THE HEWLETT PACKARD INTERFACE BUS WHAT IS THE HP IB The Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP IB is an easy to use high performance bus structure that links the HP 3577A and other instruments desktop computers and minicomputers into automated measurement systems The HP IB is Hewlett Packard s implementa tion of the IEEE Standard 488 1978 ANSI Standard MC 1 1 and IEC Recommendation 625 1 HOW DOES THE HP IB OPERATE All of the active interface circuits are contained within the var
240. re 2 17 The Marker Menu f Marker changed to FREQ OFFSET Offset DESCRIPTION Note that the marker dot appears at midscreen The frequency in the Marker Information Block should be 70 MHz If it is not turn the knob until it is Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT used to display the MARKER menu of softkeys Softkey used to turn on the OFFSET MARKER This triangle shaped marker will turn on with the same values as the regular marker in this case magnitude amp frequency Note that the marker information block above the graticule now shows OFFSET information Note that the soft key MKR OFST ON OFF shows the feature has been turned ON This toggle type softkey may be used to return the marker to normal opera tion OFFSET OFF by pressing it once Softkey used to display the magnitude value of the OFFSET MARKER in the ENTRY BLOCK New values may be entered with the numeric key pad or the current value may be modified with the arrow keys or the knob in the ENTRY mode when this softkey label is active bright See Figure 2917 REF LEVEL DIV DFFSET 0 000Hz 0 000d8 49 Q0068 MAG UDF 0 000dB Y rem ZERO LIA LALIIL BB SE E 4 we ore QN OFF MARKER OFFSET AN CIS S DENTEM So 000 DOO paola ETC AMPTD 6 Oda Softkey used to display the frequency value of the OFFSET MARKER in the ENTRY BLOCK New values may be entered with the numeric key pad or the current value may be modified with the arrow keys
241. re to D1 Store to D2 Store to D3 Store to D4 MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION Normalize Normalize Short Calibrate Partial Calibrate Full Continue Calibration DEFINE MATH Constant K1 Real Constant KI Imaginary Constant K2 Real Constant K2 Imaginary Constant K3 Real Constant K3 Imaginary Define Function Function F1 Function F2 Function F3 Function F4 Function F5 Math term for input R Math term for input A Math term for input B Math term for storage reg Use not required The only function of this code is to display a menu if bus diagnostics are on ZMK MOO MOT MKO MOF MOA COs CO1 PMO PPO PRO PIO MRI MMP MKG MTR MTA MTB MTC MOS MTX MTN MSM MTV MRT MLT RET MTP MPF STO SDI SD2 SD3 SD4 STD UDS TD1 T02 TD3 TD4 CAL NRM NRS CPR CFL CGO DEN KRI KH KR2 KI2 KR3 Si DFC UFE UF2 UF3 UF4 LUES tj OC gt wz Math term for constant K Math term for function F Math bracket Math function plus Math function minus Math function multiply Math function divide i Math bracket Return RET DATA ENTRY SECTION COMMANDS increment up arrow HP Decrement down arrow IDN Continuous Entry knob Off CEO Continuous Entry knob On CET Entry Off HLD DISPLAY FORMAT SUFFIX UNITS dBm DBM dBV rms DBV dB relative DBR Volt rms V milii Voit rms MV micro Volt rms UV nano Voit rms NV degrees DEG degrees span DSP radians RA
242. read ed fasteners are colored silver and metric threaded fasteners are colored black DO NOT mate silver and black fasteners to SHORT MOUNTING STUD 0580 0644 LONG MOUNTING STUD 0380 0643 LOCKSCRE w 1390 0360 c Use a layer of shock absorbing material 70 to 100 mm 3 to 4 inches thick around all sides of the instrument to provide firm cushioning and pre vent movement inside the conatainer Protect the front panel with cardboard Styrene pellets in any shape should not be used as packing material The pellets do not adequately cushion the instrument and do not prevent the instrument from shifting in the carton The pellets also create static elec tricity which can damage electronic g components d Seal shipping container securely e Mark shipping container FRAGILE to ensure careful handling f In any correspondence refer to the instru ment by model number and full serial number GENERAL INFORMATION Sweep SOURCE CHARACTER STIGS Characteristics Linear Frequency Aaa OP Range 5 Hz to 200 MHz Entry Start stop or center span Frequency Range 5 Hz to 200 MHz frequencies Fisquency Hos clon O 001 Hz P O Hz or 0 01 Hz to 200 MHz phase Mty 5x Blde o continuous Stability 5x10 day O to 55 C Sweep Time 100 ms span to 6553 s span Output Direction increasing or decreasing Characteristics frequency Log Frequency segmented linear Level Range 15 dB
243. ress 150 Plotter 705 plotter address 160 Done bit 16 Ready 16 170 180 OUTPUT Adrs SQM Done bit Unmask Ready bit 190 200 OUTPUT Adrs PLA Get ready to plot Plot won t start 210 until the 3577 is addressed to talk 220 230 REPEAT 240 X SPOLL Adrs SPOLL to get rid of previous Ready 250 UNTIL NOT BINAND X Donebit 260 TT 270 REMOTE OPERATION Allow Service Request to interrupt Turn interrupt ON 100 TALK Adrs MOD 100 DATA Start Clear the interrupt condition Resets mask to default condition e Next enable the SRQ interrupt and start the plot 280 290 ENABLE INTR 7 2 300 ON INTR 7 GOTO Plot__done 310 SEND 7 UNL MTA LISTEN Plotter MOD plotting 320 330 340 DISP WAITING FOR PLOT COMPLETION 350 LOOP 360 I 370 Wait indefinitely for plot completion 380 390 END LOOP 400 i 410 Plot done DISP PLOT IS COMPLETE 420 BEEP 430 X SPOLL Adrs 440 1 450 OUTPUT Adrs SQM 0 460 470 END a a a a a E e T a T TT e e TT T TT SETTLING TIME ENTRY STE Settling time may be entered over the HP IB Each bandwidth has a settling time associated with it When a new bandwidth is selected its associated settling time will be active These new values for settling time are not saved with instru ment state and will be cleared by a PRESET or turning off power The default values for settling time are shown in the following table Res
244. ress specified by Au thru Aa during retresh Rotator D degrees 90 degrees LOD degrees 270 degrees m e BM m MIS Mi4 M13 M12 Mii MIG M9 MB Mi M6 M5 M M3 M2 M M d X X X An As AQ As An Ae As M An A A Ae St W X H Gn addressable points g ea X 36 X DON T CARE 36 X gie Ag 8 Set pointer register to the Vector Memory address value specified by Ar thru Aa 1 48 X 72 1 50 x 90 1345A Modified ASCII Character Set 13454 MODIFIED ASCH CODE CONVERSION TABLE EE ER Gx rine 29 horgo ibie MOST SIGNIFICANT CHARACTER 1 0 X 56 characters per tine 29 honzontai lines possibie 1 5 X 37 characters per fine 19 horizontal lines possibie g 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 KEES gen 2 0 X 28 characters per line 14 horizontal lines possibie 8 centered SP g FP p Ge 01 HP iogo centered o 1 A Q a o 2 5 X 22 characters per tine 1 honzontal ines possibie 2 B 2 B R OB t u 3 H d C S e 5 4 upper hall tic i 4 D d d t LEAST 5 iower bail tic we 5 E d e ii SIGNIFICANT 5 ett pat tic T amp 6 E V f v CHARACTER 7 rignt hail tic D C T G W g w D back space A i a H X h x 9 1 2 shift down m i 9 Y i y A ine feed idegree f J Z 2 B inv line lees K k C t 2 shift up p I L A 1 D cartage return s M en E horizontal tic 8 gt N n C F vertical tic A 7 OQO o gt EXAMPLES SPeCHARACTER STARTING POINT HP logo gi A 41 ng S Ep y TE ge TE une leed 8S Capab
245. rned on a special test of all main processor non volatile memory is run that is not part of the regular power on test These two keys must be heid down until the test messages begin appearing on the screen One message should be TOTAL RAM TEST NON VOLA TILE MEMORY LOST This test erases all main pro cessor memory resetting INSTRUMENT STATE PLOT parameters and the HP IB to default parameters For the HP IB this means that TALK ONLY is OFF and the bus address is 11 This test may be used if the HP 3577A won t respond to key presses and INSTRUMENT PRE SET and cycling power have not cleared the problem Figure 4 43A SCALE is a hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section of the front panel used to display the menus of softkeys shown in Figure 4943B These softkeys may be used to modify the vertical axis scale and value of the reference line None of the SCALE features require a new meas urement sweep when their values change unless in Alternate sweep Each uses data stored in trace memory to reconfigure the screen REFERENCE LEVEL is a softkey used to enter the value the dashed reference line represents The default values for REFERENCE LEVEL are 0 dBm without and 0 dB with 4 27 REFERENCE FULL SCALE PHASE REF REF POSN REF POSN REF LINE REF LINE ON OFF ON OFF COPY SMITH CH SEL 251 ON OFF PHASE SLOPE PHASE SLOPE PH SLOPE PH SLOPE ON OFF ON OFF Rectangular Polar Figure 4 436 the tes
246. rom local to remote SERU SERIAL POLL is a command to dump the status byte on the bus Encoded in the eight bits of the status byte are the states of several HP 3577A operating conditions See THE STATUS BYTE Examples for HP Series 200 computers in BASIC Var SPOLL 711 IF Var THEN Checks for the zero state Another example IF BINAND SPOLL 711 16 THEN Checks state of bit five The Service Request SRQ line is one of the five bus management lines that go to every device on the bus along with eight data lines and three handshake lines It may be used by one or more devices to indicate the need for attention from the controller and can act as an interruption of the current sequence of events Typically SRQ indicates information is ready to transmit and or an error condition exists When the HP 3577A issues an SRQ it also sets bit 6 of the Status Byte Bit 6 is the RQS Require Service bit sometimes referred to as the status bit in connec tion with a poll If properly configured the controller will stop and poll when it senses the SRQ A serial poll returns each device s status byte one device at a time A parallel poll returns all up to eight device s status bits simultaneously each instrument responding on one of the eight data lines When the HP 3577A is polled it will clear the RQS bit and the SRQ line Any of the bits in the Status Byte may initiate an SRQ The Status Byte may be maske
247. s feature 1 Press the SWEEP MODE hardkey to display the menu 2 Press the MANUAL softkey The label changes to MANUAL FREQ and the new label MKR MAN UAL appears in the menu Also the MARKER in the marker information block changes to MANUAL 3 Move the marker in MARKER mode to the point of interest on the trace 4 Press the MKR MANUAL softkey The sweep dot moves to the marker position and the marker information block shows the measurement being made 5 Modify the frequency value with the knob in EN TRY mode or arrow keys If the knob is used in ENTRY mode the marker moves to the sweep dot when the knob is first rotated OR 5 Enter a new value with the numeric key pad 6 Select units from the menu press a softkey MANUAL SWEEP allows the user to make measure ments at frequencies that would not be sampled in an automatic sweep of the same span Any frequency from 0 to 200 MHz may be entered to the nearest mHz with the numeric keypad If the OFFSET MARKER is on in MANUAL SWEEP the marker information block displays OFS MN instead of MANUAL MARKER or OFFSET SW EEP TIME Figure 4950A REFERENCE SAMPLE TIME EP _ AMPTD TYPE SWEEP SWEEP _ MANUAL MODE FREQ III e A Ehe e d Figure 4 50B SWEEP TIME is a hardkey in the SOURCE section of the front panel used to select measurement times m mediately after power on or INSTRUMENT PRESET the SWEEP TIME for a linear frequency sweep is
248. s Language HP GL with listen onty capability Plotter may be controlled by the 3577A through the HP IB connector without an external computer Plotted data includes trace 1 trace 2 graticule are annotation Additional markers can be plotted and pen numbers pen speed and line type can also be selected Display Adjustments Astigmatism x axis position y axis position alignment focus and intensity Save Recall Front pane setups can be stored in non volatile memory locations 1 through 5 Last state is saved when power is removed Operating Conditions Temperature O C to 55 C Relative Humidity lt 95 at 40 C Altitude 4 572 m 15 000 ft Non Operating Conditions Temperature 40 C to 75 C Altitude 15 240 m 50 000 ft Accessories included 4ea Type N male to BNC female Adapter HP Part No 1250 0780 1 ea Operating Manual HP Part No 03577 90000 1 ea Service Manual HP Part No 3577 90010 Power 115V 10 25 47 Hz to 440 Hz or 230 V 1096 15 47 Hz to 66 Hz 450 VA maximum Weight 31 kg 67 Ibs net 41 kg 90 lbs shipping Dimensions 222 mm H x 426 mm W x 578 mm D 8 75 in x 16 75 in x 22 75 in Add 1 1 8 inch to depth to include front panel controls and connectors GENERAL INFORMATION GENERAL INFORMATION 35677A Block Diagram 5 14 Specifications AH specifications apply without bias signals Degrees are specified as deviation
249. s made the new selection becomes bright and AVERAGE is on The AVERAGE weighting factor N may be changed by softkey selec tion only Averaging does not stop after N sweeps The averaging algorithm is a continuous process that begins when the feature is turned on N is selected The number selected by the user N is used in the equation below to yield an exponential average NEXT VALUE J x NEW VALUE Hl x CURRENT VALUE N N 4 3 REFERENCE If N is 256 the new sweep data is weighted by 1 256 and the current data by 255 256 You can see that each sweep does not change the trace much when N 256 If N is 4 the new sweep data is weighted by Y and the current data by 3 4 so new data changes the trace faster when N is small The HP 35774 stores the trace information in bins Each bin contains a measurement value taken at a discrete frequency in the sweep and is as wide as the selected bandwidth As each new value is taken the math processor weights multiplies it by 1 N weights the old value by N 1YN adds the two together and stores the result in the same bin the old value was in Multiple traces are not stored In this manner the ef fect of any single sample diminishes as each average weights its value at some factor less than one and adds it to new incoming data The preceding discussion has described how the averag ing feature works after N sweeps samples Until that time the averaging algorithm cycl
250. s the result of dividing 10 MHz by an integer and is above 100 kHz accurate to 20 ppm If the source connected to the EXTERNAL REFERENCE varies more than this the HP 3577A switch es to its own internal reference When this occurs the EXT REF LED extinguishes and the HP 3577A beeps as phaselock is lost during the switch S SN NS E 0000 oN EXT REF IN 4 11 L3 13141 1144 SEES SESH s Ky XLI Ld Figure 4913 The ENTRY BLOCK is a portion of the screen where en try messages appear These messages show the data REFERENCE FREQUENC SS START FREG STOP FREQ CENTER FREG FREG SPAN C FREG STEP SWEEP RESO UTN FULL SWEEP Figure 4 14 FREQUENCY is a hardkey in the SOURCE section used to display the menu of softkeys shown above These softkeys are used to modify the frequency parameters Immediately after pressing INSTR PRESET or cycling power START FREQ is the active bright softkey The top 5 softkeys in this menu allow data entry SWEEP RESOLUTION calls another menu used to select the number of sampled frequencies or bins that are the data points of the trace FULL SWEEP is an immediate ex ecution command that resets the START FREQUENCY and STOP FREQUENCY to get a full sweep or you may think of it as resetting the CENTER FREQUENCY and the FREQUENCY SPAN If the SWEEP TYPE is LOG FREQ the menu consists of the following START FREQ STOP FREQ FU
251. s the user that readings taken may be distorted The Instrument State the user tried to recall is bad so the recall failed To clear the bad state SAVE another state in the register If this does not clear the problem cycle power while holding down SAVE and RECALL This runs a special memory clearing test that resets in strument state memory locations See In Case of Trouble under Operating Hints in the GETTING STARTED section The internal VCXO is not locked to the external reference input possibly due to a difference in fre quency exceeding 20 ppm This message appears brief ly during warmup when the oven reference switches on after reaching operating temperature 10 minutes from power on Can t perform the requested operation because the trace is OFF as with scale parameter changes Before plotting TALKONLY ON OFF in the SPCL FCIN menu must be turned ON Results from pressing SOURCE CLEAR TRIP when the SOURCE wasn t tripped The Source Output is open no power out This is ac companied by a message to Clear trip on AMPTD menu In log sweep the stop frequency must be greater than or equal to 1 05 X the start frequency Stored trace data in registers D1 D4 has been lost HP IB User sent MKR MANUAL over the bus without first setting SWEEP MODE to MANUAL Selection of span and sweep time have resulted in a very slow sweep rate Due to limited resolution of the frequency synthesis circuitry the sour
252. section used to display the MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION menu which includes the softkey NORMLIZE MEASR CAL USER Replace the device under test with a BNC barrel BNC f to BNC f ACTION adapter Be sure to wait until the next sweep is complete before ex ecuting the next step Softkey used to normalize the measurement The HP 3577A does this NORMLIZE by storing the trace with the barrel and redefining the INPUT to be the previous definition divided by the stored trace in this case B R D1 2 33 MAKING MEASUREMENTS LOW PASS FILTER INSERTION LOSS USER Replace the BNC barrel with the filter to be tested ACTION The marker may be moved to any part of the trace with the knob must be in MARKER mode to measure insertion loss See Figure 2932 Tee Figure 2 32 Measurement REF LEVEL DIV ARKER 4 472 188 000Hz Calibration Menu 0 00048 Ao oodi MAS tual 0 072dh NORMEN NOImML X ZE ATT wes TTT TTT CELER aue mes TT TTC TET oa A TT TE ONO ese re A BL EN att sai at 190 40m EUR 400 000 ON ae 200 00 To pa INSERTION PHASE KEY DESCRIPTION Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section A Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section that redefines the menu TRACE 2 displayed to operate on trace two Note that the trace is OFF Softkey used to turn on trace two and define it to be phase informa tion Note that the trace appears immediately No new data need be collected no sweep is required fo
253. sky Blvd 4 17 KV12 MOSCOW 101000 Tel 204 2024 Telex 7825 HEWPACK SU VENEZUELA Hewlett Packard de Venezuela CA Apartado 50033 3A Transversal Los Ruices Norte Edificio Segre 2Y3 CARACAS 107 1 Tel 239 4 133 239 4777 239 4244 Telex 25146 HEWPACK Cable HEWPACK Caracas A CP E MS P YUGOSLAVIA iskra Commerce Hepresentation of Hewlett Packard Sava Cenlar Delegacija 30 Milentja Popovica 9 11170 BEOGRAD Tet 638 762 Telex 12042 12322 YU SAV CEN iskia Commerce Representation of Hewlett Packard Koprska 46 E 1000 LJUBLJANA fel 32 1674 315878 Poder ZAMBIA BJ Tibury Zambiai Ltd PO Box 2792 LUSAKA Jet 81243 AE MP ZIMBABWE Field Technical Sales 45 Kelvin Road North P B 2458 SALISBURY Tei CEMP POR COUNTRIES AND gt AREAS NOT LISTED CANADA Ontario Hewlett Packard Canada Ltd 6877 Goreway Drive MISSISAUGA Ontario LAV 1M8 Tet 416 678 9430 Teiex 810 492 4246 EASTERN USA Maryland Hewlett Packard Co 4 Choke Cherry Road Rockville MD 20850 Tel 301 258 2000 MIDWESTERN USA IHinois Hewlett Packard Co 5201 Toiview Drive ROLLING MEADOWS i 60008 Tet 312 255 9800 SOUTHERN USA Georgia Hewfett Packard Co P O Box 105005 450 interstate N Parkway ATLANTA GA 30339 Tel 404 955 1500 WESTERN USA California Hewlett Packard Co 3839 Lankersim Elva LOS ANGELES CA 91604 Tet 213 877 1282 EUROPEAN AREAS NOT LISTED CONTACT
254. smallest value To use this feature 1 Press the MKR hardkey to display the menu 2 Press the MKR MIN softkey Note that if future sweeps create maximum or minimum values in bins other than the position of the marker the marker does not move to that bin The marker remains at the position selected through the use of the last MKR MIN or MKR MAX softkey MARKER SEARCH is a softkey used to search for a target value defined by the user Pressing this softkey displays a new menu shown in Figure 4e24B The ac tive softkey in this menu is MARKER TARGET MARKER RIGHT TO TARGET is a softkey used to search to the right for the TARGET value entered by the user The default value of the MARKER TARGET is 10 01 dBm without the test set and 3 dB with the test set To use this feature 1 Press MKR hardkey to display a menu 2 Press the MARKER SEARCH softkey to display the second menu 3 Press the MKR R TARG softkey 4 17 REFERENCE if the target value does not exist to the right of the marker the screen message TARGET VALUE NOT FOUND appears and the marker does not change posi tion If the value exists in more than one bin the marker moves in the selected direction to the first bin contain ing the the value closest to the target value Refer to the marker information block above the graticule MARKER LEFT TO TARGET is a softkey used to search to the left for the TARGET value entered by the user The def
255. st Set Forward Test Set Reverse SCALE Autoscale Reference Level entry Scale DIV entry Reference Position entry Reference Line Off Reference Line On Copy Scale Phase Slope entry Phase Slope Off Phase Slope On Polar Full Scale entry Polar Phase Ref entry Smith Chart Off Smith Chart On MARKER Marker Position entry Marker Off Marker On 3 8 HP4B code TRI TR2 DSF DF7 DF6 DF5 LSA DF3 DF2 Ha DFO DAP AP1 AP2 AP3 AP4 APS AP6 RET INP INR INA INB AR IBR D1 102 103 ID4 RET UDI H1 121 112 ER CPi TSF TSR SCE ASL REF DIV RPS RLO Ni CPS PSL PSO PS1 PFS PPR GTO GTi MKR MKP MRO AAR Zero Marker Marker Offset Off Marker Offset On Marker Offset entry Marker Offset Freq entry Marker Offset Amp entry Marker Coupling Off Marker Coupling On Polar Mag Offset entry Polar Phase Offset entry Polar Real Offset entry Polar imag Offset entry Polar Marker Units Hello Polar Marker Units Mg Ph MARKER MKR Reference Level MKR Start Frequency MKR Stop Frequency MKR Center Frequency MKR Offset Span MKR Max MKR Min MARKER SEARCH menu MKR Target Value entry MKR Right for Target MKR Left for Target Return MKR Full Scale MKR Polar Phase Ref STORE DATA Store in register D1 Store in register D2 Store in register D3 Store in register D4 Store and Display User defined store Sto
256. struments amp Measurement Systems M Medical Products MP Medical Products Primary SRO MS Medical Products Secondary SRO P Personal Computing Products Sales only for specific product line Support only for specific product line IMPORTANT These symbols designate general product line capability They do not insure sales or support availability for all products within a line at ail locations Contact your local sales office for information regarding locations where HP support is available for specific products HP distributors are printed in ifalics ANGOLA Telectra Empresa T cnica de Equipamentos El ctricos SARL H Barbosa Rodrigues 4 1H DT Canberra Australia Capital Office Hewlett Packard Australia Ply Lia 121 Wollongong Street FYSHWICK A C T 2069 Caixa Postal 6487 Tel 804244 LUANDA Telex 62650 Tel 355 15 355 16 Cable HEWPARD Canberta A EMP A CM CS E MS P ARGENTINA Melbourne Victoria Office Hewlett Packard Australia Pty Lid 31 41 Joseph Street BLACKBURN Victoria 3130 Hewlett Packard Argentina S A Avenida Santa Fe 2035 Martinez 1640 BUENOS AIRES Tel 798 5735 792 1293 da EE lt lt Telex 122443 AR CIGY m Cable HEWPACKARG Cable HEWPARD Melbourne 3 ECPP A CM CP E MSP Biotron SACI y M Perth Western Australia Avenida Paseo Colon 221 Office 9 Piso Hewlett Packard Austalia Pty Ltd 1399 BUENOS AIRES 14 1 Stirling Highway ei 30 4846 30 1851 30 8384 NEDLANDS W A 6009 Tele
257. sts of S parameters S11 21 12 and 22 These are defined in terms of receiver inputs and test set direction in Figure 2829 Changing the test set direc tion effectively switches the signal source and termina tion of the device under test as though it were removed and reconnected to the test set in the reverse direction Different S parameters may be selected for each of the two traces If this requires the test set to be configured in both directions at the same time ALTERNATE SWEEP TYPE must be used In ALTERNATE SWEEP each sweep updates one of the traces and then recon figures the test set and sweeps the other trace This switches the test set s relay between sweeps After five minutes operation in this manner the HP 3577A times out changes to SINGLE SWEEP MODE to limit wear on the test set relay The user may change the SWEEP MODE back to CONTINUOUS for another five minutes of operation or make single sweeps by pressing the TRIG RESET hardkey If ALTERNATE SWEEP is not used and the INPUT of a trace is changed such that the test set must change directions the other trace INPUT is redefined also since the test set can t be configured in both directions at the same time The direction of the S parameter test set may be con trolled directly by the user if a USER DEFINED INPUT is being specified This may be done in the following manner 1 Press the INPUT hardkey to display the menu 2 Press the USER DEF INPUT softkey 3 En
258. t SRQ Mask SQM Error Reporting mode 0 ERO Error Reporting mode 1 ER1 Error Reporting mode 2 ER2 Error Reporting mode 3 ER3 Send SRQ SRQ 3 13 REMOTE OPERATION The following two example programs demonstrate methods used to recognize the end of a plot process Either of two bits in the Status Byte are used to trigger SRQ BO End Of Transfer or B4 Ready 100 110 Controller responds to plot completion by polling the bus 120 CONTROL lines SRQ 1024 pulled by the instrument s EOT 130 bit 140 150 Adrs 711 3577A address 160 Plotter 705 Plotter address 170 Done bit 1 End Of Transfer bit BO 1 180 190 OUTPUT Adrs SQM Done bit Unmask EOT bit 200 210 REPEAT 220 X SPOLL Adrs SPOLL to clear previous EOT bit 230 UNTIL NOT BINAND X Done bit 240 i 250 Next start the plot 260 270 SEND 7 UNL MTA LISTEN Adrs MOD 100 DATA PLA LISTEN Plotter MOD 100 TALK Adrs MOD 100 DATA 280 290 DISP WAITING FOR PLOT COMPLETION 300 LOOP 310 STATUS 7 7 X Read bus control and data lines 320 EXIT IF BINAND X 1024 Check for SRQ asserted 330 END LOOP 340 350 Plot done DISP PLOT IS COMPLETE 360 BEEP 370 X SPOLL Adrs Clear SRQ 380 OUTPUT Adrs SQM 0 Reset mask to default 390 400 END 100 110 Controller responds to plot completion using interrupts 120 and the instrument s Ready bit 130 140 Adrs 711 35774 add
259. t set The REFERENCE LEVEL value is valid and active even when the REFERENCE LINE has been turned off To change the value of REFERENCE LEVEL 1 Press the SCALE hardkey to display the menu 2 Press the REF LEVEL softkey if label is not bright 3 Modify the value with the knob or arrow keys OR 3 Enter a new value with the numeric key pad 4 Select units from the menu press a softkey DIV is a softkey used to to enter a value for the ver tical scale The value of DIV may be changed in the same manner as shown for REFERENCE LEVEL REFERENCE POSITION is a softkey used to enter a vaiue that moves the dashed line to a different height on the graticule For LOG MAG the default position is the top of the graticule or 10096 PHASE REFERENCE POSITION is 5096 LIN MAG REF POS is 096 the bot tom of the graticule The value of REF POS may be changed in the same manner as shown for REFERENCE LEVEL REFERENCE LINE ONJOFF is a softkey used to turn the dashed reference line off and back on To use this feature press the SCALE hardkey and then the REF LINE ON OFF softkey This is a push push toggle type key function Each time the softkey is pressed the soft key label changes from OFF to ON or ON to OFF The current status of the feature is indicated by the relative brightness of the ON or OFF in the label COPY SCALE is a softkey used to copy the SCALE para meters REF LEVEL and DIV of the inactive trace into 4 28
260. ta Menu DESCRIPTION Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section used to display the STORE menu The menu should appear as shown in Figure 299 AN FULL SCALE 1 00 00mV MARKER 75 872 800 0900Hx STORE PHASE REF 9 0deg MAG 14 1 4108mV REG D4 REF POSN D Geng PHASE Aj 84 5480deg STORE REG D2 STORE RES DS STORE DES Da USER DEF STORE STORE a AISPLAY START 1 000 006 000Hz AMPTO 1 0dBm Softkey used to store the trace data of the active trace as defined under the INPUT key into data register D1 Since the INPUT of both traces is ddefined to be A it didn t matter which trace was active The current display function has no effect on what is stored Note the screen message STORE completed Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section We re going to display the data register we just stored data in Softkey used to specify that the INPUT definition is a data register Softkey used to specify which data register is displayed Note that a sweep dot still appears Memory sweeps are still occurring but no new measurement is being displayed If new START and STOP frequencies are entered this trace will not change Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Trace data may be represented in any of the seven DISPLAY FUNCTIONS Any softkey in the menu may be selected to redefine the DISPLAY FUNC TION for the trace showing data stored in the data registers MAKING MEASUREMENTS 2 11 MAKING MEASUREMENTS TUNED
261. teger__array 0 3 0 400 60 ASSIGN Na TO 711 FORMAT ON 70 OUTPUT QNa IPR SMZ TKM FKM take measurement 3 15 REMOTE OPERATION 3 16 75 80 85 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 245 250 255 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 555 560 565 KKK RRR RRR RR ok ckckck ck ck ck ck RARA EE EE EE TE TEE EE EE ERE RRE RE k hok ck kockck kck Rok EK hock kock Rok FMI the ASCII data format Next Dump Register R using FM1 OUTPUT QNa FMT DRR DRR Dump Register R ENTER Na Real__array1 Real__arrayl now contains the real and imaginary parts of 401 complex numbers Next load the data into storage register D1 OUTPUT QNa LD1 Real arrayl LD1 Load Register D1 Register DT now contains the data held in Real array1 OUTPUT QNa TR2 DF7 ID1 Display register D1 PAUSE RREEKK RK RARE REA KER RRA RK RARA REA RARA RARA EE TEE EE EE EE E EE EE E EE EE EE RR RRA EK EH FM2 64 bit floating point binary HP Series 200 computer real number data format Next dump register A using FM2 Note the use of reduced sweep resolution OUTPUT QNa RSTt TKM FMZ DRA Changing sweep res clears registers so new TKM is required Enter the leading bytes I into an unused string ENTER Na USING
262. ter the INPUT equation as described under the INPUT listing found earlier in this section 4 Note the new softkey label that appears at the bottom of the menu TEST SET FWD REV This is a push push toggle type key that directly controls the direction configuration of the test set The change in configuration does not occur until the end of a sweep The ONE PORT calibration softkeys PARTial and FULL CAL found in the MEASR CAL menu are meant to be used with the HP 35677A B S parameter test set or a similar configuration of power splitter and directional bridge REF LEVEL BIV MARKER 40 700 000 000Hz 0 000dB 40 OOOdR MAS UDF B 883GB S22 BATA REG USER DEF INPUT COPY Troe Saz CENTER 10 700 600 000Hz SPAN 100 000 000Hz TEST SET AMPTD 15 0dB8m FWD REV Figure 4 41 SAVE INSTRUMENT STATE Figure 4 42 REFERENCE SAVE is a hardkey in the INSTRUMENT STATE section of the front panel used to display the menu of softkeys shown above These softkeys may be used to save 5 in strument states An INSTRUMENT STATE is the total set of instrument parameters This feature is convenient for saving a complex and or often used test configura tion and RECALLing it for use at a later time To use this feature 1 Press the SAVE hardkey to display the menu 2 Press the softkey corresponding to the register in which you wish to save the current instrument state If SAVE and RECALL hardkeys are held down when power is tu
263. testing the HP 3577A turning the beeper on and off service diagnostics and INPUT menu S parameter control INSTRUMENT STATE is also a term that refers to the state or values of all parameters This state may be SAVEd and later RECALLed For more information on the features described here refer to the hardkey of interest KNOB Figure 4 20 The KNOB in the DATA ENTRY section is used to move the marker or modify data It is toggled between these two modes with the unmarked key above it The cur rent mode of the knob is indicated by the LED s above it The knob may not be used to change the HP IB address 4 14 LENGTH A LENGTH A ON OFF LENGTH A LENGTH A ON OFF LENGTH B LENGTH B ON OFF Figure 4 21 LENGTH is a hardkey in the RECEIVER section of the front panel used to display the menu of softkey labels shown above These softkeys may be used to select the electrical length of each of the receiver inputs to com pensate for or simulate cable lengths Propagation velocity is assumed to be the speed of light The ac tual cable length should be compensated for using a relative velocity Each input s LENGTH feature may be turned off which is equivalent to setting its value to 0 To change the value of length for a receiver input 1 Press the LENGTH hardkey to display the menu 2 Press the softkey LENGTH for the channel to be modified if the label is not bright 3 Modify the value
264. to display the menu of softkeys shown above These softkeys may be used to define the screen trace in terms of how the complex data in trace memory is interpreted If any of the top 7 entries in the menu are bright the trace is on The trace may be turned off with the bottom softkey LOG MAGNITUDE is a softkey in the DISPLAY FUNC TION menu Immediately after preset or power on LOG MAG is the active DISPLAY FUNCTION If not already bright pressing this softkey defines the y axis as log DISPLAY FUNCTION REFERENCE magnitude lt does not accept data entry The default SCALE parameters for LOG MAGNITUDE are REF LEVEL OdBm DIV 10dBm REF POS 100 The REFERENCE LEVEL and DIVISION parameters are listed on the screen above the graticule Reference re fers to the dashed line its value is OdBm and its posi tion on the screen is top or 10096 The REFERENCE POSITION may be checked by pressing the hardkey SCALE and then the softkey REF POS At this point data may be entered for the reference position LINEAR MAGNITUDE is a softkey in the DISPLAY FUNCTION menu used to define the y axis as linear magnitude It does not accept data entry from the keypad When LINEAR MAQ is selected the SCALE parameters change to the following REF LEVEL 0 0V DIV 100 mV REF POS 0 096 PHASE is a softkey used to define the y axis as PHASE information The softkey label PHASE SLOPE appears in the SCALE menu when PHASE is the current displ
265. toggle the MARKER OFFSET OFF for the active trace MKR OFST ON OFF which should be trace two The same can be done for trace one after the TRACE 1 hardkey is pressed Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section which displays a menu of softkeys used to select the DISPLAY FUNCTION of the active trace in dicated by the LED over the TRACE 2 key Softkey used to select PHASE as the DISPLAY FUNCTION for the ac tive trace Selection of any softkey in this menu other than OFF turns trace two ON Moving the marker with the knob allows phase measurements to be made at any point on the trace Data may be read from the marker block for trace two The vertical parts of the trace represent 3609 phase wraps Since the HP 35774 stores data in complex form 180 is the range these values may have when interpreted as phase information Note that trace two will be noisy in the same area as trace one due to extremely low signal levels See Figure 2922 Figure 2 22 Bandpass Filter i REF LEVEL OYV OFFSET 49 250 000Hz Magnitude amp 0 00046 10 00008 MAG UDF 21 6848dB Phase Response 0 0deg 48 000deg MARKER 70 013 000 000Hz PHASE UDF 178 984deg ACTOR ATAN PANBARE vi LN LN AAA CENTER 70 000 000 000Hz SPAN 100 000 DOE x AMPTD O O0d amp m 2 25 MAKING MEASUREMENTS BANDPASS FILTER GROUP DELAY The next measurement is group delay The DISPLAY FUNCTION menu should still be displayed KEY DESCRIPTION Softkey used
266. top four in the mid will be assumed die and four near the bottom They are located such that there is no interference with the message block in which errors and warnings are displayed The format to be used is as follows ENA fi toliows lt EOI gt on the handshake of the last byte transferred ENORMES qq 2 2 TT Example 10 20 ENA ENW Use of Enter Annotation and Enter Menu 30 CKB DKY Use of Clear Keyboard and Dump Key 40 50 Adrs 711 60 ASSIGN Adrs TO Adrs 70 OUTPUT GAdrs ANC MNC i Clear annotation and menu 80 90 Next define the annotation and menu 100 110 OUTPUT QAdrs ENA 72 Special Test 120 OUTPUT QAdrs ENA 4 Select appropriate MENU REV 130 140 OUTPUT Adrs ENM 1 CONTINUE 150 OUTPUT Qadrs ENM 4 TEST FAILED 160 OUTPUT QAdrs ENM 8 ABORTO 170 480 Note that a pair of double quotes must be used to send 190 one double quote mark at execution time To get a 200 double quote to appear in the HP 3577A screen annotation 210 4 double quotes 7 must be written into the program 220 230 LOOP 240 OUTPUT QAdts MNT ANT t Turn annotation amp menu on 250 OUTPUT QAdrs CKB Clear the keyboard buffer 260 LOOP 270 OUTPUT QAdrs DKY Read the keyboard 280 ENTER Adrs Key Knob 290 EXIT IF Key 13 OR Key 16 OR Key 20 300 IF Key 1 THEN BEEP 1 no key pressed 310 END LOOP 320 OUTPUT QAdrs MNO Turn menu off 330 SELECT Key 340 CAS
267. trace synthesized 5Hz 200MHz program mable network analyzer It features menu driven operation using eight softkeys located next to the menu display area of the CRT A menu is a list of softkey labels that appears on the CRT by the softkeys Menus are displayed by pressing the hardkeys for the parameters to be modified or measurement to be made This permits control of many features with a minimum number of front panel keys by redefining the softkeys with each new menu Marker information and sweep parameters are displayed above and below the CRT graticule to give the operator the present in strument status Trace information displayed on the 3577A CRT is digitally stored as complex data real imaginary in trace memory Using this storage technique and the math processing capabilities of the HP 35774 any of 7 different display formats may be derived from the same trace data and changes in scale may be made without repeating the measurement All 35774 graticules are electronically generated on the screen as part of the display operation Thus no screen overlays are needed for polar or log graticules or the Smith chart In log sweep the graticule changes to reflect changes in start and stop frequencies Other features of the HP 3577A include electrical length correction measurement automatic plot routines for HP GL plotters user defined vector math vector averaging 1 Hz resolution bandwidth automatic self protection on the sour
268. tru ment does not pass the Confidence Test notify the nearest HP Sales and Service Office If the shipping con tainer is damaged or the cushioning material shows signs of stress notify the carrier as well as the Hewlett Packard office Keep the shipping material for the car rier s inspection WARNING The integrity of the protective earth ground may be interrupted if the HP 3577A is mech anically damaged Under no circumstance should the HP 3577A be connected to power i 4 INITIAL INSPECTION f it is damaged GENERAL INFORMATION SE Before applying ac line power to the HP 3577A ensure the voltage selector switch on the back panel of the instrument is set for the proper line voltage and that the correct line fuse is installed in the rear panel fuse holder The HP 3577A can be operated from any single phase ac power source supplying 86V to 127V from 48 Hz to 440 Hz 115V Voltage Selector setting or 195V to 253 from 48 Hz to 66 Hz 230V Voltage Selector setting Power consumption is less than 450 VA The HP 3577A is equipped with a three conductor power cord which when plugged into an appropriate recep tacle grounds the instrument cabinet The type of power cable plug shipped with each instrument depends on the country of destination Refer to Figure 581 for the part number of the power cable and plug configura tions available tf the appropriate power cable is not inc
269. tude Sweep of an Amplifier input R MEASR CAL USER ACTION USER ACTION REF LEVEL DIV MARKER 0 OdBm LAN FREG 0 0006Bnm 0 000d amp 8 MAG A 25 BSSdam SWEEP ALTERNTE SWEEP LOG FREG SWEEP SWP DIA UP DOWN START 40 0d8m STOP 0 0u48m FREG 100 000 000 000Hz Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Replace the amplifier with a BNC barrel and wait for a full sweep Softkey used to normalize the measurement Replace the BNC barrel with the amplifier Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey described previously Now the trace is amplifier input vs gain The gain is constant where the trace is level and is in com pression where the trace rolls off Next we ll use the marker to search for the 3 dB compression point 2 20 Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section ZERO MARKER MARKER SEARCH AMPLIFIER MAKING MEASUREMENTS Softkey used to move the marker to the point on the trace with the largest gain value Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey used to turn the OFFSET MARKER on at the position of the regular marker Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey used to display the MARKER SEARCH menu Note that the MARKER TARGET value is 3 dB Softkey used to search right for target The marker information block now contains the span over which the amplifier has a gain compression of 3 dB See Figure 2926 ende A A A AA A ER
270. u con tains only START FREQ STOP FREQ and FULL SWEEP There are no CENTER FREQ FREQ SPAN or SWEEP RESOLUTION softkeys as in LIN FREQ SWEEP Default sweep is from 50Hz to 200MHz FULL SWEEP is from 5Hz to 200MHz When LOG FREQ SWEEP is active the RES BW menu has an added item called AUTO RBW for automatic resolution bandwidth which is ON The sweep starts at 50Hz and stops at 200MHz and the resolution band width changes during the sweep to reduce LO feedthru at the lower frequencies If FULL SWEEP is selected the sweep starts at 5Hz and the 1Hz RES BW is active from 5Hz to 40Hz 4 seconds of settling occurs before the sweep begins Then the HP 3577A switches to 10Hz BW until it reaches 400Hz when it changes to 100Hz The last switch is at 4kHz where it switches to 1kHz RES BW When AUTO RBW is ON the RES BW selected bright is the widest bandwidth the AUTO RBW pro gresses to if 100Hz RES BW is selected and AUTO RBW is ON the HP 35774 does not switch to 1kHz RES BW at 4kHz as it would if 1kHz RES BW were selected Other menus that are changed by selecting LOG FREQ SWEEP are DISPLAY FUNCTION no DELAY MKR no MKR CENTER freq SWEEP TYPE no SWP DIR AMPTD SWEEP is a softkey label in the SWEEP TYPE menu It is a logrithmic sweep of the source output amplitude The default start and stop levels are 40 dBm and O dBm respectively Either start or stop am plitude may be from 49dBm to 15dBm and start may be larger
271. uation R 20 dB AR2 Attenuation A 0dB AAT Attenuation A 20 dB AA2 Attenuation B O0 dB ABT Attenuation B 20 dB AB2 impedance R 50 Q IR 1 impedance R 1 MQ IR2 Impedance A 50 Q EK impedance A 1 MQ 1A2 impedance B 500 iB1 impedance B 1 MQ iB2 Clear Trip Receiver CTR LENGTH LEN Length R entry LNR Length R Off LRO Length R On LR1 Length A entry LNA Length A Off LAO Length A On LA1 Length B entry LNB Length B Off 180 Length B On 181 Length Step Size entry LNS RECEIVER SUFFIX UNITS meters MET centimeters CM seconds SEC milliseconds MSC microseconds USC nanoseconds NSC exponent E 3 12 INSTRUMENT STATE Function SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Confid self test menu Self test channel R Self test channel A Self test channel B Return Beeper off Beeper on Service Diagnostics menu Source Leveling off Source Leveling on Settling Time off Settling time on Synthesizer Diag off Synthesizer Diag on Display Test Pattern Trace Memory Test Fast Processor Test I O port test More Serv Diag menu Display Memory Test Software Revision message Return S Parameters Off S Parameters On SAVE INSTRUMENT STATE Save state in register 1 Save state in register 2 Save state in register 3 Save state in register 4 Save state in register 5 RECALL INSTRUMENT STATE Recall old last state Recall register 1 Recall register 2 Recall register 3 Recall register 4 Recall register 5 INSTRUMENT PRESET PLOT MENU Plot
272. uding the 41 be kept together after the dump as the same in formation needs to be returned to the HP 3577A when the LMI is used The example that follows shows how to dump instrument state to a computer controlier and load instrument state back to the HP 3577A Example 10 20 i LMO Learn Mode Out dump instrument state 30 LMI Learn Mode In load instrument state 40 50 INTEGER integer array 0 549 60 ASSIGN Na TO 711 FORMAT ON Array of 550 16 bit words 3 19 REMOTE OPERATION 70 80 1100 bytes will be dumped 2 bytes per element of 90 integer array Next configure state and dump it 100 110 OUTPUT QNa IPR ITRZ iDFS FRA 1 MHZ SAM 15 DBM ST3 LMO 120 ENTER Na USING G Wi Inteper array 130 PAUSE 140 150 Integer array now contains 1100 bytes of instrument state 160 data This data may be reloaded as follows 170 180 OUTPUT QNa IPR LME 190 OUTPUT Na USING W integer array 200 210 END DUMP STATUS DMS This command dumps the Status Byte and two more bytes of instrument status informa tion plus a screen message the Serial Poll dumps only the Status Byte In the following table B7 is the most significant bit and BO is the least significant bit All data is in the ASCII format BYTE 1 The STATUS BYTE B7 Not used B6 RQS require service B5 Error bit B4 Ready for HP IB command B3 Key pressed B2 Measurement complete
273. uest Service bit RQS part of the Status Byte on 3 5 REMOTE OPERATION Figure 3 3 one of the eight data lines The Parallel Poll Con figure PPC command determines data line and logical sense used Example for HP Series 200 computers in BASIC Var PPOLL 7 The PARALLEL POLL CONFIGURE command PPC programs the logical sense and data line used by a specified device to respond to a parallel poll The configure word is coded as shown in Figure 393 The three least significant bits determine the data bus line for the response The fourth bit determines the logical sense of the response _ Decimal einan 2 0 010 9 1 001 p data line number sense bit Example for HP Series 200 computers in BASIC PPOLL SE 711 2 put RQS bit on DIO line 2 Sense 0 RQS true PPOLL CONFIGURE 711 9 put RQS bit on DIO line 1 Sense 1 RQS true Pass Control TCT take control shifts system con trol from one controller to another Since the HP 3577A has no controller capability it cannot respond REMOTE may be used to address the HP 3577A to listen When this command is issued the REMOTE front panel LED illuminates and the front panel is disabled except for the LCL key if LOCAL LOCKOUT is active the LCL front panel key is also disabled Examples for HP Series 200 computers in BASIC REMOTE 7 switches all devices on port seven from local to remote REMOTE 711 switches device addressed eleven f
274. uest to plot a graticule that has been turn ed off Results from pressing CLEAR TRIP in the ATTEN menu when no inputs were tripped Hardware failure User has requested data dump such as PLOT ALL and there is no listener on the bus Fast Processor didn t respond to self test Hardware failure Hlegal in polar display function HP IB Data loaded was supposed to be ASCII number characters Functions not allowed when SWEEP TYPE is ALTER NATE are STORE STORE amp DISPLAY and all CALIBRATION HP 1B Display function DELAY is not allowed in LOG SWEEP HP 1B Request to plot after all screen features have been turned off Data entry of a value beyond the capabilites of the HP 3577A such as SOURCE AMPLITUDE of 100 dBm When entering user defined functions other functions may be used as terms in the new function as long as their function number is smaller Hardware failure APPENDIX C MESSAGE OVERLOAD ON INPUTES RECALL FAILED STATE IS BAD REFERENCE UNLOCKED SELECTED TRACE IS OFF SET HP IB TO TALKONLY MODE SOURCE NOT TRIPPED SOURCE TRIPPED STOP MUST BE gt 1 05 START STORED DATA D1 D4 LOST SWEEP MODE MUST BE MANUAL SWEEP RATE UNCALIBRATED SWEEP RESOLUTN TOO COARSE SWEEP SPAN LIMITED SWEEP TIME INCREASED SWEEP TIMING ERROR SYSTEM ERROR TALK ONLY MODE SELECTED DESCRIPTION E One or more inputs are being overdriven by a large signal input but have not tripped This warn
275. umeric entry The HP 3577A accepts up per or lower case letters over the bus DEFINITIONS A SEEECT COMMIAND is a two letter prefix followed by a qualifier digit that selects a particular state of that function Example the HP IB code for PHASE display function 5 is DF5 IMMEDIATE EXECUTION COMMANDS execute a given operation when issued They require no other data Example Instrument Preset is IPR DATA ENTRY COMMAND is a three part command that enters a value for one of the parameters The three parts are prefix the parameter to be changed by the data en try data numbers and suffix units for the new value Source amplitude SAM is an example of a data entry command Example OUTPUT 711 SAM 0 DBM gs HP 3577A Program Codes have been categorized into five distinct groups to help explain hem These sare SOURCE RECEIVER DISPLAY FORMAT INSTRUMENT STATE HP IB ONLY 3 7 REMOTE OPERATION DISPLAY FORMAT Function TRACE 1 TRACE 2 DISPLAY FUNCTION Log Magnitude Linear Magnitude Phase Polar Real imaginary Delay Trace Off Delay Aperture menu Aperture 5 of span Aperture 196 of span Aperture 296 of span Aperture 496 of span Aperture 896 of span Aperture 1696 of span Return INPUT input R Input A Input B Input AJR Input DR Input DI input D2 Input D3 input LA Return User Defined Input Input input S Input 5 Input Copy input Te
276. unaddress if MLA Talk Only TEO no Extended Talker capability i4 Basic Listener unaddress if MTA no Listen Only LEO no Extended Listener capability SR1 complete Service Request capability REI complete Remote Local capability PP1 Parallel Poll remote configuration capability DC1 complete Device Clear capability DT1 complete Device Trigger capability CO no Controller capability Ei drivers are open collector This list of capabilities is printed on the rear panel near the HP IB connector as follows SH1 AH1 T5 TEO L4 LEO SR1 RLI PPI DC1 DT1 CO El DATA FORMAT VS TRANSFER RATE The HP 3577A offers three data formats for transferring certain types of data on the bus Data format may be selected for the following I O trace dumps register dumps and loads marker data dumps and marker posi tion dumps A trace is made up of real numbers and is defined by the INPUT key Trace one or trace two may be dumped output in any of the three data for mats A register is made up of real and imaginary numbers There will be twice as many numbers in a register 1 O as there are for a trace dump with the same sweep resolution Registers R A B D1 D2 D3 or D4 may be dumped or loaded in any of the three data formats As described in the previous paragraph not all HP d s required Each data format has a different T enfer tate The figures listed for transfer rate are average times shown here for comparison
277. urement set up begins after INSTRUMENT PRESET with the four hardkeys INPUT DISPLY FCTN FREQ and AMPTD This set up will be INPUT B R DISPLAY FUNCTION LOG MAG CENTER FREQ 70 MHz FREQ SPAN 100 kHz equivalent to setting START FREQ 69 95 MHz and STOP FREQ 70 05 MHz and AMPLITUDE 0 dBm MAKING MEASUREMENTS BANDPASS FILTER MEASUREMENT SET UP KEY DESCRIPTION This green hardkey in the INSTRUMENT STATE section of the front panel presets 3577A parameters to their default values These are listed under INSTRUMENT PRESET in the REFERENCE section Note that the INPUT menu is displayed when the HP 3577A is PRESET See Figure 2912 and the screen of your HP 3577A If the INPUT hardkey is pressed the menu will not change TOV PAK ANA RR aidati Figure 2 12 Default Menu INSTR PRESET REF LEVEL QIV MARKER 00 000 000 00 0 tz 9 0004Bm 10 000da MAG A 22 618dAm Data entry block E o 900H3 sd 200 080 200 900Hz copy AMPTD i10 0dBm Tre 2 4 Softkey used to change the INPUT definition to B R BIR arp Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Note the new menu These DISPLY K softkeys are the seven eight counting OFF ways that the measurement CES data may be interpreted by the HP 3577A Note that the current and default DISPLAY FUNCTION is Log Magnitude Make no change in this menu Figure 2913 The Frequency Menu REF LEVEL DIV MARKEA 1400 000 009 000Hz START 000dB 10 00048 MAG 8 4
278. ush push toggle type softkey Turning the feature off has the same effect on the measurement as if a value of O deg SPAN was entered for PHASE SLOPE FULL SCALE is a softkey used to change the value of magnitude represented by the outer ring of the polar graticule If the DISPLAY FUNCTION is POLAR the menu shown when the hardkey SCALE is pressed con tains FULL SCALE instead of REF LEVEL To change the value of FULL SCALE 1 Press the SCALE hardkey to display the menu 2 Press the FULL SCALE softkey if label is not bright 3 Modify the value with the knob or arrow keys OR 3 Enter a new value with the numeric key pad 4 Select units from the menu press a softkey PHASE REFERENCE is a softkey used to change the value of phase represented by the dashed line that exists between the center and outer ring of the graticule Changing the PHASE REFERENCE has the effect of rotating the trace The value of PHASE REF may be changed in the same manner as shown for REFERENCE LEVEL REFERENCE POSITION is a softkey used to reposition the dashed reference line on the polar graticule Chang ing the REF POS has the effect of rotating the trace and reference line The value of REF POS may be changed in the same manner as shown for REFERENCE LEVEL REFERENCE LINE ON OFF is a softkey used to turn the dashed reference line off and back on This is a push push toggle type key Turning the reference line off does not change the effect of ref
279. uuoo pa i 1 VZZSE dH 941 0 pea1 euuoo s g v 79S dH oul 03 pesn G VZZ9SE dH ay Jo Jeal BY uo sjndut OM d INTO Aa APIS PAGA OR er NM to AI DIA BNIN EYN MUNERA Lead 350 9c p a3ed uonoes e 2uaia 9M d 249 ut ICIOW 3130201 Jepun 1euJ9jx3 395 punoJ8 Sp 03 9JNSOJ YOHMS JO JeUBIS JL Jo e8pe Buje ay uo 3ueuja1nseoaul e 198811 03 pesn si 3ndut siu a6 ied wdd cn s e2u2818j21 S147 10 JIRIS SY ugpo SI 1949 pu3is asoym 1ndi3no sduaieja cuenbalj V ZH 001 uey 1942913 ZHW OL A0 2 uo0uueuqns Aue aq ABW 92u919J91 Jeujo1xe aug jo AD 4uanbalj 9y Up SL pue usamjeq eq pynoys jndui si 03 paidde jeusis ou adualajal cuanb 944 JeuJo91X9 UP 07 V 6 dH 94 YOO eseud o3 pes bnet zsak Gr SCAR BETS Ni dH 1X53 sajqe 1ep o apeusdn 03 dH WO4 ejqe reAe 942 SI9U9 S DIJON S19u9 se usiSuo BUIN sojqeo 19pjO YUM o quediwvos jou SI pue SJauogjsej 21139 7 E Re ah eg uOl3295 sesn JIO 59uuo SIY 419 JO11uOO2 JOWI e WOH Y 7 6G uoneunoju 219495 eu a Hi NOLILVTIVISNI 995 dH 9ui 40 uong1edo ay OG43u02 0 posn Gi dH at a SINGWISTIGV AV 1dSld gem WE EE e geng re S13NVd UVIY 13S 1531 YXILIWVUVd S S VLL9SE dH ANY H3ZATVNV HUO MLAN VZZSE dH IHL HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL The GETTING STARTED section is designed to help the first time user This section describes how to turn on the HP 35774 defines some terms used in the manual gives som
280. ve for Mia the HP 3577A stores A R measured with the open termination in D3 Then it requests the short termination and stores A R D3 in D4 stores A R D3 in D1 or D2 depending on the active trace defines K1 2 jO and stores K1 A R D3 in D3 Next it requests a standard load and stores D3 A R D4 in D3 stores D3 D1 or D2 in D3 which is now used as the error term B stores KT A R D4 to D4 stores D4 D1 or D2 to D4 now equivalent to the error term C and stores A R in D1 or D2 which is A in the error model expression Finally it defines F1 DA A R D3 and F2 A R D2YF1 Mectua mes here i S Mmoas t T l h d Z Z ipi A T Za Too Ti Too Toc Loc 8 Z open Is Toc A e 2h Ts ho he Rl v 0 I Loc Figure 4929 NOTE Changing either START or STOP frequencies destroys the calibration Be sure to repeat normalization after any frequency modi fication A MENU is a list of softkey labels that is displayed on the CRT next to the column of softkeys This part of the Mn is called the MENU AREA Y MARKER 10 700 060 000Fx LOG 000048 MAG 821 6 5852dB MAG LAN MAG PHASE POLAR REAL IMAG DELAY 0 000Hzr STOP 40 780 000 000Hz OFF Menu Figure 4230 No menu contains more than eight softkey labels Each softkey label is associated with the softkey beside it such that pressing its softkey effects the command rep resented by the softkey label Menus change
281. verloads input trip ped source tripped and reference unlocked The etror bit is cleared when the hardware error conditions have cleared and a serial poll is performed if the error bit is unmask ed If the bit is masked it will clear whenever the error conditions clear Le it won t stay set until the poll occurs It is also cleared by a dump status command DMS when the user receives the error information if all hardware er ror bits are clear Four levels of masking are provided for the user to select what type of programming errors will be reported by the error bit See MASKING THE STATUS BYTE READY for HP IB commands Set when the HP IB input buffer is completely empty all commands have been com pletely processed and if the last command was RST set tling is complete f a command is issued during a sweep the ready bit will clear until command processing is complete KEY PRESSED SRQ if unmasked this bit will be set when a key is pressed or the knob is turned Also this bit is set when the HP 3577A receives the SRQ command on the bus The set condition is cleared by a serial poll MEASUREMENT COMPLETE Set when sweep completes Cleared by the start of a new sweep DATA AVAILABLE Instrument will output data when ad dressed to talk Cleared by the handshake of the last byte REMOTE OPERATION BO DATA TRANSFER COMPLETE Set after the HP 3577A handshakes the last data byte in a dump Primarily design e
282. w 1st meas is done with TKM 340 LOOP 350 Starttime TIMEDATE 360 Oldfreq Freq 370 Freq RND 2 00E 8 2 Select next random frequency 380 E 390 Next go to the new frequency and begin settling 400 then dump the marker data from the last measurement 410 420 OUTPUT QNa SFR Freq HZRST DMT TRG 430 440 Note that TRG trigger the new measurement will not 450 occur until settling is complete 460 470 ENTER Na USING 96 2A lunk gets 1 characters 480 ENTER QNa nofmt Y gets marker data for Oldfreq 3 34 change from DF7 default to DF and line 610 to print the correct units after the value of the data dumped The second program is an example demonstrating the fastest 490 500 510 520 530 A A MM MAMMA LAM LP a RR RRR TTE PP a i AAA A A A VIVE YE A AAA AAAA FL rrr Y A A AR LV PPPOE TTT ETT ETT Aa PS P AMA Pt MUT a em 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 REMOTE OPERATION Start meas TIMEDATE Next wait for the data to be taken Data analysis may be performed here while waiting REPEAT Stat SPOLL 711 UNTIL BINAND Stat Meas complete Stoptime TIMEDATE Measure__time INT Stop___time Start__meas 1000 5 Time INT Stoptime Start__time 1000 5 DISP PASS Pass TOTAL TIME Time msec Measurement Measure time msec PRINT FREQ
283. with the knob or arrow keys OR 3 Enter a new value with the numeric key pad 4 Select units from the menu press a softkey LENGTH affects phase functions only there is no loss factor If the current DISPLAY FUNCTION is LOG or LIN MAG there is no change in the trace with changes in LENGTH Preset or default value 0 0m ON Upper limit 1 second or 300 000 000 meters Lower limit 1 second or 300 000 000 meters Resolution 001 ns or 1 cm Menu Units m cm SEC mSEC pSEC nSEC EXP LOCAL ci 55 050009 E Em Fic 0000 D S Figure 4 22 LOCAL is a hardkey in the INSTRUMENT STATE sec tion of the front panel used to change the HP 1B status of the HP 3577A from REMOTE to LOCAL if the LOCAL LOCKOUT command has not been issued The LCL key is part of the HP IB STATUS block This block has four LED indicators that show the HP IB status for REMOTE TALK LISTEN and SRQ If the REMOTE LED is illuminated none of the front panel keys have any effect until the LCL key returns LOCAL control which extinguishes the REMOTE LED If the HP IB controller has issued the LOCAL LOCKOUT com mand and the REMOTE LED is illuminated the LCL key cannot gain LOCAL control See the section on remote operation MARKER MARKER is a hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT sec tion of the front panel used to display the menus of soft key labels shown in Figure 4023 These softkeys may be used to read data from the displayed trace After
284. x 33 17595 BIONAR Tei 386 5455 Cable BIOTRON Argentina Telex 93859 M Cable HEWPARD Perth Fate S A Electronica A CM CS E MS P Bartolomeu Mitre 833 Sydney New South Wales 1036 BUENOS AIRES Office Tel 74 4 1011 74 49277 Hewtelt Packard Australia Ply Ltd 74 434589 17 23 Talavera Road Telex 18137 22754 NORTH RYDE N S W 2113 P DO Box 308 Zei 887 16 11 AUSTRALIA Telex 21561 Adelaide South Australia Cable HEWPARD Sydney Pty Ltd A CM CP E MS P Hewlett Packard Australia Div Lid AUSTRIA 153 Greenhill Road PARKSIDE S A 5063 Hewlett Packard Ges m b h Grottenhofstrasse 94 Tel 272 5911 S e 2 99 Verkauisburo Graz Telex 82538 8052 GRAZ Cable HEWPARD Adelaide RA KE Telex 32375 Brisbane Queensland CM O E Office Hewlett Packard Ges m b h Hewlelt Packard Australia Pty Ltd Wehlistrasse 29 5th Floor P O Box 7 A 1205 VIENNA Tek 222 35 16 210 Telex 135823 135066 Teachers Union Building 495 499 Boundary Street SPRING HILL Queensiand 4000 Tel 229 1544 A CM CP E MS P Telex 42133 Cable HEWPARD Brisbane BAHRAIN ALCMCS E MSP Green Salon l P O Box 557 BAHRAIN Tet 5503 Telex 884 19 P Wael Pharmacy P O Box 648 BAHRAIN Tet 54886 56 123 Telex 8550 WAEL GJ M BELGIUM Hewietl Packard Belgium S A N V Bivd de la Wofuwe 100 Woluwedal B 1200 BRUSSELS Tek 02 762 32 00 Teiex 23 494 paloben bru ACM CP E MP P BRAZIL Hewlett Packard do Brasi l e C Ltda
285. y care OOS NOTE Instruction manual symbol the product will be marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instruction manual in order to protect against damage to the instrument Indicates dangerous voltage terminals fed from the interior by voltage exceeding 1000 volts must be so marked Protective conductor terminal For protection against electrical shock in case of a fault Used with field wiring terminals to in dicate the terminal which must be connected to ground before operating equipment Low noise or noiseless clean ground earth terminal Used for a signal common as well as providing protection against electrical shock in case of a fault A terminal marked with this symbol must be connected to ground in the manner described in the installation operating manual and before operating the equipment Frame or chassis terminal A connection to the frame chassis of the equipment which normally includes all exposed metal struc tures Alternating current power line Direct current power line Alternating or direct current power line The WARNING sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a pro cedure practice condition or the like which if not correctly per formed or adhered to could result in injury or death to personnel The CAUTION sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to an operating procedure practice condition or the like which if not correctly perform
286. y in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey that displays a second menu used to do marker searches Note MARKER SEARCH that MARKER TARGET is active and that its default value shown in the ENTRY BLOCK is 3 dB Softkey used to search right for the MARKER TARGET value Note the new value of magnitude for the marker If no such value had been found the marker would not have moved and the screen message TARGET VALUE NOT FOUND would appear MKR R TARG 2 35 MAKING MEASUREMENTS 2 36 RETURN Figure 2 34 Low Pass Filter Pass Band Ripple LOW PASS FILTER Softkey used to move back to the primary menu Note that the MKR hardkey could have been used to display the same menu Softkey used to redefine the STOP FREQ as the present marker posi tion frequency Note that the graticule is redrawn and that the frequen cy annotation changes to match the new sweep Also note that this change in frequency requires renormalization or changing the INPUT definition back to B R Hardkey described previously Softkey used to define S parameter This step changes the INPUT defini tion from B R D1 to B R Since the frequency span has been changed D1 should not be used in the definition until the measurement is renormalized Hardkey in the DISPLAY FORMAT section Softkey The trace displayed is of the passband Note the change in the DIV value in the upper left han

HP 3577a User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents